Home

details

Contents

1. Operator Manual MESSAGE DATA HAND BUS DESCRIPTION BUS SHAKE MANAGEMENT M 5 R N MESSAGE EV ty R 1 N M NAME E S 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DIC S ACG Addressed Command Group M AC 0 1 Attention U UC 1 DAB Data Byte M DD B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B8 B2 B1 0 DAC Data Accepted U HS DAV Data Valid U HS 1 DCL Device Clear M UC iO 1 011 010 1 END U ST 1 5 End Of String M DD B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 0 GET Group Execute Trigger M AC 0 0 1 O 0 1 GTL Go To Local iO jo 0 0 0 1 1 IDY Identity u H IFC Interface Clear U UC LAG Listen Address Group M AD 011 1 LLO Local Lock Out M UC o iO 1 0 0 O 1 1 MLA My Listen Address AD 0 1 85184 3 B2 B1 1 Talk Address AD 1 10 B5 B4 B3 B2 Bi1 1 NSA Secondary Address SE 1 1 5 4 B2 B1 1 NUL Null Byte M DD lo jo lo lo 0 Other Secondary Address 5 SCG MSA NOT OTA Other Talk Address M AD TAG Primary Command Group PCG ACG UCG LAG TAG PPC
2. Boost query Return whether or not the 5725A Amplifier is in use for the output and which output is being boosted Responses VOLTAGE sourced by the 5725A Amplifier CURRENT sourced by the 5725A Amplifier OFF not sourced by the 5725A Amplifier Example BOOST returns OFF Return OFF when the 5725A Amplifier is not in use or not connected 6 8 Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries CAL ABORT 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Abort query Instruct 5500A to abort calibration procedure after present step Example CAL_ABORT CAL CONST X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Constant command query Retrieves the value in use of the given calibration constant Parameter The name of the calibration constant Response float The value of the constant Example CAL CONST VDAC G CAL DATE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Calibration Date command return date associated with active calibration constants Parameter See CAL_STORE for more on significance of the date there is none CAL FACT X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Fact command
3. Remote command Place the 5500A Calibrator into the remote state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 REN Remote Enable message When in the remote state the Control Display shows the softkey REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local Pressing this softkey returns the 5500A Calibrator to local operation If the front panel is locked out the Control Display shows the softkey REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL LOCK OUT See the LOCKOUT command To unlock the front panel use the LOCAL command or cycle the 5500A Calibrator power switch Parameter None Example REMOTE Place the 5500A Calibrator in the remote state and display this state on the front panel Control Display with a softkey REMOTE CONTROL RPT STR x 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Loads the user report string The user report string can be read on the Control Display in local operation and appears on calibration reports The CALIBRATION switch must be set to ENABLE Sequential command Parameter String of up to 40 characters Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries RPT STR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the user report string The user report string can be read on the Control Display in local operation and appears on calibration report
4. 8 62 8 81 Time Marker Function 8 63 8 82 Wave Generator Specifications essen 8 83 Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function 8 84 Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function 8 85 Oscilloscope Connections sees eee eee ee 8 86 Starting the Oscilloscope Calibration Option 8 87 The Output Signal 8 88 Adjusting the Output Signal sss 8 89 Keying te e reta 8 67 8 90 Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob 8 8 91 Using am HR 5500A Operator Manual 8 92 Resetting the Oscilloscope Option 8 68 8 93 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 69 8 94 The Volt E nctlOD 8 69 BeOS The V DIV Mehl 8 70 8 96 Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude 8 70 8 97 Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 71 8 98 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 72 8 99 The Edge Function esses enne 8 72 8 100 Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 73 8 101 The Leveled Sine Wave Function
5. CAL REF X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Reference query Return nominal value expected for reference entry Response 1 the nominal value 2 the accepted or implied unit Example 3 000000ef00 V CAL SHIFT 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Shift command return a calibration shift Parameter 1 char the shift type ACTIVE compares ACTIVE with STORED STORED compares STORED with OLD DEFAULT compares ACTIVE with DEFAULT 2 char the range name 3 float the magnitude at which to calculate the shift 4 float the frequency at which to calculate the shift Parameter 4 15 required for all ranges even when it is ignored Response float the shift CAL START IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Start command Start a calibration procedure Parameter 1 Procedure name MAIN SCOPE ZERO BOOST NOT FACTORY MAIN is the procedure for the 5500 except for scope and 5725 BOOST is the procedure for the 5725A SCOPE is the procedure for the 5500A scope cal option ZERO is the internal procedure to touch up zero offsets NOT aborts a procedure after the step is underway 2 Optional name of the step at which to start If this parameter is not provided it start
6. F3 01b eps Figure 3 1 Front Panel View Table 3 1 Front Panel Features 1 Output Display The Output Display is a two line backlit LCD that shows output amplitudes frequency and calibrator status Output values or potential output values if in standby are displayed using up to seven digits plus a polarity sign Output frequencies or potential output frequencies if the 5500A is in standby are displayed using four digits Calibrator status is indicated by displaying the following abbreviations OPR Displayed when an output is active at the front panel terminals or auxiliary amplifier terminals STBY Displayed when the 5500A is in standby ADDR Displayed when the 5500A is addressed over the IEEE 488 interface U When you change the output unsettled is displayed for a second or two until the output settles to within the specified accuracy m Displayed when the calibrator is making a measurement Thermocouple measurement feature only 2 Displayed when the amplitude is specified as typical only and or reduced resolution This occurs when operating the 5500A in the extended bandwidth mode Control Display The Control Display is a multipurpose backlit LCD used for displaying data entries UUT error adjustments softkey labels phase angles watts power factors and other prompts and messages When there isn t enough room on the Output Display output frequency is displayed on t
7. Coupled Commands Overlapped Commands eese Sequential Commands eee Commands that Require the Calibration Switch to be Enabled Commands for RS 232 Only eee rene Commands for IEEE 488 5 1 55004 Operator Manual 5 2 5 66 Command Syntax ssori aei en eee etna ie Parameter Syntax Rules ertet iere etie Extra Space or Tab Characters eee Terrminatots eene ete Incoming Character Processing sere Response Message Checking 55004 Status Serial Poll Status Byte STB sse Service Request SRQ Line sese eee Service Request Enable Register SRE Programming the STB and SRE eese Event Status Register ESR sess Event Status Enable ESE Register esses Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE Programming the ESR and ESE eene Instrument Status Register ISR serene Instrument Status Change Registers see Instrument Status Change Enable Registers Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCR and ISCE
8. Programming the ISR ISCR and Output QUEUE Ia Edo Te n d iei ev deti o Error QUEUS ex Ra TRES RR Remote Program Examples seen Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator sess Writing an SRQ and Error Handler ees Verifying a Meter on the IEEE 488 2 Verifying a Meter on the RS 232 UUT Serial Port Using OPC OPC and WA P Taking a Thermocouple Measurement eee Using the RS 232 UUT Port to Control an instrument Input Buffer Operation esses Remote Operation 5 Introduction AA Warning The 5500A Calibrator can produce voltages up to 1000 V rms and must be programmed with caution to prevent hazardous voltages from being produced without sufficient warning to the operator Programs should be written carefully and tested extensively to ensure safe operation of the 55004 Calibrator Fluke suggests that you include error catching routines in your programs These error catching routines will assist in detecting programming errors that could result in the instrument behaving differently to your intention By setting the Service Request Enable SRQ register described in paragraph 5 60 the 5500A Calibrator can be programmed to caus
9. The Output Signal Adjusting the Output Signal eese Value c bati deest ette e e edite Adjusting Values with the Rotary Using and OY re Resetting the Oscilloscope Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope The Volt Function T DHE IBI Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope Whe Edge Bun CH OD rrt eret ett tetris Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope The Leveled Sine Wave Function eee Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and The MORE OPTIONS Sweeping through a Frequency Range esee Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope The Time Marker Function eese Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope Testing the lFIgget Summary of Commands and Queries 2 212121 8 57 5500A Operator Manual 8 111 Verification Tables eene erae erede ect den
10. Resistance Compensation Off Capacitance Four Wire Capacitance Two Wire Capacitance Compensation Off 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 eae Connection UT Connection UT Connection T Connection T Connection T Connection T Connection T Connection T Connection WIDE WAVE Trianglewave Squarewave and Duty Cycle Truncated Sinewave Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series General Functions Cable Connections for Testing 80 Series Current Function Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series High Amps Function Cable Connections for Testing a 40 Series Watts Cable Connections for Testing a 50 Series DC Voltage AC Voltage Temperature RTD Temperature Thermocouple Typical IEEE 488 Remote Control Connections Typical RS 232 Remote Control Connections Typical IEEE 488 Port Connections Typical PC COM Port Connections xi List of Figures 5500A Operator Manual 5 5 Typical RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Connections 5 6 Typical RS 23
11. AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Voltage AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Current AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Power Phase and Frequency Accuracy AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewave NORMAL AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewave AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy AUX DC Voltage Offset AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Non Operator Fuse Replacement esee 7 1 5500A Operator Manual 7 2 Maintenance Introduction 7 1 7 2 Introduction This chapter explains how to perform the routine maintenance and calibration task required to keep a normally operating 5500A Calibrator in service These tasks include e Replacing the fuse e Cleaning the air filter e Cleaning the external surfaces e Calibration verification Refer to the Service manual for intensive maintenance tasks such as troubleshooting calibration or repair and all procedures that require opening the cover of the instrument The Service Manual also contains complete verification procedures for checking that traceability to national standards maintained by the normal calibration procedure Replacing the Line Fuse T
12. 9725 inm pi re 5 e Eee eee t EE Reset eon General Specifications 0 0 eneore neee DC Voltage Specifications 2 DC Current 1 Resistance Specifications sese AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications sese ee eee ee AC Current Sine Wave Specifications Capacitance Specifications sese eee ee Temperature Calibration Thermocouple Specifications Temperature Calibration RTD DC Power Specification Summary sse AC Power 45 Hz to 65 Hz Specification Summary PF 1 Power and Dual Output Limit Phase Specifications iie tat ero trie erat Pr nir HR bn de Calculating Power Uncertainty sees sese eee eee Additional Specifications sese Frequency Specihcaiong see eee eee Harmonics 2 to 50 Specifications AC Voltage Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications AC Voltage Non Sine Wave AC Voltage DC Offset Specifications eee AC Voltage Square Wave Characteristics sess 5500A Operator Manual 1 2
13. ISCEO X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable query Return the two bytes from the 16 bit ISCEO register See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Response lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example SCEO returns 4108 Return decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 if bits 12 SETTLED 3 IBOOST and 2 VBOOST are set to 1 ISCE1 X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable command Load the two bytes into the 16 bit ISCE1 register See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Parameter lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example 5 1 4108 Load decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 to enable bits 12 SETTLED 3 IBOOST and 2 VBOOST 6 21 5500A Operator Manual 6 22 ISCE1 X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable query Return the two bytes from the 16 bit ISCE1 register See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Response value decimal equival
14. New Reference command Set the new reference to the present 5500A Calibrator output value and exit the error mode if selected For example you might edit the 5500A Calibrator output using the EDIT and INCR commands and then use the NEWREF command to establish a new reference point and exit the error mode This is the same as pressing the 5500A Calibrator front panel key Parameter Example None N EWREF Set the reference value to the current 550A Calibrator output value OLDREF X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Old Reference command Set the 5500A Calibrator output to the reference value and exit the error mode if selected If editing the output using the ED T and NCR commands and you want to return to the reference value use the OLDREF command If editing the output and you want to make the edited value the new reference use the NEWREF command Parameter Example None OLDREF Set the output to the existing reference value clearing editing changes ONTIME X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Overlapped Sequential Coupled Calibrator On Time query Return the time since the 5500A Calibrator was most recently powered up Response Example 24 hou
15. Overlapped Commands X Overlapped Commands that require additional time to execute are called overlapped commands because they can overlap the next command before completing execution To be sure an overlapped command is not interrupted during execution use the OPC OPC and WAI commands to detect command completion For more information see Overlapped Commands in Chapter 5 Coupled Commands X Coupled The commands OUT WAVE DC OFFSET CUR POST and HARMONIC are coupled commands because they couple in a compound command sequence Care must be taken to be sure the action of one command does not disable the action of a second command and thereby cause a fault For more information see Coupled Commands in Chapter 5 BOOST X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Boost command Activate or deactivate a 5725A Amplifier and set the source preference to the 5725A Amplifier or to the 5500A Calibrator An error is reported if the 5725A Amplifier cannot be turned on or off for the present output Parameters ON activates the connected 5725A Amplifier OFF deactivates the connected 5725A Amplifier Example BOOST ON Activate the connected 5725A Amplifier if the last OUT command selected an output supported by the connected 5725A Amplifier BOOST X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled
16. 14 08 Figure 4 8 UUT Connection DC Current AC Current CHART RECORDER INPUT NORMAL AUX_ SCOPE A SENSE ES f4 09 eps Figure 4 9 UUT Connection Temperature RTD 4 15 5500A Operator Manual FLUKE 55004 CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX SGOPE Connection wiring must match thermocouple type e g K J etc 14 10 Figure 4 10 UUT Connection Temperature Thermocouple 4 18 Rms Versus Waveforms The 5500A Calibrator ranges for ac functions are specified in rms root mean square the effective value of the waveform For example 1 0 32 999 mV 33 329 999 mV 0 33 3 29999 V and so forth The sinewave outputs are in rms while the trianglewave squarewave and truncated sinewave outputs are in peak to peak The relationship between peak to peak and rms for the non sinewave types are as follows e Squarewave peak to peak x 0 5000000 rms Trianglewave peak to peak x 0 2886751 rms Truncated Sinewave peak to peak x 0 2165063 rms While the ac function ranges are directly compatible for sinewaves the rms content of the other waveforms is less apparent This characteristic leads to subtle calibrator range changes For example if you enter a sinewave voltage of 6 V rms assumed the selected range is 3 3 to 32 9999 V If you then use the softkeys to change from a sinewave to a trianglewave for example the display c
17. BOOST AMPLIFIER 9 F3 02 eps Figure 3 2 Rear Panel View Table 3 2 Rear Panel Features The Fan Filter covers the air intake to keep dust and debris out of the chassis air baffles The 55004 fan provides a constant cooling air flow throughout the chassis Fan filter maintenance is described in Section 7 Maintenance The CALIBRATION NORMAL ENABLE slide switch is used to write enable and disable the nonvolatile memory that stores calibration constants Switching to ENABLE allows changes to be written into memory and switching to NORMAL protects data in memory from being overwritten The switch is recessed to allow it to be covered with a calibration sticker to guarantee calibration integrity The SERIAL 2 TO UUT connector is used for transmitting and receiving RS 232 serial data between the 5500A and an RS 232 port on a Unit Under Test UUT Chapter 6 Remote Commands describes how to use the RS 232 serial interface for UUT communications The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST connector is used for remote control of the 5500A and for transmitting internal constant RS 232 serial data to a printer monitor or host computer Chapter 5 Remote Operation describes how to use the RS 232 serial interface for remote control The BOOST AMPLIFIER connector provides the analog and digital interface for the Fluke 5725A Amplifier After connecting the 5725A to the connector you co
18. eee 5500A SC600 8 esie ret 8 2 SC600 Option 8 3 Volt Specifications Pe HERE HT HR vetns 8 4 Edge Specifications cn irr he REIR SR RII ARR 8 5 Leveled Sine Wave Specifications see eee eee 8 6 Time Marker Specifications sese eee eee 8 7 Wave Generator Specifications see eee eee 8 8 Pulse Generator Specifications sese 8 9 Trigger Signal Specifications Pulse 8 10 Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker Function 8 11 Trigger Signal Specifications Edge Function 8 12 Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function 8 13 Trigger Signal Specifications sese eee essen 8 14 Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications 8 15 Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications 8 16 Overload Measurement Specifications sse 8 17 Oscilloscope 8 18 Starting the SC600 8 19 The Output Signal cenin Pre E E HE et daz 8 20 Adjusting the Output Signal sss esse eee 8 21 Keying mica Value uec eer 8 22 Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob 8 23 Using eund o e Nace 8 24 Resetting the SC600 Optio
19. Example HARMONIC 5 PRI Load the fundamental frequency at the primary PRI output 5500 Calibrator NORMAL terminals and the 5th harmonic frequency is at the secondary output 5500A Calibrator AUX terminals or 5725A Amplifier BOOST terminals if a 5725A Amplifier is connected and enabled For example if the fundamental frequency output is 60 Hz the harmonic frequency output is 300 Hz HARMONIC IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Harmonic query Return the present instrument harmonic characteristic and location of the fundamental output PRI primary the 5500A Calibrator NORMAL terminals or SEC secondary the 5500A Calibrator AUX terminals or 5725A BOOST terminals if a 5725A Amplifier is connected and enabled Response value PRI harmonic value fundamental at primary output value SEC harmonic value fundamental at secondary output Example HARMONIC retums 5 SEC Return the 5th harmonic frequency is selected and the fundamental is at the secondary output 5500A Calibrator AUX terminals or 5725A Amplifier BOOST terminals if a 5725A Amplifier is connected and enabled Therefore the harmonic frequency appears at the primary or 5500A Calibrator NORMAL terminals 6 19 5500A Operator Manual 6 20 IDN IEEE 488 RS 232 x Sequential Overlapped Coupled Identificati
20. e DC voltage e AC voltage DC current e AC current e DC power e AC power e Dual DC voltage 4 17 5500A Operator Manual 4 21 Dual AC voltage Capacitance Temperature RTD Temperature Thermocouple Resistance Boost operation using an auxiliary amplifier Setting DC Voltage Output Complete the following procedure to set a dc voltage output at the 5500A front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value n OQ d Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation Press to clear any output from the 5500A Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure dc voltage on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output maximum seven numeric keys For example 123 4567 Note At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above nominal you may notice a slight high pitched sound This is normal Press to select the polarity of the voltage default is Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 123 4567 mV below Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 10 Pr
21. Resistance Temperature Detector Type Default command Set the default Resistance Temperature Detector RTD at power on and reset which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands Parameters PT385 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT3926 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 003926 ohms ohm C NI120 120 ohm RTD empirical Curve Example RTD TYPE D PT3926 Set RTD default type to a 100 ohm RTD with curve 60 003926 ohms ohm C D X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Coupled Resistance Temperature Detector Type Default query Return the default Resistance Temperature Detector RTD used at power on and reset Responses PT385 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT3926 100 RTD curve 0 0 003926 ohms ohm C NI120 120 ohm RTD empirical Curve Example RTD TYPE D returns PT3926 Return PT3926 when the RTD default type is a 100 ohm RTD with curve 00 003926 ohms ohm C Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries SP_SET IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Host Serial Port Set command Set the RS 232 C settings for the 5500 Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HO
22. d 41742 47 0907 47 47 47 227 47 47 42 41042 47 4 7 ALT UL ATARI TTE AXTD UTI ATH GT 772 777277777277727777 4 Reinstall the filter element performing the filter removal steps in reverse order Figure 7 2 Accessing the Air Filter 5500A Operator Manual 7 6 7 4 General Cleaning For general cleaning wipe the case front panel keys and lens using a soft cloth slightly dampened with water or a non abrasive mild cleaning solution that does not harm plastics A Caution Do not use aromatic hydrocarbons or chlorinated solvents for cleaning They can damage the plastic materials used in the calibrator Performing a Calibration Check The following tests are used to verify the performance of the 5500A Calibrator If an out of tolerance condition is found the instrument can be re calibrated using the front panel or the remote interface The front panel calibration is self prompting and takes you through the complete procedure Complete details for calibrating the 5500A are provided in the 5500A Calibrator Service Manual PN 105798 The equipment listed in Table 7 2 are required to perform the calibration check If a specific instrument is not available a substitute instrument that assures a 4 1 Test Uncertainty Ratio may be substituted Table 7 2 Required Equipment for Checking Calibration Purpose test lead kit 5500 Leads Provides test lead
23. 1 See How IEEE 488 Operates later in this chapter In addition to the commands and special characters that emulate the IEEE 488 functions shown above there are several more commands that are related to operation and control of the actual RS 232 Host port and are therefore completely unrelated to IEEE 488 operations These include the following six commands SP SET SPLSTR SROSTR SP SET SPLSTR SROSTR 5 85 Commands for IEEE 488 Only Commands that are used for the IEEE 488 interface are identified in the command graphic by checking the X IEEE 488 check box This is all the commands except for those used for RS 232 operations See Commands for RS 232 Only All commands are transferred over the IEEE 488 as data except for the commands LOCAL REMOTE and LOCKOUT which are implemented per IEEE Standards as messages see Table 5 7 Table 5 7 Commands for IEEE 488 Only GTL LOCAL command GTR REMOTE command LLO LOCKOUT command SDC DCL Clear the device GET Execute a group trigger SPE SPD Print the serial poll string 1 See How IEEE 488 Operates later in this chapter 5 30 Units 5 36 Command Syntax The following syntax rules apply to all the remote commands Information about syntax 8 07 Remote Operation Using Commands of response messages is also given Parameter Syntax Rules Table 5 8 lists the vocabulary of units
24. 012 000 xL 2 Hew EOF 5 5 2 2 000 000 to gt Set using the num rc AR zd LH ric keypad gl44f eps 5 Press not ENTER several times until the message STORE CHANGES DISCARD CHANGES appears or if there were no changes the reset display If you select STORE CHANGES the serial and host port setting are saved in the instrument non volatile memory 5500A Operator Manual 5 7 Testing RS 232 Host Port Choose or adapt one of the following test procedures to test the 5500A Calibrator RS 232 Host port connected to a PC COM port A typical connection is shown in Figure 5 4 Note the use of a null modem cable for connection See Appendix D for information about RS 232 cables and connectors Null Modem Cable SERIAL 1 COM Port FROM HOST Port c ZA 5500A Calibrator UUT Controller F5 0e eps Figure 5 4 Typical PC COM Port Connections Terminal This procedure uses the Terminal accessory supplied with Windows or equal to test RS 232 Host port operation To use this method you must select term as the Remote I F in Step 4 in the procedure RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure Visual Basic This procedure uses Visual Basic see Appendix E to test RS 232 Host port and RS 232 UUT port operation 5 8 Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal Complete the f
25. 5 4 Interface Messages that the 5500A Accepts 5 5 Interface Messages that the 5500A Scnds sees 5 6 Commands for RS 232 Only asenin ener nennen nnns 5 7 Commands for IEEE 488 OY sese eee 5 8 Units Accepted in Parameters and Used in Responses sse eee 5 9 Terminator a 5 10 Response Data Types eret Grote tae hee oio eene Ee Ru re ia 5 11 Status lt T 6 1 Command Summary by Function 1 2020 eee 7 1 Replacetrient tee eene eng tice ke educere thee Eee ND 7 2 Required Equipment for Checking Calibration sese 7 3 Non Operator Fuse Replacement 9 1 Options and ACCESSO T 5500A Operator Manual Figure 55004 Multi Product Calibrator RS 232 Remote Connections 5725 Amplifier Accessing the Fuse and Selecting Line Voltage Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke Front Panel View Rear Panel View SETUP Softkey Menu Tree SETUP Softkey Menu Displays MEAS TC Softkey Menu MEAS TC Softkey Menu Displays Resistance Four Wire Resistance Two Wire
26. Parameter Example ERR command and STBY command None OP n ER E Connect the selected output to the 5500A Calibrator front panel terminals Also lights the annunciator in the key OPER X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Operate query Return the operate standby setting Response 1 Operate U Standby Example OPER returns 1 Return 1 when the 5500A Calibrator is in operate X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns a list of the installed hardware and software options including any 5725A Amplifiers that are attached Responses Example option string lt option string 0 OPT returns 5725A Return 57254 Oscilloscope Calibration Option is installed options list separated by commas no options are installed 5500A SC 5500A SC when the 5725A Amplifier option is attached and the Remote Commands Summary of Commands and Queries 6 OUT IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped X Coupled Sets the output of the 5500A Calibrator and establishes a new reference point for the error mode If only one amplitude is supplied the 5500A Calibrator sources a single output If two amplitudes are supplied the 5500A
27. Response lt character gt Returns OFF VOLT EDGE LEVSINE MARKER or WAVEGEN TRIG IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Programs the oscilloscope s trigger output BNC Parameters OFF Turns the trigger output off Turns the trigger output on Frequency is the same as the signal at SCOPE output DIV10 Turns the trigger output on Frequency is 1 10 of the signal at SCOPE output DIV100 Turns the trigger output on Frequency is 1 100 of the signal at SCOPE output TRIG X 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the output setting of the oscilloscope s trigger Parameters None Response lt character gt Returns OFF DIV1 DIV10 or DIV100 OUT IMP IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance Parameters 250 Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance to 50 Z1M Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance to 1 MQ OUT IMP X IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the impedance setting of the oscilloscope s output Parameters None
28. SET MODE terminal 502 PTIOMZ LAST F levsine A 2 2 5 Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the frequency response 1 Reconnect the signal by pressing the key on the 5500A Select 50 Q impedance or use a 50 Q external termination directly at the oscilloscope input gl032i eps 2 Adjust the sine wave settings in the Output Display according to the calibration recommendations in your oscilloscope manual For example for the Fluke PM3392A oscilloscope start at 120 mV 50 kHz To enter 120 mV press 1 2 0 Py then press enten 3 Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary The sine wave should appear at exactly six divisions peak to peak as shown below If necessary make small adjustments to the voltage amplitude until the wave reaches exactly six divisions To fine tune the voltage press to bring a cursor into the Output Display move the cursor with the 4 key and turn the rotary knob to adjust the value See Fine Tuning Values earlier in this chapter gl009i bmp 8 78 5500A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 4 6 7 Increase the frequency to 60 MHz 100 MHz instruments 150 MHz for 200 MHz instruments To enter 60 MHz press 6 0 M then press Continue to increase the frequency slowly until the waveform decreases to 4 2 divisions as shown b
29. 9600 N 8 1 baud parity data stop Comml PortOpen True End Sub 6 While still in the Code window select Command from the Object list Enter the code shown below The Chr 10 means ascii character 10 line feed Sub Commandl1 Click Comml Output REMOTE Chr 10 End Sub 7 Select Command2 from the Object list Enter the code shown below Sub Command2 Click Comml Output LOCAL Chr 10 End Sub 8 Select Command3 from the Object list Enter the code shown below where uut command is the command you selected for the UUT response Sub Command3 Click Comml Output UUT SEND uut command Chr 10 End Sub For example UUT SEND REMS n Note the use of n which indicates Carriage Return CR as the end of line character Other characters include r Line Feed t Tab b Backspace and Form Feed Also note the double quotes around uut command to show embedded quotes D 2 Appendices D Creating a Visual Basic Test Program 9 On the Visual Basic Toolbar click the Start button Ol to run the RS 232 test program below is typical If there are no errors continue to Step 10 Ff 0d bmp 10 Click the Stop button La on the Toolbar to stop the program Hint Before continuing to the next step connect the 5500A Calibrator and UUT if applicable and test the program in actual operation 11 Save the program as
30. enne 4 43 Entermg a DC Offset cierre Rede teet 4 44 Using the 5725A 4 45 5725A Amplifier Output 42 ritiro 4 46 Editing and Error Output 4 47 Editing the Output Setting 4 48 Displaying the Output Error eese 4 49 Using Multiply and Divide eee 4 50 Setting Output nennen nnne 4 51 Setting Voltage and Current Limits eene 4 52 Sample Applications en ener 4 53 Calibrating an 80 Series Handheld Multimeter 4 54 4 55 EARTH Connection 4 56 Testne the Meter vias ttd te e E 4 57 Calibrating the Meter etat eene tin eee aho 4 58 Testing a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer 4 59 Testing Watts VA VAR 4 60 Testing Harmonics Volts Performance 4 61 Testing Harmonics Amps Performance 4 62 Calibrating a Fluke 51 Thermometer eee 4 63 Testing the Thermometer sss sees sees sees ee ee eee 4 64 Calibrating the 4 2 Front Panel Operation 4 Introduction 4 1 Introduction A A Warning The 5500A Calibrator is capable of supplying le
31. the correct value of the quantity being measured uncertainty The maximum difference between the accepted consensus or true value and the measured value of a quantity Uncertainty is normally expressed in units of ppm parts per million or as a percentage units Symbols or names that define the measured quantities Examples of units are V mV A kW and dBm See also SI System of Units UUT Unit Under Test An abbreviated name for an instrument that is being tested or calibrated var Symbol for voltampere reactive the unit of reactive power as opposed to real power in watts Appendices A Glossary verification Checking the functional performance and uncertainty of an instrument or standard without making adjustments to it or changing its calibration constants volt The unit of emf electromotive force or electrical potential in the SI system of units One volt is the difference of electrical potential between two points on a conductor carrying one ampere of current when the power being dissipated between these two points is equal to one watt voltage guard A floating shield around voltage measurement circuitry inside an instrument The voltage guard provides a low impedance path to ground for common mode noise and ground currents thereby eliminating errors introduced by such interference watt The unit of power in the SI system of units One watt is the power required to do work at the rate of one joule
32. 4 22 4 25 Setting DC Power Output sse eee enn 4 24 4 26 Setting AC Power Output sse 4 25 4 27 Setting a Dual DC Voltage Output eee eee 4 28 4 28 Setting a Dual AC Voltage Output sese 4 30 4 29 Setting Resistance 4 32 4 30 Setting Capacitance Output sees eee eee eee 4 33 4 31 Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple 4 35 4 32 Setting Temperature Simulation 4 37 4 33 Measuring Thermocouple 8 4 39 4 34 Wavetorin Types 4 40 4 35 Jui M 4 41 4 36 THAN PIG T 4 4 4 37 4 38 Truncated edes i HORE ce 4 39 Setting Harmonies eti ce ERE E A 4 40 Adjusting the Phase sese 4 41 Entering a Phase Angle 4 42 Entering a Power Factor sese eee 4 43 Entermg a DC Offset ect tee et eer 4 44 Using the 5725A Amplifier esses 4 47 4 45 5725A Amplifier Output sees eee ee eee 4 46 Editing and Error Output Settings 2 eee 4 47 Editing the Output Setting sse 4 48 Displaying the Output Error sss sees eee eee 4 49 Using Multiply and Divide sese 4 50 Setting Output 4 51 Settin
33. 8 Select the Local command from the Control menu then click OK in the Parameter Input Window Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes back to the reset condition shown below 330 my auta 5 5 2 5 9 From the uao prompt type a and then press the ENTER or RETURN key nn323f eps 5 9 5500A Operator Manual 5 5 Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control The 5500A Calibrator is fully programmable over an RS 232 link with a PC the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port Figure 5 2 You can enter individual commands from a terminal write your own programs using for example a Windows based language such as Visual Basic or run optional Windows based Fluke software such as 5500 CAL or MET CAL The RS 232 cable length for the port should not exceed 15 meters 50 feet although longer cable lengths are permitted if the load capacitance measured at a connection point including signal terminator does not exceed 2500 pF RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure Complete the following procedure to set up the SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port The RS 232 parameters you select here must match the parameters set for the PC COM port The factory defaults shown below in bold are 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Other parameters include flow control EOL end of line character and EOF end of file characters 1 Turn the 5500A Calibrator power on You may operate the calibrator during
34. 8 11 8 1 8 12 8 12 8 12 Q 8 13 8 13 Q 8 14 Q 8 14 Q 8 14 8 15 O 8 15 O 8 15 8 16 O 8 16 O 8 17 8 17 8 18 ds loo oo po po loo loo po po po gt loo ON gt gt 8 45 Measuring Input Resistance and 8 32 8 46 Input Impedance Measurement sss esse eee eee eee 8 32 8 47 Input Capacitance Measurement 2 14412 4 0 0 2 000440 0000000000 0143 8 33 8 48 Testing Overload Protection eee 8 33 8 49 Remote Commands and Queries sss sese 8 34 8 50 General Commands eed tree E P ETE HE aeta 8 35 8 51 Edge Function Commands sss sees esee 8 38 8 52 Marker Function Commands sese 8 38 8 53 Video Function Commands eese 8 38 8 54 Overload Function Commands sess 8 39 8 55 Impedance Capacitance Function 8 40 8 56 Verification Tables sees 8 41 8 57 DC Voltage Verification essere 8 41 8 58 AC Voltage Amplitude Verification 8 42 8 59 AC Voltage Frequency Verification 8 42 8 60 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 Output aret te UE E 8 43 8 61 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 50 Output Impedance 8
35. 8 85 5500A Operator Manual 8 111 Verification Tables Before the 5520A Scope Cal Option leaves the Fluke factory it is verified to meet its specifications at the following test points The verification test points are provided here as a guide when re verification is desired 8 112 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into 1 Load Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p Deviation mV 1 Year Spec mV 5 0 mV 10 Hz 0 11 P o 5500A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 1 MQ Load cont Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p Deviation mV 8 113 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into 50 2 Load Nominal Value p p Measured Value p p Deviation mV 125 10 125 10 125 10 125 10 262 60 262 60 1 Year Spec mV 1 Year Spec mV 5 0 mV 10 Hz 0 11 5 0 mV 100 Hz 0 11 5 0 mV 1 kHz 0 11 5 0 mV 5 kHz 0 11 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 11 10 0 mV 100 Hz 0 12 10 0 mV 1 kHz 0 12 10 0 mV 10 kHz 0 12 20 0 mV 10 kHz 0 15 44 9 mV 10 Hz 0 21 44 9 mV 10 kHz 0 21 50 0 mV 10 kHz 0 23 100 0 mV 100 Hz 0 35 100 0 mV 1 kHz 0 35 100 0 mV 10 kHz 0 35 200 0 mV 10 kHz 0 60 449 0
36. Depth 47 3 cm 18 6 in overall 5725A Amplifier Height 13 3 cm 5 25 in standard rack increment plus 1 5 cm 0 6 in for feet on bottom of unit e Width 43 2 cm 17 in standard rack width e Depth 63 0 cm 24 8 in overall Weight without options 5500A Calibrator 22 kg 49 Ib 5725A Amplifier 32 kg 70 Ib Absolute Uncertainty Definition The 5500A specifications include stability temperature coefficient linearity line and load regulation and the traceability of the external standards used for calibration You do not need to add anything to determine the total specification of the 5500A for the temperature range indicated Specification Confidence Interval 99 1 After long periods of storage at high humidity a drying out period with the power on of at least one week may be required Introduction and Specifications General Specifications 1 16 DC Voltage Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C Stability Resolution Maximum R of output uV 24 hours 1 C ange put uV uV Burden 90 days ppm output iV Auxiliary Output dual output mode only 2 1 Remote sensing is not provided Output resistance is 5 for outputs 2 0 33 V The AUX output has an output resistance of 10 2 Two channels of dc voltage output are provided Range Bandwidth 0 1 to 10 He Bsp Bandwidth 10 to 10 kHz rms ppm output uV Auxiliary Output dual output mo
37. F3 06 eps Figure 3 6 MEAS TC Softkey Menu Displays 3 23 5500A Operator Manual C 500 to 50G Enter the value of the temperature offset 500 to 500 degrees This value is applied to the actual measurement to either reduce add to the adjusted value The factory default is 0 Figure 3 6 MEAS TC Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 24 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Contents TNO DUCTION T Turning on the Warming up the Calibrator eee Using the aT TTT Using the Setup Menu fore Using the Instrument Setup Menu see Selecting an External Amplifier 2 Utility Functions Menu esee nennen Using the Format EEPROM Menu eere Resetting the Calibrator sees nenne Zeroing the rer Using the Operate and Standby Modes Connecting the Calibrator to UUT sese Recommended Cable and Connector Whento Use BARTH reptile eter tt eee eek Four Wire versus Tw
38. of output of range 2 Ranges Resolution Six digits on each range 0 0110 10 He Two digis ciegos ma 110555 Maximum Current Trianglewave amp Truncated Sinewave Frequency 4510 1 KHz Six digits on each range 110 10 kHz 10 to 45 Hz Two digits 0 93 to 6 19999 A 45 to 1 kHz Six digits on each range 1105 kHz 621031A 45 to 500 Hz Two digits on each range 500 to 1 kHz Six digits on each range 1 All waveforms are peak to peak output ranges 2 Uncertainty is stated in peak to peak Amplitude is verified using an rms responding DMM 1 30 Introduction and Specifications 1 Additional Specifications 1 39 AC Current Non Sine Wave Specifications cont 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty 5 C 96 of output of range 27 Output Resolution 0 0110 10 Hz Two digits e g 50 MA e 101046 Hz 4510 1 KHz Six digits on each range 110 10kHz 0 01 to 10 Hz Two digits C 10 10 45 Hz m 4510 1 Hz Six digits on each range 110 10 KHz 1010 45 Hz Two digits 0 6610 4 399998 45101KHz Six digits on each range io 5 kHz 4410 22A 45 to 500 Hz Two digits on each range 500 to 1 kHz Six digits on each range 1 All waveforms are peak to peak output ranges Maximum Squarewave Current Ranges Frequency Uncertainty is stated in peak to peak Amplitude is verified using rms responding DMM 1 40 AC Current Square Wave Characteristics typical Setting Time 1 lt 4 4 400 Hz 4
39. AC Voltage Triangle Wave Characteristics typical AC Current Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications AC Current Non Sinewave Specifications AC Current Non Sinewave Specifications cont AC Current Square Wave Characteristics typical AC Current Triangle Wave Characteristics typical Introduction and Specifications Introduction 1 1 Introduction The Fluke Model 5500A Multi Product Calibrator Figure 1 1 is a precise instrument that calibrates a wide variety of electrical measuring instruments With the 5500A Calibrator you can calibrate precision multimeters that measure ac or dc voltage ac or dc current ac or dc power resistance capacitance and temperature With the Oscilloscope Calibration option you can use the 5500A Calibrator to calibrate analog and digital oscilloscopes Specifications are provided in this chapter specifications for the Oscilloscope Calibration option are provided in Chapter 8 AA Warning If the 5500A Calibrator is operated in any way not specified by this manual or other documentation provided by Fluke the protection provided by the Calibrator may be impaired The 5500A Calibrator is a fully programmable precision source of the following DC voltage from 0 V to 1020 V AC voltage from 1 mV to 1020 V with output from 10 Hz to 500 kHz AC curre
40. Calibrator Outputs Performance Limits VAR KVAR Phase Normal Phase VA KVA Model 41 Harmonics Vac in Only Screen 60 Hz 5 0 V 0 0 30 0 mV 145 156 145 156 0 4 2 2 8 0 V 0 0 30 0 mV 234 246 234 246 0 4 2 2 100 0 V 157 0 150 0 mV 14 3k 13 3k 14 15 5 4k 6 3 155 159 5k 6k k 100 0 V 157 0 360 0 mV 37k 29k 32k 40k 10k 18k 155 159 10 0 V 46 0 1 40 V 9 2 10 2 13 14 9 6 10 44 48 5 5 6 100 0 V 46 0 1 40 V 92 102 135 145 96 106 44 48 1 Connect the calibrator to the Model 41 as shown in Figure 4 18 Note Voltage is connected to the Model 41 amps channel to simulate current clamp operation I mV 1 A 5500ACALIBRATOR FLUKE 41 777 NORMAL AUX Score RTD 200 AUXV 14 18 Figure 4 18 Cable Connections for Testing 40 Series Watts Function 2 Verify that the EARTH indicator is on if not press as necessary 3 Set the calibrator output to 5 0V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 30 mV at 60 Hz on the AUX output 4 59 5500A Operator Manual 4 60 4 60 9 Press the WAVE MENUS softkey on the calibrator Ensure the Phase angle is 0 00 degrees Press opr Select W from VAW on the Tester
41. DESCRIPTION Integers for some controllers or computers are decimal numbers in the range 32768 to 32768 Responses in this range are labeled Integer Example ESE 123 ESE returns 123 Numbers that may have up to 15 significant figures plus an exponent that may range from E20 Example DC_OFFSET 1 4293E 00 String Character Response Data CRD Any ASCII characters including quotation mark delimiters SRQ from 5500A SRQSTR SRO from 5500A Example returns This type of response is always a keyword Example OUT 10V 100H2 FUNC returns ACV Indefinite ASCII IAD Any ASCII characters followed by EOM Queries with this type of response MUST be the last Query in a program message OPT 5725 Example returns CAL reports and lists which contains Line Feeds are typically of this type Binary Block Data special data type defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard This type is used in PUD query It is defined as follows non zero digit digits user data The non zero digit specifies the number of characters that will follow in the lt digits gt field Characters allowed in the digits field are 0 through 9 ASCII 48 through 57 decimal The value of the number in the lt digits gt field in decimal defines the number of user data bytes that follow in the lt user data gt field The maximum response is 64 characters
42. Remote Operation Using Commands Table 5 4 IEEE 488 Interface Messages Receive controller sends UNL automatically after the device has successfully received a device dependent or common query Mnemonic Name Function ATN Attention A control line that when asserted notifies all instruments on the bus that the next data bytes are an interface message When ATN is low the next data bytes are interpreted as device dependent or common commands addressed to a specific instrument DAC Data Accepted Sets the handshake signal line NDAC low DAV Data Valid Asserts the handshake signal line DAV DCL Device Clear Clears the input output buffers END End A message that occurs when the Controller asserts the EOI signal line before sending a byte GET Group Execute Trigger a TC measurement and put the reading in the output buffer Trigger GTL Go To Local Transfer control of the 5500A from one of the remote states to one of the local states See Table 5 1 LLO Local Lockout Transfers remote local control of the 5500A See Table 5 1 IFC Interface Clear A control line that sets the interface to a quiescent state MLA My Listen Addresses a specific device on the bus as a listener The controller Address sends MLA automatically whenever it directs a device dependent or common command to a specific instrument MTA My Talk Addresses a specific device on the bus as a talker The c
43. Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple 4 35 Setting the Output 4 17 Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control 5 10 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control Setting Voltage and Current Limits Setup and Utility came mse SETUP 3 6 Setup menu 4 4 Setup Menus Format EEPROM 4 6 IEEE 488 Port 5 7 Instrument Setup RS 232 Host Port Utility Functions Menu SETUP Softkey Menu Tree SHIFT key 3 8 Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude 8 17 Signal Adjusting during Oscilloscope Calibration 8 14 B 66 Sinewave 4 41 Softkey Menu Trees 3 3 Setting Harmonics Softkeys Using the 4 4 SP_SET 6 35 SP_SET remote command Special Functions Menu 4 6 Specifications AC voltage dc offset Oscilloscope Calibration Option 8 5 60 Power uncertainty SPLSTR remote command SPLSTR remote command Squarewave 4 41 Squarewave and Duty Cycle SRE Programming the Register 5 37 SRE remote command SRE remote command SRQ Service Request Line SRQSTR remote command Standard Equipment Table Status Checking 5500A 5 35 Register Overview Figure 5 36 Register Summary Table Serial Poll Status Byte Status Commands STB Explained 5 35 Programming the SRC_PREF remote command 6 36 SRC_PREF remote command SRQSTR remote command STB remote command STB
44. auto and then enter 1 mV the calibrator will adjust the range limit to 10 mV and will output 1 mV from within the 10 mV range If you set the 40 mV range to locked and then enter 1 mV the calibrator will output 1 mV from within the 40 mV range The default range setting is auto which should always be used unless you are troubleshooting discontinuities in your oscilloscope s vertical gain The range setting will always return to auto after you leave Levsine mode 5500A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 104 Sweeping through a Frequency Range When you change frequencies using the sweep method the output sine wave sweeps through a specified range of frequencies letting you identify the frequency at which the oscilloscope s signal exhibits certain behavior e g changes amplitude Before you start this procedure make sure you are in the MORE OPTIONS menu and the sine wave is displayed on the oscilloscope Perform the following procedure to sweep through frequencies 1 Make sure the output signal shows the starting frequency If not key in the starting frequency then press 2 Toggle FREQ CHANGE to sweep Toggle the RATE to slow if you want to observe a very slow sweep over a small range 3 Key in the end frequency then press After you press the signal sweeps through frequencies between the two values you entered and the Sweep menu appea
45. nonvolatile When you press from the power up state the display changes as follows CaL SHOL IHSTHT FUTILITY SPECS SETUP FUNCTHS This is the primary instrument setup menu The list below describes submenus available through each softkey and tells you where you can find further information in the manuals e CAL Calibration Opens the calibration menu Softkeys in this menu activate calibration to external standards calibration check and dc zeros calibration Another softkey displays calibration date information and another opens a calibration report menu Zero calibration is described later in this chapter e SHOW SPECS Show Specifications Future Displays published 5500A Calibrator specifications duplicating the information provided in Chapter 1 of this manual NSTMT SETUP Instrument Setup Selects the desired temperature standard and opens submenus to access Output Display and Remote Setups e UTILITY FUNCTNS Utility Functions Allows you to initiate a self test format the nonvolatile memory and review the instrument configuration software versions and user report string These features are explained under Utilities Function Menu later in this chapter Front Panel Operation 4 Using the Setup Menu 4 6 Using the Instrument Setup Menu The softkeys in the instrument setup menu accessed by pressing INSTMT SETUP softkey in the Setup Menu are shown below STO OUTPUT DISPLAY REM
46. 0 00009495 on 0 000095 013 y 0 000095 030 0 0001925 030 0 0001925 049 0 0002895 0499 0 0002895 0 00029 05 CUT 0 00029 135 0 0 000715 435 0 0 000715 219 0 001135 249 0 0 0 001135 22 0 00114 22 __ ___ 0 00114 66 0 00334 sd 0 00334 8 41 5500A Operator Manual Table 8 16 DC Voltage Verification cont Nominal Measured Deviation V dc 1 Year Spec V dc Value V dc Value V dc 10 99 0 005535 10 99 0 005535 11 0 00554 11 0 00554 70 5 0 03529 70 5 0 03529 130 0 06504 130 0 06504 6 599 50 Q 0 0165375 8 58 AC Voltage Amplitude Verification Table 8 17 AC Voltage Amplitude Verification 1 MO output impedance unless noted Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 year Spec Value V p p Hz Value V p p V p p V p p 0 001 1000 0 000041 0 001 1000 0 000041 0 01 1000 0 00005 0 01 1000 0 00005 0 025 1000 0 000065 0 025 1000 0 000065 0 11 1000 0 00015 0 11 1000 0 00015 0 5 1000 0 00054 0 5 1000 0 00054 2 2 1000 0 00224 2 2 1000 0 00224 11 1000 0 01104 11 1000 0 01104 130 1000 0 13004 130 1000 0 13004 6 599 50 0 1000 0 0165375 8 59 Voltage Frequency Verification Table 8 18 AC Voltage Frequency Verification 1 MQ output impedanc
47. 1 3V 100 MHz 19 60 1 3V 125 MHz 26 10 1 3V 160 MHz 26 10 1 3V 200 MHz 26 10 1 3V 220 MHz 26 10 1 3V 235 MHz 26 10 5500A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Flatness cont Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p Deviation mV 1 Year Spec mV 1 3V 250 MHz 26 10 5 5 V 500 kHz 82 5 5 5 V 1 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 1 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 2 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 5 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 10 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 20 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 50 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 100 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 125 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 160 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 200 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 220 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 235 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 250 MHz 110 00 8 121 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Frequency Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Frequency Deviation 1 Year Spec 1 3V 50 kHz 0 0013 kHz 1 3V 10 MHz 0 0003 MHz 1 3V 250 MHz 0 0063 MHz 8 95 5500A Operator Manual 8 122 Marker Generator Function Verification Nominal Interval Measured Interval Deviation 1 Year Spec 4 98 5 25 12 ms 2 00s 4 05 ms 999 21 ms 1 03 ms 500 00 ms 262 50 us 200 00 ms 45 00 us 100 00 ms 12 50 us 50 00 ms 3 75 us 20 00 ms 900 000 ns 10 00 ms 350 00 ns 5 00 ms 150 00 ns 2 00 ms 54
48. 10 Press to select the polarity of the current default is 4 11 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m 12 Press A 13 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries For example 123 4567 mV and 234 567 mA below 4 24 Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 4 26 14 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 15 Press to activate the calibrator output When changing power output levels you must reenter both voltage and current in either order Hint Enter voltage or current and then a watts entry value using The remaining volts or current value is calculated and displayed Two softkey labels appear on the Control Display I OUT and LO s QUT o s BUX tied boost open e IOUT Current Output Selects the current output between the 5500A Amplifier aux and 5725A Amplifier boost If a 5725A Amplifier is not connected AUX will be in all capital letters and the softkey will have no function e 0 Low Potential Output Terminals The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the 5500A When the front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are tied at the UUT select open with the LO s softkey If the NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are not tied at the UUT select tied with the LO s softk
49. 295 6 1 6 K 80 0 C 80 0 0 8 112 0 1 4 K 530 0 C 530 0 1 2 986 0 2 3 K 1355 0 C 1355 0 2 1 2471 0 3 8 J 197 0 C 197 0 1 0 322 6 1 7 J 258 0 C 258 0 1 1 496 4 1 9 J 705 0 C 705 0 1 5 1301 0 2 7 1 When changing thermocouple types be use to change the corresponding hookup wire K type thermocouple wire changes to J type thermocouple wire 4 64 Calibrating the Thermometer The following procedure refers to the Fluke 51 as the Unit Under Test UUT Use copper hookup wire for all connections except for steps 17 to 20 A Caution When you are directed to short a switch grid on the 51 use only the elastomeric switch pad that is supplied because you could damage the printed circuit assembly pca if a hard tool is used 1 Turn the UUT off and remove the top case leaving the pca in the bottom case 2 Ensure the calibrator is in standby and connect the UUT to the calibrator as shown in Figure 4 19 When making this connection with the UUT case top removed make sure that the wide blade is oriented the same as the case top would normally allow 3 Simultaneously short the TP1 grid and turn on the UUT by shorting the ON OFF switch grid Hold the elastomeric switch pad on for at least 3 seconds after turn on This puts the UUT into the Thermocouple Calibration mode 4 Select C mode and T1 on the UUT Note The next f
50. 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic 8 64 Leveled Sinewave Verification Harmonics Table 8 23 Leveled Sinewave Verification Harmonics Nominal Value V p p 0 0399 0 0399 0 099 0 099 0 399 0 399 1 2 1 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Frequency 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 400 kHz 400 kHz 800 kHz 800 kHz 1 MHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz 40 MHz 80 MHz 80 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz 400 MHz 600 MHz 600 MHz Measured Value dB Deviation dB 1 Year Spec dB 5500A SC600 Option Verification Ta
51. 4 39 5500A Operator Manual The measured temperature appears in the Output Display below is typical The lower case m blinks on when a measurement is being taken Meas TC terminal Measurement at the front panel TC terminals Displays the actual dc voltage at the front panel TC terminals This is a display only not a softkey function TC MENUS Thermocouple Menus Opens the submenus supporting thermocouple outputs e Open TCD Open Thermocouple Detect Selects on or off for the Open TCD feature When Open TCD is on a small electrical pulse checks for thermocouple continuity that in most cases will have no effect on the measurement If you are measuring the thermocouple with the 5500A Calibrator in parallel with another temperature measuring device select off for Open TDC When an open thermocouple is detected TC is displayed in the TC menu providing positive identification of the fault e UNITS Temperature Units Selects C or F as the temperature unit REF SRC Reference Source Selects intrnl Internal or extrnl External temperature reference source The reference source indicates the ambient temperature contribution to the thermocouple output which is taken into account when simulating an accurate temperature output Select intrnl when the selected thermocouple has alloy wires and you are using the isothermal block internal to the 5500A Calibrator Select extrnl when using an external isothermal
52. 5500A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT without a remote port _ 5500A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT with an IEEE 488 remote port or to 5500 RS 232 gt SERIAL 2 Port X COM Port TO UUT 9 e om 5500A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT with an RS 232 remote port F5 01 eps Figure 5 1 Typical IEEE 488 Remote Control Connections 5 5 5500A Operator Manual 5 6 SERIAL 1 FROM HOST X Port 5500A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT without a remote port 56 25 SERIAL 1 Ne COM Port 2 FROM HOST 9 IS Port 5500A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT with an RS 232 port via PC RS 232 SERIAL 2 Port P COM Port TO UUT y Port 5500A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT with an RS 232 remote port via 5500A Figure 5 2 Typical RS 232 Remote Control Connections F5 02 eps 5 3 Remote Operation 5 Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control IEEE 488 Port Setup Procedure Complete the following procedure to set up the 5500A Calibrator for remote operations using IEEE 488 remote control port The purpose is to select
53. 8 34 The Leveled Sine Wave Function The Leveled Sine Wave LEVSINE function uses a leveled sine wave whose amplitude remains relatively constant over a range of frequencies to check the oscilloscope s bandwidth When you check your oscilloscope you change the wave s frequency until the amplitude displayed on the oscilloscope drops 30 which is the amplitude that corresponds to the 3 dB point Default values are 30 mV p p 50 kHz 8 21 5500A Operator Manual 8 22 8 35 To access the LEVSINE menu press the softkey under MODE until levsine appears Output SCOPE MORE SET TO terminal 500 OPTIONS LAST levsine ag see LAST F volt 50 kHz edge MORE levsine OPTIONS marker Menu wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu Each option in the LEVSINE menu is described below OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 50 Indicates the location and impedance of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press disconnect the signal press You cannot change the impedance while you are in LEVSINE mode MORE OPTIONS Opens additional menu items which are described in detail under The MORE OPTIONS Menu SET TO LAST F Toggles between the current frequenc
54. Changing between remote and local operation 5 21 Character Processing Incoming CHASSIS GROUND Binding Post Checking 5500A status Cleaning the Air Filter 7 4 CLS remote command Command Summary by Function 6 3 Command syntax information Commands Alphabetical List 6 8 Calibration Switch Enabled Cleaning General IEEE 488 Only RS 232 Only Sequential Summary by Function Table of 6 3 Types of Using Commands for RS 232 Only Common Commands 5 26 6 4 Compound Commands Connecting the 5725 Amplifier 2 7 Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4 9 Control Display 3 4 Cooling Considerations Coupled Commands CUR POST remote command CUR POST remote command Current Limit setting Setting AC Output Setting DC output D DC Current Amplitude Accuracy 7 9 DC Current Output DC Offset Entering of DC Power Amplitude Accuracy AUX DC Power Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL DC Power Output 4 24 DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy AUX 7 8 DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL 7 7 DC Voltage Offset Accuracy DC Voltage Output Setting of DC Voltage Dual voltage setting DC_OFFSET remote command 16 13 DC_OFFSET remote command Device Dependent Commands Display Control 3 4 Output 3 4 Displaying the Output Error 4 50 DIVIDE 3 7 Divide Using Multiply and Divide 4 50 DPF remote command DPF remote command 16 13 Du
55. Choose 1 s to 60 s Perform the following procedure to test the overload protection of an oscilloscope 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope 2 Select the voltage type DC or AC using the OUT VAL softkey 3 Keyin the voltage level The default value is 5 V 4 If necessary change the duration Refer to the procedure described above The default duration is 10s 5 Check for test results displayed with the UUTTRIP softkey 8 49 Remote Commands and Queries 8 34 This section describes commands and queries that are used specifically for the SC600 Option Each command description indicates whether it can be used with IEEE 488 and RS 232 remote interfaces and identifies it as a Sequential Overlapped or Coupled command IEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232 Applicability Each command and query has a check box indicating applicability to IEEE 488 general purpose interface bus or GPIB and RS 232 remote operations Sequential Commands Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands For more information see Sequential Commands in Chapter 5 Overlapped Commands Commands SCOPE TRIG and OUT IMP are designated as overlapped commands because they may be overlapped interrupted by the next command before they have completed execution When an overlapped command is interrupted it may take longer to execute while it waits for other commands to
56. DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES To avoid explosion do not operate the instrument in an atmosphere of explosive gas DO NOT REMOVE COVER DURING OPERATION To avoid personal injury or death do not remove the instrument cover without first removing the power source connected to the rear panel Do not operate the instrument without the cover properly installed Normal calibration is accomplished with the cover closed Access procedures and the warnings for such procedures are contained both in this manual and in the Service Manual Service procedures are for qualified service personnel only DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE IF PROTECTION MAY BE IMPAIRED If the instrument appears damaged or operates abnormally protection may be impaired Do not attempt to operate the instrument under these conditions Refer all questions of proper instrument operation to qualified service personnel Table of Contents Chapter Contents Page 1 Introduction and 1 1 IntrOdUctlOD ret e ai a PR 1 2 to Contact Fluke T 1 3 Operation Overview ener ener nnne 1 4 Local Operation iicet ee 1 5 Remote Operation RS 232 sss 1 6 Remote Operation IEEE 488 cccccsccsceseceseceseceeeeseeeseeeeeeeneneenaes 1 7 Where To Go from 1 8 Instr
57. TX Transmit Line 5 22 Remote Operation IEEE 488 Interface Overview 5 22 IEEE 488 Interface Overview The IEEE 488 parallel interface sends commands as data and receives measurements and messages as data The maximum data exchange rate is 1 Mbyte with a maximum distance of 20 meters for the sum length of the connecting cables A single cable should not exceed 4 meters in length Some commands are reserved for RS 232 serial operation because these functions must be implemented as IEEE messages per the IEEE Standards For example the command REMOTE could be sent as data over the IEEE 488 interface to place the 5500A Calibrator into remote but it is not because the IEEE Standards call for the remote function to be sent to the device as the uniline message REN This is also true for several other commands and functions as shown below with their equivalent RS 232 emulation A summary of IEEE 488 messages is shown in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 RS 232 Emulation of IEEE 488 Messages GTL LOCAL command GTR REMOTE command LLO LOCKOUT command SDC DCL C lt Cntl gt C character clear the device GET T lt Cntl gt character execute a group trigger SPE SPD lt Cntl gt P character print the serial poll string UNL UNT not emulated on RS 232 The IEEE 488 interface is based on the IEEE Standards 488 1 and 488 2 For detailed information refer to the standards
58. and WAVE MENUS Control Display also shows the real power output for sinewaves Power out is computed as Power Cosine Volts x Current where is the phase difference between the volts and current waveforms Cosine is also known as the Power Factor PF 28 4587 mi T OUT WAVE 1123 4 Hz Alles MENUS aux boost I WAVE L z PHASE AEM P sine sine tied 0 00 J sine sine tied D to tri tri open 130 00 zquare square truncs truncz 4 27 5500A Operator Manual 4 28 I OUT Current Output Selects the current output between 55004 Amplifier aux and 5725A Amplifier boost If 5725 Amplifier is not connected AUX will be in all capital letters and the softkey will have no function WAVE MENUS Waveform Menus Opens submenus for selecting the type of harmonic waveform front panel LO terminal condition and phase e HARMONIC MENUS Harmonic Frequency Menus Opens submenus for selecting harmonic outputs See Setting Harmonics later in this chapter e V WAVE Voltage Waveform Selects the waveform for the voltage output at the NORMAL terminals See Waveform Types later in this chapter e I WAVE Current Waveform Selects the waveform for the current output at the front panel AUX terminals See Waveform Types later in this chapter e 0 Low Potential Output Terminals front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals must be tie
59. line and copies it to the Phase line of the Control Display 7 Press one or more times to return to previous menus Entering a Power Factor Complete the following procedure to enter a phase shift as a power factor PF PF Cosine where is the phase shift This procedure assumes you have already sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output using sinewaves as the waveform 1 Press the softkey WAVE MENUS opening the waveform menu 2 Press the softkey PHASE opening the phase entry menu 3 Press the softkey SHOW PF opening the power factor entry menu 4 Press the decimal point key and numeric keys to enter the desired power factor maximum three numeric keys For example 678 5 Press the softkey PF to toggle between a leading lead or lagging lag power factor default is lead 6 The Control Display now shows the value of your entry For example a leading power factor of 678 below Power Factor SHO Heu pF 673 lead PHASE 7 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the New pf line and copies it to the Power Factor line of the Control Display 8 Press one or more times to return to previous menus 4 45 5500A Operator Manual 4 43 Entering a DC Offset 4 46 When the calibrator single output is an ac voltage of sinewaves trianglewaves squarewaves or truncated sinewaves you can apply a dc offset When applying an offset to squarewave out
60. mapa COM vo 14 17 Figure 4 17 Cable Connections for Testing 80 Series High Amps Function Set the calibrator output to 3 5 A at 0 Hz and press Verify the error is within specification d Repeat the previous step using 10 0 A at 0 Hz Verify the error is within specification e Press on the calibrator and press the blue button on the DMM to switch to ac measurements f Set the calibrator output to 3 5 A at 60 Hz and press opr Verify the error is within specification g Repeat the previous step using the following calibrator settings AC Current Frequency 3 5A 1 0 kHz 10 0A 60 Hz 10 0A 1 0 kHz 4 57 Calibrating the Meter Continue with calibration if any range was out of tolerance in the previous procedure Note The adjustment for calibrating the meter requires disassembling the meter Refer to the diagrams and access procedures in the 80 Series Service Manual 4 57 5500A Operator Manual 4 58 4 58 4 59 Verify that the calibrator is set to 0 V dc in standby Press if it is not Turn on the 80 Series DMM and set its function switch to y Connect a set of test leads to the DMM as shown in Figure 4 15 Set the calibrator to 3 5 V dc and press oPR The DMM should now display 3 500 0 001 If necessary adjust R21 to obtain the proper display poses My dp 6 Set the DMM function switch to and set the calibrat
61. volt sweep 10 MHz auto edge 100 kHz locked levsine marker 10 mV wavegen 40 mV video 100 mV putes meas 7 400 mv overld 1 3V Each option in the MORE OPTIONS menu is described below FREQ CHG Toggles between two settings that control the way the output signal adjusts to a new frequency Jump is the default setting Jump causes the output signal to jump immediately to a new frequency setting Sweep causes the signal to sweep through a series of frequency values over a range you set Use the sweep function to watch the signal gradually change over a given bandwidth and see the point at which its amplitude changes Details for using the sweep function are provided under Sweeping Through a Frequency Range RATE Used when FREQ CHANGE is set to sweep to select a sweep speed of 100 kHz 1 MHz or 10 MHz A slower sweep rate lets you watch the frequency change very slowly After a faster sweep you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slower sweep over a subset of your previous frequency range RANGE The softkeys toggle between two settings The first setting auto changes the range limit automatically in accordance with the voltage level The second setting locked freezes the present range limit subsequent changes in voltage level are then measured with this range limit There are six range limits in LEVSINE mode 10 mV 40 mV 100 mV 400 mV 1 3 V and 5 5 V When set to
62. 0 01 0 01 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 039 0 04 0 04 Frequency 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz 390 MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz Measured Value V p p Deviation 1 Year Spec V p p V p p __ 0 00025 ____________0 00025 0003 __ ____________0 0003 ____________0 0005 ____________0 0005 ____________0 0005 ____________0 0005 0005 0005 ____________0 0005 0005 ____________0 000475 ____________0 000475 0006 ____________0 0006 oon oon Pp 00 oon __ oon oon oon oon Ium ul ____________0 000685 000065 000088 00008 000166 ____________0 00166 000166 000166 000166 000166 00066 000166 0007 5500A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 Table 8 24 Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Value V p
63. 0 047 see AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0 08 300 totaling 1 Ax 0008 800 added to 300 1 1 mA Expressed in percent 1 1 mA 1 A x 100 7 0 11 96 see AC Current Sine Wave Specifications PF Adder Watts Adder for PF 0 5 60 at 400 Hz is 2 73 see Phase Specifications Total Watts Output Uncertainty Upower 40 047 40 11 2 73 2 73 VARs When the Power Factor approaches 0 0 the Watts output uncertainty becomes unrealistic because the dominant characteristic is the VARs volts amps reactive output In these cases calculate the Total VARs Output Uncertainty as shown in example 3 Example 3 Output 100 V 1 A 60 Hz Power Factor 0 0872 0 85 Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 0 04 6 6 mV totaling 100 V x 0004 40 mV added to 6 6 mV 46 6 mV Expressed in percent 46 6 mV 100 V x 100 0 047 see AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0 08 300 totaling 1Ax 0008 800 added to 300 1 1 mA Expressed in percent 1 1 mA 1 A x 100 0 11 see AC Current Sine Wave Specifications VARs Adder VARs Adder for 85 at 60 Hz is 0 02 see Phase Specifications Total VARS Output Uncertainty Uvans 0 0472 0 11 0 022 0 12 1 1 25 5500A Operator Manual 1 29 Additional Specifications The following paragraphs pr
64. 30 mV 10 kHz 0 177 30 mV 20 kHz 0 217 30 mV 50 kHz 0 257 30 mV 100 kHz 0 370 30 mV 450 kHz 0 950 300 9 5 Hz 5 550 300 mV 10 Hz 0 207 300 mV 45 Hz 0 047 300 mV 1 kHz 0 047 300 mV 10 kHz 0 047 300 mV 20 kHz 0 087 300 mV 50 kHz 0 133 300 mV 100 kHz 0 227 300 mV 500 kHz 0 640 3V 9 5 Hz 5 550 3V 10 Hz 0 118 3V 45 Hz 0 022 3V 1 kHz 0 022 3V 10 kHz 0 022 3V 20 kHz 0 062 3V 50 kHz 0 110 3V 100 kHz 0 227 3V 450 kHz 0 490 30 V 9 5 Hz 5 550 30 V 10 Hz 0 118 30 V 45 Hz 0 032 30 V 1 kHz 0 032 30 V 10 kHz 0 032 30 V 20 kHz 0 069 30 V 50 kHz 0 157 30 V 90 kHz 0 227 Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL cont Nominal Value Frequency Hz Measured Value Deviation 90 Day Spec V V 45 Hz 0 042 1 2 0 042 10 kHz 0 065 18 kHz 0 081 45 Hz 0 048 1 kHz 0 048 5 kHz 0 160 8 kHz 10 kHz optional 0 200 7 13 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy AUX The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of ac voltage at the 5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals in the presence of a voltage at the NORMAL terminals Nominal value Nominal Value Frequency Measured Deviation 90 Day Spec V V Hz Value Hs NORMAL AUX AUX V 200 mv 10 mV 45 Hz 3 780 1 kHz 3 780 300 mv 10 mv 5 k
65. 500 0 mV 3 3 V 3 3 4 0V 4 0 V 33 0 V 33 0 V Measured Value dc Deviation mV 1 Year Spec mV 0 10 0 11 0 11 0 15 0 15 0 16 0 16 0 21 0 21 0 23 0 23 0 65 0 65 0 72 0 72 1 22 1 22 1 35 1 35 8 35 8 35 10 10 10 10 82 60 82 60 8 89 5500A Operator Manual 8 116 Edge Function Verification Frequency Pulse Response Time ns 1 Year Spec ps 25 0 mV 1 MHz 400 250 0 mV 1 MHz 400 250 0 mV 10 kHz 400 250 0 mV 100 kHz 400 250 0 mV 1 MHz 400 2 5V 1 MHz 400 8 117 Wave Generator Function Verification 1 MQ Load Waveform Nominal Value Frequency Measured Value Deviation 1 Year Spec mV Square 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 25 mV Square 20 0 mV 10 kHz 0 70 mV Square 89 0 mV 10 kHz 2 77 mV Square 219 0 mV 10 kHz 6 67 mV Square 890 0 mV 10 kHz 26 80 mV Square 6 5 V 10 kHz 195 10 mV Square 55 0 V 10 kHz 1 65 V Sine 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 25 mV Sine 20 0 mV 10 kHz 0 70 mV Sine 89 0 mV 10 kHz 2 77 mV Sine 219 0 mV 10 kHz 6 67 mV Sine 890 0 mV 10 kHz 26 80 mV Sine 6 5 V 10 kHz 195 10 mV Sine 55 0 V 10 kHz 1 65 V Triangle 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 25 mV Triangle 20 0 mV 10 kHz 0 70 mV Triangle 89 0 mV 10 kHz 2 77 mV Triangle 219 0 mV 10 kHz 6 67 mV Triangle 890 0 mV 10 kHz 26 80 mV Triangle 6 5 V 10 kHz 195 10 mV Triangle 55 0 V 10 kHz 1 65 V 8 90 5500A SC300 Option Verifi
66. 5500A Operator Manual 4 25 Setting DC Power Output Note Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the 5500A via the LO s softkey selection tied The calibrator produces a dc power output by sourcing a dc voltage on the NORMAL outputs and a dc current on the AUX outputs Complete the following procedure to set a dc power output If you make an entry error press one or more times to clear the display then reenter the value Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT by adapting the voltage and current connections Set the UUT to measure dc power on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output maximum seven numeric keys For example 123 4567 Note At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above nominal you may notice a slight high pitched sound This is normal Press to select the polarity of the voltage default is Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 123 4567 mV below cb QV nA 9 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567
67. 8 112 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 1 MO Load 8 113 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 50 Load 8 114 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 50 Q Load 8 115 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 1 Load 8 116 Edge Function Verification 8 117 Wave Generator Function Verification 1 Load 8 118 Wave Generator Function Verification 50 Q Load 8 119 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Amplitude 8 120 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Flatness 8 121 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Frequency 8 122 Marker Generator Function Verification 8 58 5500A SC300 Option 8 Introduction 8 76 Introduction The Oscilloscope Calibration Option provides functions that help you maintain your oscilloscope s accuracy by verifying the following oscilloscope characteristics Vertical deflection characteristics are verified by calibrating the voltage gain The Volt function lets you compare the voltage gain to the graticule lines on the oscilloscope Pulse response is checked using the Edge function by verifying the accuracy of the oscilloscope s measurement of pulse transitions Frequency response is checked by verifying the bandwidth using the Leveled Sine Wave function A leveled sine wave is monitored until the 3 dB poi
68. A Caution Damage caused by overheating may occur if the area around the fan is restricted the intake air is too warm or the filter becomes clogged The air filter must be removed and cleaned every 30 days or more frequently if the calibrator is operated in a dusty environment The air filter is accessible from the rear panel of the calibrator 7 4 7 Maintenance Cleaning the Air Filter F7 02 eps 7 5 Shake out the excess water then allow the filter element to dry thoroughly Pull the filter frame straight out from the calibrator before reinstalling it Grasp the top and bottom of the air filter frame Wash the filter element in soapy water b Squeeze the edges of the frame towards each other to disengage the filter tabs from the slots in the calibrator b Rinse the filter element thoroughly Unplug the instrument To clean the air filter refer to Figure 7 2 and proceed as follows a 1 2 Remove the filter element 3 Clean the filter element DEIT 27247422 TING DD TITID 1742 0 42 27 0194740 L 7 PARADE ATIE TTIE 9 i 4747 204240 TUTINDI TI 0747947 TUN TUR 7 272 7 m 2 7 MED EVN 00729407 CN 27207267 662057070670 4 7 AILLI EIEL LALLA LA CLOT ILS EVELI OL DLII EEN OEP 7 T TET ADAM TTII
69. A voltage 233 V is selected when the previous output voltage was less than 33 V Output function is changed between ac or dc voltage when the output voltage is 233 V ac or dc current temperature and any other function resistance and any other function capacitance and any other function A peak to peak voltage output squarewave trianglewave or truncated sinewave changes to rms voltage output 233 V sinewave For example if a peak to peak output of 40 V is changed to rms output of 40 V by changing the waveform using the WAVE softkey the calibrator goes into the standby mode The output location is changed for example by selecting an amplifier Excluding selecting the 5725A for ac voltage or for current if the 5500A current output location is set to 5725A An overload condition is detected Front Panel Operation Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4 13 Connecting the Calibrator to a 00 4 14 A Warning The 5500A Calibrator is capable of supplying lethal voltages Do not make connections to the output terminals when a voltage is present Placing the instrument in standby may not be enough to avoid shock hazard since the key could be pressed accidentally Press reset and verify that the annunciator is lit before making connections to the output terminals The outputs labeled NORMAL HI and LO are used to source voltages resistances capacitance and resistance temperature detector RTD calibration values The LO t
70. AUXV F3 01c eps Figure 3 1 Front Panel View cont Table 3 1 Front Panel Features cont The ENTER Enter Value key loads a newly entered output value shown on the Control Display into the 5500A which appears on the Output Display The new value can come from the numeric keypad If you press ENTER without identifying the units for the entry in most cases the 5500A keeps the units that were last used This allows you for example to enter 1 mV and then later enter 10 to obtain 10 V The V units were saved from the last entry but not the multiplier m In the Error edit mode ENTER with no value restores the output to the value of the reference The SHIFT Shift Key Function is used to select alternate functions of the units keys and alternate multipliers of the multiplier keys These alternate selections are labeled with small letters in the upper left hand corner of the keys Numeric Keypad Used to enter the digits of the output amplitude and frequency The proper sequence to enter a value is to press the digits of the output value a multiplier key if necessary an output units key then ENTER For example to obtain an output of 20 mV you would press the following sequence of keys 2 0 Jm Jy Press to enable the output Pressing a digit key once the entry field is full and pressing the decimal point key more than once in a single number will
71. Bit Assignments Explained Programming the ISCE remote command 6 20 ISCEO remote command ISCEO0 remote command 16 21 ISCEI remote command 6 21 ISCE1 remote command ISCR ISCE remote command Bit Assignments Explained ISCR1 remote command ISR Bit Assignments Explained Programming the 5 42 Programming the ISCR remote command ISCRO remote command ISR remote command 6 23 K Keys 2 3 5 CE 3 6 DIVIDE 3 7 3 5 Edit 3 6 3 8 MEASURE 7 Multiplier MULTIPLY 3 7 NEW REF NUMERIC 3 8 3 5 PREV MENU 3 5 3 6 SCOPE SETUP SHIFT STBY 3 5 TRIG OUT 3 7 Units 3 7 Keys That Exit Error Mode 4 49 L Leveled Sine Wave Function 8 21 8 74 Specifications 8 8 8 62 Levsine Menu 8 21 8 74 Frequency Sweep 8 24 8 77 MORE OPTIONS menu 8 23 8 75 LIMIT remote command LIMIT remote command Line Power Cord Types 2 6 Line Power Cord Types Table of 2 6 Line Power Connecting 2 4 Line Voltage Selecting 2 4 Line Voltage Selecting the 2 5 Local Operation 1 4 LOCAL remote command Local State 5 21 Local with Lockout State 5 21 Locked Range 4 17 LOCKOUT remote command Lockout State Local with 5 21 Remote with LOWS remote command LOWS remote command Maintenance Chapter 7 17 3 MEASURE TC key 3
72. Example PUD testl PUD returns d205testl Remote Operation 5 Checking 5500A Status 5 42 Checking 5500A Status 5 43 The programmer has access to status registers enable registers and queues in the 5500A Calibrator to indicate various conditions in the instrument as shown in Figure 5 8 Some registers and queues are defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard The rest are specific to the calibrator In addition to the status registers the Service Request SRQ control line and a 16 element buffer called the Error Queue provide status information Table 5 11 lists the status registers and gives the read write commands and associated mask registers Table 5 11 Status Register Summary Status Register Write Command Command Serial Poll Status Byte STB STB Service Request Enable Register SRE SRE SRE Event Status Register ESR ESR Event Status Enable Register ESE ESE ESE Instrument Status Register ISR ISR Instrument Status Change Register ISCR ISCR ISCR 1 to 0 transition ISCRO ISCR 0 to 1 transition ISCR1 Instrument Status Change Enable Register ISCE ISCE ISCE ISCE 1 to 0 transition ISCEO ISCEO ISCE 0 to 1 transition ISCE1 ISCE1 Each status register and queue has a summary bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte Enable registers are used to mask various bits in the status registers and generate summary bits in the Serial Poll Status Byte For IEEE 488
73. IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Type Default query Return the default thermocouple TC sensor type TC_TYPE_D Responses B C J K N R 5 X Example B type thermocouple C type thermocouple E type thermocouple J type thermocouple K type thermocouple default N type thermocouple R type thermocouple S type thermocouple T type thermocouple 10 linear output TC TYPE D returns K Return K when the thermocouple type default is a type K thermocouple TEMP STD X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Temperature Degree Standard command Select the temperature standard ipts 68 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard or its 90 1990 International Temperature Standard which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands The default is its 90 Parameters Example T EMP_STD 5_68 5 90 ITS 90 See the temperature standard to its 90 TEMP STD Temperature Degree Standard command Return the temperature standard ipts 68 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard or its 90 1990 International Temperature Standard Respon
74. If the controller sends commands faster than the calibrator can process them the input buffer fills to capacity When the input buffer is full the calibrator holds off the IEEE 488 bus with the NRFD Not Ready For Data handshake line When the calibrator has processed a data byte from the full input buffer it then completes the handshake allowing the controller to send another data byte The calibrator clears the input buffer on power up and on receiving the DCL Device Clear or SDC Selected Device Clear messages from the controller RS 232 Under RS 232 C serial port remote control using S lt Cntl gt S XOFF protocol the calibrator issues a 5 XOFF when the input buffer becomes 80 full The calibrator issues Q lt Cntl gt Q when it has read enough of the input buffer so that it is less than 40 full When using RTS Request to Send protocol selected as part of the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure the serial interface asserts and unasserts RTS in response to same conditions as for XON XOFF protocol 5 5 47 5500A Operator Manual 5 48 6 1 6 2 6 3 Chapter 6 Remote Commands Contents Page 6 3 Command Summary by Function eee 6 3 Summary of Commands and Queries 440121 6 1 5500A Operator Manual 6 2 Remote Commands 6 Command Summary by Function 6 1 Introduction This chapter documents the
75. Remote Program Examples 5 59 The following programming examples illustrate ways to handle errors to take measurements take a number of successive readings lock the range and calibrate the calibrator These excerpts from programs are written in DOS BASIC Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator Commands are processed one at a time as they are received Some commands require a previous condition be set before the command will be accepted by the 5500A Calibrator For example the waveform must be SQUARE before the DUTY command will be accepted Using the following programming guidelines will insure that the output is programmed to the desired state e external connections commands should be programmed first The calibrator will be placed in standby and the output may be changed to accommodate the new external connection The setting may be set even if the present output does not use the setting for example setting the current post while sourcing voltage e The output and output mode should be programmed next with the OUT command other output parameters such as impedance compensation offset and waveforms should be programmed next The DUTY command must follow the WAVE command error status should be checked with the ERR command The calibrator will not process the OPER command if an unacknowledged error exists e Finally the calibrator should be placed in operate with the OPER command A controller
76. Set the procedure fault action flag Parameter char CONT to continue on faults or ABORT to abort on faults Example CAL FACT ABORT this is the default CAL FACT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Fact query Get the procedure fault action flag Response char CONT OR ABORT Example ABORT CAL FAULT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Fault query Get information about calibration error if one occurred Response 1 error number use EXPLAIN command to interpret 2 name of step where error occurred CAL INFO X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Information query Return message or instructions associated with running step Response string the message string 6 9 5500A Operator Manual CAL NEXT 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Next command Continue a calibration procedure if it is waiting Parameter Optional Reference value used if it s waiting for a reference If the reference value has no unit the unit is assumed to be that returned by the CAL_REF command Example CAL_NEXT CAL_NEXT 2 999987
77. TC The MEAS TC Measure Thermocouple key enables the TC Thermocouple input connection and causes the 5500A to compute a temperature based on the voltage present at the input Output Units Keys The output units keys determine the function of the 5500A Some keys have a second unit if the SHIFT key is pressed just before the units key The output units are as follows Vy Voltage or Decibels relative to 1 mW into 600 ohms Wa Watts or Current Q Resistance 2 Frequency or Seconds Seconds is applicable to the SCOPE functions only F Capacitance Fee Temperature in Fahrenheit or Centigrade When a frequency Hz value is entered the 5500A automatically switches to ac When a new signed or output value is entered without specifying Hz the 5500A automatically switches back to dc or enter 0 Hz to move back to volts dc Multiplier Keys Select output value multipliers Some keys have a second function if the SHIFT key is pressed just before the multiplier key For example if you enter 33 then SHIFT then m then F then ENTER the 5500A output value is 33 pF The multiplier keys are as follows milli 10 or 0 001 or micro 10 or 0 000001 Mk kilo 10 or 1 000 or nano 10 or 0 000000001 mega 10 or 1 000 000 or pico 107 or 0 000000000001 3 7 5500A Operator Manual 3 8 FLUKE 55004 CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX SCOPE T Q SENSE 200V PK
78. This is the default setting Jump causes the output signal to jump immediately to a new frequency setting Sweep causes the signal to sweep through a series of frequency values over a range you set Use the sweep function to watch the signal gradually change over a given bandwidth and see the point at which its amplitude changes Details for using the sweep function are provided under Sweeping Through a Frequency Range RATE Used when FREQ CHANGE is set to sweep to toggle the sweep speed between fast and slow The slow speed is one tenth the fast speed The slow sweep rate lets you watch the frequency change very slowly After a fast sweep you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slow sweep over a subset of your previous frequency range RANGE The softkeys toggle between two settings which adjusts the range limit automatically in accordance with the voltage level and locked which sets the available voltages to one range 8 75 5500A Operator Manual 8 76 There are six range limits in Levsine mode 10 mV 40 mV 100 mV 400 mV 1 3 V and 5 5 V When set to auto the calibrator uses your voltage setting to automatically set the range limit that provides the most accurate output When set to locked the range limit remains fixed and you can decrease the voltage down to 0 V within any range limit For example assume the range limit is 40 mV If you set the 40 mV range to
79. Verifying a Meter on RS 232 Bus Writing an Error Handler Writing an SRQ handler Programming The ESR and ESE the STB and SRE Programming the Calibrator Placement of Calibrator PUD remote command PUD remote command Pulse Response Calibration 73 Query Commands 5 26 Queue Output R Rack Mount Kit 9 4 Rack RANGE remote command RANGELCK remote command RANGELCK remote command Rear Panel Features 3 3 Recommended Cable and Connector Types 4 9 INDEX 5 5500A Operator Manual INDEX 6 REFOUT remote command Registers Event Status ESR 5 38 Event Status Enable ESE Instrument Status ISR Instrument Status Change ISCR 5 40 Instrument Status Change Enable ISCE 5 40 Remote Commands Chapter 6 6 3 Remote Control Using Host Port 5 10 6 15 Using IEEE Port Remote Operation Chapter 5 5 4 Remote Operation IEEE 488 1 5 Remote Program Examples REMOTE remote command Remote State 5 21 Remote with Lockout State Replacing the Line Fuse 7 3 RESET 3 6 Resetting the Calibrator 4 7 Resistance Accuracy Resistance DC Offset Measurement Resistance Output Setting 4 32 Response Data Types Binary Block Data 5 34 Floating 5 34 Indefinite ASCII Response Message Syntax Rms Versus Peak to Peak Waveforms 4 16 RS 232 Controlling an Instrument Host Po
80. below 123 4567 mV Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note Voltage on the AUX output is limited to 3 3 V maximum Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at the AUX terminals maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 Press to select the polarity of the voltage default is Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries for the NORMAL terminals upper reading and AUX terminals lower reading see below Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical dem Press to activate the calibrator output A softkey labeled LO s appears on the Control Display p pru tied LO s Low Potential Output Terminals The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the 5500A When the front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are tied at the UUT select open with the LO s softkey If the NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are not tied at the UUT select tied with the LO s softkey The default is tied 4 29 5500A Operator Manual 4 30 4 28 Setting a Dual AC Voltage Output Note Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the 5500A via the LO s
81. command is for format See the SPLSTR command for the serial poll response Parameter lt string gt n n represents the Line Feed character hex 0A Example SROSTR SRO 02x 02 04x 04x n Set the SRQSTR to the default values 580 02 02x 04x 04x n 6 37 5500A Operator Manual 6 38 SRQSTR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Service Request String query Return the string programmed for Serial Mode SRQ response This is the format of the Service Request String actual values come from the registers Also see the SPLSTR command Response lt string gt Example SROSTR returns SRO 02x 02x 04x 04x n Return the SRQSTR string format default settings in this example STB IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Status Byte Register command Return the byte for the Status Byte Register See Status Byte Register STB in Chapter 5 Response value the decimal equivalent of the STB byte 0 to 255 Example STB returns 72 Return 72 if bits 3 EAV and 6 MSS are set STBY X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Standby command Deactivate the 5500A Calibrator output if it is in operate This is the same as pressing the 5500A Calibrator fro
82. frequency of 50 kHz letting you check the output at the reference after you make adjustments at a different frequency MORE OPTIONS lets you use an automatic frequency sweep and lock the voltage range if necessary The following section provides details on this menu The and keys step frequencies up or down in amounts that let you quickly access a new set of frequencies For example if the value is 250 kHz 5500A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope changes it to 300 kHz and changes it to 200 kHz For voltage values and PIV step through cardinal point values in 1 2 3 6 sequence 8 103 The MORE OPTIONS Menu When you select MORE OPTIONS you open options that give you more control over the frequency and voltage To access the MORE OPTIONS menu press the softkey under MORE OPTIONS in the Levsine menu Output a pus MORE SET TO MOE terminal tn OPTIONS LAST levsine LA 2 5 t to last F t set to 50 kHz ine marker volt edae RATE kange 2 d MODE Jump Fast aut levzine ES A E Lo _ _ if ny Jump Fast Am zem gt lou auta a Rais S locked dg 1 3 V 5 5 gl030i eps Each option in the MORE OPTIONS menu is described below FREQ CHANGE Toggles between two settings that control the way the output signal adjusts to a new frequency
83. m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries for the NORMAL terminals upper reading and AUX terminals lower reading below is typical 1253 496 2 34 567 Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 12 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output maximum five numeric keys Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press the kilo multiplier key Then press the key For example 1 1234 kHz 13 The Control Display now shows your voltage and frequency entries For example 123 456 mV and 234 567 mV at 1 1234 kHz below 14 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 15 Press to activate the calibrator output Two softkey labels appear on the Control Display V 9NOR V AUX and WAVE MENUS p a MORI WAVE 1123 4 Hz V w AUR MENUS zine MENUS sine tied te a tri tri open 150 00 S9Uare Sqare truncz truncz V 9 NOR Voltage at NORMAL Terminals V AUX Voltage at AUX Terminals This is an information only softkey position and does not have an associated function It shows the output function is dual ac voltage HARMONIC Bas AUS WAVE LO s PHASE zine tied n ag 4 81 5500A Operator Manual 4 32 e WAVE MENUS Waveform Menus Opens submenus for selecting the type of harmo
84. no offset or linearity error will read OV with OV applied but something other than 10V with 10V applied ground The voltage reference point in a circuit Earth ground is a connection through a ground rod or other conductor to the earth usually accessible through the ground conductor in an ac power receptacle ground loops Undesirable currents induced when there is more than one chassis ground potential in a system of instruments Ground loops can be minimized by connecting all instruments in a system to ground to one point guard See voltage guard and current guard harmonics A waveform that is an integral multiple of the fundamental frequency For example a waveform that is twice the frequency of a fundamental is called the second harmonic IPTS 68 Refers to the International Provisional Temperature Standard 1968 replaced by the International Temperature Standard 1990 This specifies the definition of the C temperature standard ITS 90 Refers to the International Temperature Standard 1990 which replaced the International Provisional Temperature Standard 1968 This specifies the definition of the C temperature standard International Systems of Units Same as SI System of Units the accepted system of units See also units base units and derived units legal units The highest echelon in a system of units for example the U S National Bureau of Standards volt 5500A O
85. the V DIV menu press V DIV from the Volt menu Output al dat MODE SCOPE 1 volt AC output 1 volt DC output 306 edge devs ine marker Wavegen 20 00 mV 2 SDIV 1 MODE up down up 1 down valt S 2 2 2 2 zm 1 1 1 a 3 z 1 4 20 iuc I amp Ju iun a gl025i eps Each item in the V DIV menu is described below V div Changes the scale of the output display by changing the number of volts that are represented by each division The available settings shown in the figure above are provided in 1 2 5 step increments Press the softkey under UP to increase the volts per division Press the softkey under DOWN to decrease the volts per division DIY Specifies the number of divisions that establish the peak to peak value of the waveform The value can be adjusted from one to eight divisions The amount denoted by each division is displayed in the V div field Press the softkey under UP to increase the signal s height and press the softkey under DOWN to decrease it 8 96 Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude The and keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an oscilloscope in a 1 2 5 step sequence For example if the voltage is 40 mV then pressing increases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 50 mV Pressing decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 20 mV 5500A
86. 000 ns 1 00 ms 26 000 ns 500 00 us 12 750 ns 200 00 us 5 040 ns 100 00 us 2 510 ns 50 00 us 1 287 ns 20 00 us 0 506 ns 10 00 us 0 252 ns 5 00 us 0 125 115 2 00 us 0 050 ns 1 00 us 0 025 ns 500 000 ns 0 013 ns 200 000 ns 5 000 ps 100 000 ns 2 500 ps 50 000 ns 1 250 ps 20 000 ns 0 500 ps 10 000 ns 0 250 ps 5 000 ns 0 125 ps 2 000 ns 0 050 ps 8 96 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 5 9 6 9 7 Chapter 9 Accessories Rack Mo nt TEEE 488 Interface Cables sese RS 232 Null Modem Cables RS 232 Modem Cables seen eee HL 5725 Amplifier Accessory 5500A Operator Manual 9 2 Accessories 9 Introduction 9 1 Introduction Table 9 1 summarizes the available models options and accessories including cables and components Table 9 1 Options and Accessories Model 105780 105783 105798 5500 CAL 5500A SC 5500A CASE 5500A HNDL 5500A LEADS 5725A 851931 851936 666339 664828 943738 945097 945159 MET CAL MET TRACK PM2295 05 PM2295 10 PM2295 20 8914 001 540 100 Y5537 Y8021 Y8022 Y8023 Description 5500A Getting Started Guide 5500A Programming Reference Guide 5500A Service Manual Calibration
87. 1 kHz 7 20 Phase degrees 0 065 0 048 Measured Value V NORMAL Deviation 90 Day Spec Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check 7 24 Phase and Frequency Accuracy The Phase and Frequency Accuracy tests the phase and frequency configurations For the phase test ac couple the input to the phase meter For the current outputs measure the phase across a non inductive resistor Phase Output Output Frequency Nominal Measured Deviations Year Spec Voltage Voltage Hz Phase Value R degrees NORMAL AUX degrees degrees 1V 60 Hz 0 0 15 ER 400 Hz 0 0 9 1 kHz 0 2 1V 5 kHz 0 6 iv 10 kHz 0 10 iv 60 Hz 60 0 15 400 Hz 60 0 9 1 2 60 2 iv 5 kHz 60 6 1V 10 kHz 60 10 1V 60 Hz 90 0 15 1V 400 Hz 90 0 9 1 kHz 90 2 iv 5 kHz 90 6 1V 10 kHz 90 10 __ 300 65Hz 0 0 15 33v 2A 65 Hz 0 0 15 33v 5A 65 Hz 0 0 15 15A 400Hz 0 0 9 Frequency Measured Value Deviation ppm 1 Year Spec NORMAL Hz Hz ppm 3V 119 00 Hz 42 3V 120 0 Hz 42 3V 1000 0 Hz 27 3V 100 00 kHz 25 7 21 5500A Operator Manual 7 22 7 28 Note AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewave NORMAL This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the in
88. 10201 21 02200 0220 5500A SC600 Option 8 Verification Tables 8 66 Edge Verification Amplitude Table 8 25 Edge Verification Amplitude Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Hz Value V p p V p p V p p 0 005 1 kHz 0008 0 005 10 kHz 0008 0 005 100 kHz 00083 0 01 100 kHz 0004 0 025 100 kHz ____________0 0007 0 05 100 kHz o ooz 0 1 100 kHz ___________0 0022 0 25 100 kHz 0002 0 5 100 kHz 0002 100 kHz ___________0 0202 2 5 100 kHz 0052 2 5 10 kHz ____________0 0502 2 5 1 kHz 0 0502 8 67 Edge Verification Frequency Table 8 26 Edge Verification Frequency Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Value Hz Hz Hz 25 1kHz 0 0025 25 10kHz 0 025 25 100 kHz 0 25 25 1 MHz 25 25 10 MHz 25 8 68 Edge Verification Duty Cycle Table 8 27 Edge Verification Duty Cycle Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Value from 50 2 5 1 MHz 15 8 53 5500A Operator Manual 8 69 Edge Verification Rise Time Table 8 28 Edge Verification Rise Time Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Value s ns ns 0 25 1 kHz 08 0 25 100 kHz 08 0 25 10 Pp 08 0 5 1 kHz Pp 0 35 0 5 100 kHz Pp 08
89. 232 operation using Visual Basic 1 Complete the RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5500A RS 232 UUT port to match the parameters of the UUT RS 232 port Complete Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic to prepare the 5500A Calibrator RS 232 Host port After Step 6 return to this procedure and continue to Step 3 below Click the Command3 button below is typical Observe the UUT responds to the command you used when you completed Appendix E Creating a Visual Basic Test Program F5 0h bmp If the UUT did not respond check the RS 232 parameters set for the 5500 Calibrator UUT port and set for the UUT port Verify you used a modem not null modem cable for the 5500A to UUT connection Check the Visual Basic program to make sure the UUT command was entered correctly including the end of line character if any Close the program by clicking the top left corner and Close Remote Operation 5 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control 5 15 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port This procedure uses the Win32 Interactive Control utility supplied by National Instruments with the recommended interface cards Connect the UUT Calibrator and PC as shown in Figure 5 6 Note the use of a modem cable NOT null modem for the UUT connection Null Modem Cable SERIAL 1 FROM HOST 5500A Calibrator Controller nn314f eps F
90. 26 The VOLT Function You can calibrate the Voltage gain using the VOLT function Access this function through the VOLT menu which appears when you press score or when you press the VOLT softkey from the SCOPE menu Output SCOPE TRIG V DIV MODE 1 MQ DC AC off MENU volt 1 DC AC off see The volt 500 DC gt AC 1 V DIV edge Menu levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu Each menu item is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press srev s 1MQ Toggles between 1 MQ and 50 Q to match the input impedance of the oscilloscope DC AC toggles from ac to dc producing the dc equivalent output DC gt AC Toggles from dc to ac e TRIG If you are using square wave to calibrate the external trigger use this key to toggle the trigger off and on When on the reading will show 1 which indicates that the external trigger is at the same frequency as the volt output The external trigger can be useful for many oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on low TRIG amplitude signals You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing H e V DIV MENU Opens the voltage scaling menu w
91. 4 1 1 10000 8 74 8 102 Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage 8 74 8 103 MORE OPTIONS Menu ene 8 75 8 104 Sweeping through a Frequency ne 8 77 8 105 Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 78 8 106 Calibrating the Time Base of an 8 80 8 107 The Time Marker Function sees 8 80 8 108 Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 81 8 109 Testing the XT 8 82 8 110 Summary of Commands and 8 83 8 111 Verification Tables sse enemies 8 86 8 112 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 1 Load 8 86 8 113 X Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 50 Q Load 8 114 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 50 Q Load 8 115 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 1 Load 8 116 Edge Function Verification sees eee eee 8 117 Wave Generator Function Verification 1 Load 8 90 8 118 Wave Generator Function Verification 50 Load 3 91 8 119 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Amplitude 8 91 8 120 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Flatness 8 92 8 121 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Freque
92. 488 1 and IEEE 488 2 IEEE 488 1 IEEE 488 1 is the hardware portion of the interface The parallel signal lines are divided into eight lines for the data bus three lines for the handshake and five lines for bus management The handshake lines take care of the timing for data exchange The bus management lines control the operation of data exchange The ATN line indicates the use of the DIO lines for addresses or messages true or for DIO data false The EOI line is used with the data lines to mark the end of a message and with the ATN line for polling The SRQ line is used by the devices to indicate to the controller that they require service The IFC line is used by the controller to quickly get all the devices on the bus to stop talking and start listening The REN line is used to implement the remote local states IEEE 488 2 IEEE 488 2 is the software portion of the interface specifying data formats common commands message exchange protocol and the status register implementation Use the following to decode the columns in Figure 5 7 Appendix D shows a typical IEEE 488 connector and pin assignments Type M Multiline U Uniline Class Addressed Command DD Device Dependent AD Address Talk or listen HS Handshake UC Universal Command SE Secondary ST Status Other B2 etc Information Bits Logic Zero 0 False Blanks Doesn t Care condition Logic 1 True 5 23 5500A
93. 488 Port for Remote Control The 5500A Calibrator is fully programmable for use on the IEEE Standard 488 1 interface bus The IEEE 488 interface is also designed in compliance with supplemental standard IEEE 488 2 which describes additional IEEE 488 features Devices connected to the IEEE 488 bus are designated as talkers listeners talker listeners or controllers Under remote control of an instrument the 5500A Calibrator operates as a talker listener A PC equipped with an IEEE 488 interface controls the the 5500A Calibrator Compatible software for IEEE 488 operation may be purchased from Fluke including METCAL and METRACK Another software package 5500 CAL is also available but operates only on the RS 232 serial interface When using the IEEE 488 remote control interface there are two restrictions 1 Number of Devices A maximum of 15 devices can be connected in a single 488 bus system For example one instrument controller one 5500A Calibrator and thirteen units under test UUTs 2 CableLength The total length of IEEE 488 cables used in one IEEE 488 system is 2 meters times the number of devices in the system or 20 meters whichever is less For example if 8 devices are connected the maximum cable length is 2 x 8 2 16 meters If 15 devices are connected the maximum cable length is 20 meters Remote Operation 5 Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control IEEE 488 Port Ne P4 IEEE 488 Port
94. ASCII LF character e Any ASCII character sent with the EOI control line asserted RS 232 Interface The 5500A Calibrator returns an EOL End of Line character with each response to the PC This is selectable as Carriage Return CR Line Feed LF or both CRLF See RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter Commands sent to the 5500A Calibrator must end in either a CR or LF not both See Table 5 9 above Incoming Character Processing The 5500A Calibrator processes all incoming data as follows except Binary Block Data as described under Parameter Syntax Rules 1 The most significant data bit DIOS is ignored 2 All data is taken as 7 bit ASCII 3 Lower case or upper case characters are accepted 4 ASCII characters whose decimal equivalent is less than 32 Space are discarded except for characters 10 LF and 13 CR and in the PUD command argument Binary Block Data allows all characters in its argument and terminates in a special way 5 33 5500A Operator Manual 5 34 5 41 In the command descriptions in Chapter 6 responses from the 5500A Calibrator are described wherever appropriate In order to know what type of data to read in refer to the first part of the entry under Response in the tables The response is identified as one of the data types in Table 5 10 Integer Floating DATA TYPE returns Table 5 10 Response Data Types
95. Calibrator sources two outputs The second amplitude will be sourced at the AUX terminals for dual voltage outputs If the frequency is not supplied the 5500A Calibrator will use the frequency that is presently in use To source or measure a temperature select the desired sensor and sensor parameters first See the TSENS_ TYPE RTD_ and TC_ commands To source a signal using the 5500A SC option refer to the SCOPE command in Chapter 8 If you change the frequency of an ac function and the harmonic output is not explicitly set at the same time with the HARMON command the harmonic will be set to 1 Use multipliers e g k M u with the OUT command as desired Parameters lt value gt V Examples lt value gt DBM lt value gt V lt value gt Hz lt value gt DBM lt value gt Hz lt value gt A lt value gt A lt value gt Hz lt value gt OHM lt gt lt value gt CEL lt value gt FAR lt value gt HZ lt value gt V lt value gt A lt value gt DBM lt value gt A lt value gt V lt value gt A lt value gt HZ lt value gt DBM lt value gt A lt value gt HZ value V value V value DBM value DBM value V value V value HZ value DBM value DBM value HZ value Volts dc or update volts ac Volts ac dBm update Volts ac or volts dc with 0 Hz Volts ac in dBm Current dc or update c
96. Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation remote operating instructions are provided in Chapter 5 Remote Operation Front Panel Features Front panel features including all controls displays indicators and terminals are shown in Figure 3 1 Each front panel feature is described in Table 3 1 Rear Panel Features Rear panel features including all terminals sockets and connectors are shown in Figure 3 2 Each rear panel feature is described in Table 3 2 Softkey Menu Trees The Setup softkeys are identified in Figures 3 3 and 3 4 The Setup softkeys are associated with the 5500A Calibrator front panel key The functions of the five softkeys are identified by label information displayed directly above each key The softkey labels change during operation so that many different functions are quickly accessible A group of softkey labels is called a menu A group of interconnected menus is called a menu tree Figure 3 3 shows the SETUP menu tree structure Figure 3 4 describes each SETUP menu tree display Table 3 3 shows the factory default settings for the SETUP menu tree To return the SETUP menus to their default values use the softkey SETUP in the Format NV Memory menu see Figure 3 4 menu Figure 3 5 shows the MEAS TC menu tree structure Figure 3 6 describes each MEAS TC menu tree display 3 3 5500A Operator Manual FELLIKE 5500A CALIBRATOR
97. Data memory RST Reset Resets the state of the instrument to the power up state This command holds off execution of subsequent commands until it is complete Overlapped command SRE Loads a byte into the Service Request Enable register SRE SRE Returns the byte from the Service Request Enable register STB Returns the status byte TRG Changes the operating mode to thermocouple MEASURE triggers a measurement and returns the value of the measurement This command is equivalent to sending TC_MEAS OPC VAL TST Initiates a series of self tests then returns a for pass or a 1 for fail If any faults are detected they are logged into the fault queue where they can be read by the ERR query WAI Wait to Continue command This command prevents further remote commands from being executed until all previous remote commands have been executed Remote Commands 6 Command Summary by Function BOOST BOOST CFREQ DC_OFFSET DC_OFFSET DPF DPF DUTY DUTY FUNC HARMONIC HARMONIC OPER OPER OUT OUT PHASE PHASE POWER RANGE RANGELCK RANGELCK STBY WAVE WAVE ZCOMP ZCOMP Output Commands Activates and deactivates a 5725A Amplifier and sets the source preference to the 5725A Amplifier or to the 5500A Calibrator Returns whether or not the 5725A Amplifier is in use and which output is being boosted Returns the optimum frequency value for stimulus for capa
98. Fluke le plus proche Fluke d gage toute responsabilit en cas de d gradations survenues au cours du transport Apr s la r paration sous garantie le produit sera retourn l acheteur frais de port pay s d avance franco lieu de destination Si Fluke estime que le probl me a t caus par un traitement abusif une modification un accident ou des conditions de fonctionnement ou de manipulation anormales Fluke fournira un devis des frais de r paration et ne commencera la r paration qu apr s en avoir recu l autorisation Apr s la r paration le produit sera retourn l acheteur frais de port pay s d avance et les frais de r paration et de transport lui seront factur s LA PRESENTE GARANTIE EST EXCLUSIVE ET TIENT LIEU DE TOUTES AUTRES GARANTIES EXPLICITES OU IMPLICITES Y COMPRIS MAIS NON EXCLUSIVEMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE QUANT A L APTITUDE DU PRODUIT A ETRE COMMERCIALISE OU A ETRE APPLIQUE A UNE FIN OU A UN USAGE DETERMINE FLUKE NE POURRA ETRE TENU RESPONSABLE D AUCUN DOMMAGE PARTICULIER INDIRECT ACCIDENTEL OU CONSECUTIF NI D AUCUNS DEGATS OU PERTES DE DONNEES QUE CE SOIT A LA SUITE D UNE INFRACTION AUX OBLIGATIONS DE GARANTIE SUR UNE BASE CONTRACTUELLE EXTRA CONTRACTUELLE OU AUTRE Etant donn que certains pays ou tats n admettent pas les limitations d une condition de garantie implicite ou l exclusion ou la limitation de d gats accidentels ou cons cutifs les limitations et les exclusions de cette garan
99. Fuse Caution To prevent possible damage to the instrument verify the correct fuse is installed for the selected line voltage setting 100 V and 120 V use 2 5 A 250 V time delay 200 V and 240 V use 1 25 A 250 V time delay The line power fuse is accessible on the rear panel The fuse rating is 2 5 A 250 V time delay fuse for the 100 V 120 V line voltage setting 1 25 A 250 V time delay fuse for the 220 V 240 V line voltage setting Fuses that are not user replaceable are discussed in Chapter 7 Maintenance To check or replace the fuse refer to Figure 2 1 and proceed as follows 2 3 5500A Operator Manual 2 4 2 4 Disconnect line power 2 Open the fuse compartment by inserting a screwdriver blade in the tab located at the left side of the compartment and gently pry until it can be removed with the fingers 3 Remove the fuse from the compartment for replacement or verification Be sure the correct fuse is installed 4 Reinstall the fuse compartment by pushing it back into place until the tab locks Selecting Line Voltage The calibrator arrives from the factory configured for the line voltage normally appropriate for the country of purchase or as specified at the time of your purchase order You can operate the 5500A Calibrator from one of four line voltage settings 100 V 120 V 200 V and 240 V 47 to 63 Hz To check the line voltage setting note the voltage setting visible through the window in the pow
100. GPIB as the interface and to select the GPIB address for the interface 1 Turn the 5500A Calibrator power on You may operate the calibrator during warmup but specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete 2 Press the key on the 5500A Calibrator front panel Negotiate the softkey selections shown below Verify the HOST port selection is gpib Select the desired GPIB port address 0 to 30 using the UP DOWN softkeys The factory default is 4 CAL SHO IHMSTMT UTILITY SPECS SETUP FUNCTHS 2 2 B 5 THF OUTPUT DISPLAY REMOTE its 90 SETUP SETUF SETUP SIA 2 2 BS i HOST HOST gpib SETUP SETUP SETUP SA BIA 2 Select gt 9p ib zepia FORT ADDRESS 4 5 gl40f eps 4 Press not ENTER several times until the message STORE CHANGES DISCARD CHANGES appears or if there were no changes the reset display If you select STORE CHANGES the gpib and host port setting are saved in the instrument non volatile memory 5 7 5500A Operator Manual 5 4 Testing the IEEE 488 Port The procedure below tests IEEE 488 communications between the PC and the Calibrator using the Win32 Interactive Control utility This utility is supplied with National Instruments interface cards for the PC which are the recommended interfaces See Chapter 9 A
101. IEEE 488 RS 232 remote commands for the 55004 Calibrator Remote commands duplicate activities that can be initiated from the front panel in local operation Table 6 1 summarizes the commands by function Following the summary table is a complete alphabetical listing of all commands complete with protocol details Separate headings in the alphabetical listing provide the parameters and responses plus an example for each command For information on using commands see Chapter 5 Remote Operation 6 2 Command Summary by Function Table 6 1 Command Summary by Function Error Mode Commands EDIT Sets the edit field PRI is specified for the output value in single output functions and the primary output value in dual output functions EDIT Returns the edit field setting ERR_UNIT Choose how UUT error is shown ERR_UNIT Return presently selected value of ERR_UNIT INCR Increments or decrements the output as selected by the edit field and enters error mode the same as using the output adjustment knob in local operation MULT Multiplies the reference magnitude as selected by the edit field NEWREF Sets the reference value to be the present 5500A output value the same as pressing the NEW REF key in local operation OLDREF Sets the 5500A output to the previously programmed reference value the same as pressing the ENTER key in local operation OUT_ERR Returns the UUT error computed by the 5500A after shifting the output with
102. Introduction eee sese 2 2 Unpacking and Inspection 2 3 Replacing The Fuse 2 4 Selecting Line Voltage 2 5 Connecting To Line Power 2 6 Service Information 2 7 Placement and Rack Mounting 2 8 Cooling Considerations 2 9 Connecting the 5725A Amplifier Features T 3 1 Introduction sss 3 2 Front Panel Features 3 3 Rear Panel Features 3 4 Softkey Menu Front Panel Operation 4 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 Additional Specifications Frequency Specifications Harmonics 277 to 50 Specifications AC Voltage Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications AC Voltage Non Sine Wave Specifications esses AC Voltage DC Offset Specifications esses AC Voltage Square Wave 5 AC Voltage Triangle Wave Characteristics typical AC Current Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications AC Current Non Sinewave Specifications AC Current Non Sinewave Specifications cont AC Current Square Wave Characteristics
103. Limit or the Lower Limit softkey as desired and enter the new limit b Press then one or more times to return to a previous menu 5500A Operator Manual 4 52 4 52 Sample Applications 4 53 4 54 4 55 Samples of a few selected applications are provided here e Calibrating a Fluke 80 Series 3 1 2 digit handheld multimeter Calibrating a Fluke Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer for Power and Harmonics Calibrating a Fluke Model 51 Digital Thermometer Calibrating an 80 Series Handheld Multimeter This example goes through the steps necessary to calibrate a Fluke 80 Series handheld multimeter Note These procedures are included here as an example The 80 Series Service Manual contains the authoritative testing and calibration procedures for 60 Series meters Two procedures are provided The first tests each function and range for compliance to specifications The second is the calibration procedure for the 80 Series meters The 80 Series Service Manual gives instructions for disassembly and access to the pca printed circuit assembly You will need to access the pca for the calibration procedure Before connecting the calibrator to the 80 Series DMM you need to determine what type of cables to use and whether to use or not This decision making process is covered next Cables Fluke 5440A 7002 Low Thermal Cables are recommended for many calibrations connections but they are not specifically required f
104. ON 5 A 2 to GO and ABORT softkeys used in the 5500 Calibrator calibration procedure See the Service Manual for more information F3 04h eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 20 Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL Connect voltmeter to Normal terminals 6 Only if scope set it to measure DCV i GO ON OPTIONS option installed A A to AF ABORT STORE SEIF BACK UP CAL iPCOMETSi STEP i STEF A 2 PSEUDO DIAG FRONT SERIAL DIGITAL _ PANEL iIF TEST TEST A 2 to AH to AH to DISCOMMECT ALL TERMINALS iGO ON OPTIONS 20 A KEHOE KEV i BELL DISPLAY TEST i TEST i TEST i MEAS CONTROL A 2 to AK to AL ALL ALL CURSOR i OFF i TEST E ER A wea ALL ALL ON DFF F3 04i eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 21 5500A Operator Manual Table 3 3 Factory Default Settings for the SETUP Menus Features Temperature Standard 115 90 Display Contrast level 7 7 Host Connection gpib IEEE 488 Display Brightness level 1 0 GPIB Port Address 4 RTD Power Up pt385 Default Type Serial Ports 8 bits 1 sto
105. OUT 10 V from executing With a different order RANGELCK OFF OUT 10 V the second compound command can executed successfully 5 31 85 52 5 33 5 34 Remote Operation 5 Using Commands Overlapped Commands Commands that begin execution but require slightly more time to complete are called overlapped commands because they can be overlapped by the next command before they have completed execution In Chapter 6 the command graphic shows a check mark for X Overlapped commands The 25 overlapped commands are BOOST RANGELCK CUR_POST RST DC_OFFSET RTD_TYPE DPF SCOPE DUTY SRC_PREF EARTH STBY HARMONIC TC_OFFSET INCR LOWS TC_REF MULT TC_TYPE OPER TRIG OUT ISENS OUT_IMP WAVE PHASE ZCOMP You use the command WAT to wait until the overlapped command has completed execution before executing the next command For example OUT 1 V 1 60 HZ You can also use the status commands OPC and OPC to detect completion of overlapped commands See Checking 5500A Status Sequential Commands Commands that execute immediately are called sequential commands In Chapter 6 the command graphic shows a check mark for X Sequential commands The majority of the commands 87 of 111 commands are sequential Commands that Require the Calibration Switch to be Enabled The following co
106. Only Commands for IEEE 488 Only Command Syntax Parameter Syntax Rules Extra Space or Tab Characters Terminators 22 22 Incoming Character Processing Response Message Syntax Checking 55004 Status Serial Poll Status Byte 5 Service Request SRQ Line Service Request Enable Register Programming the STB and SRE Event Status Register ESR Event Status Enable ESE Register Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE sss Programming the ESR and ESE Instrument Status Register ISR Instrument Status Change Registers 5 10 5 10 5 14 5 18 5 19 5 26 5 26 5 26 5 28 5 28 5 29 5 29 5 29 5 29 5 30 5 34 5 38 5 38 5 38 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 40 5 53 Instrument Status Change Enable Registers see eee 5 40 5 54 Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCR and 18 5 40 5 55 Programming the ISR ISCR and ISCE 5 42 5 56 5 42 5 57 Error Queue radius 5 43 5 58 Remote Program 5 43 5 59 Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator usu
107. Parallel Poll Configure M AC 0 O 0 1 0 1 1 Parallel Poll Enable SE 1 1 0 B4 B3 B2 Bi 1 PPD Parallel Poll Disable 5 1 1 1 B4 B3 B2 Bi1 PPR1 Parallel Poll Response 1 U ST 1 1 11 PPR2 Parallel Poll Response 2 U ST 1 1 1 PPR3 Parallel Poll Response 3 U ST 1 141 PPR4 Parallel Poll Response 4 U ST 1 1 14 PPR5 Parallel Poll Response 5 U ST 1 17 PPR6 Parallel Poll Response 6 U ST 1 18 11 PPR7 Parallel Poll Response 7 U ST 1 is PPR8 Parallel Poll Response 8 U IST 1 l 1 1 PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure M UC 0 0 1 0 1 10 1 1 REN Remote Enable U UC 1 RFD Ready For Data U HS 0 RQS Request For Service U IST 1 0 SCG Secondary Command Group SE 1 1 E SDC Selected Device Clear M AC 0 0 1 0 0 1 SPD Serial Poll Disable M UC 0 O 1 1 0 0 1 1 SPE Serial Poll Enable UC 1 1 0 1 SHO Service Request U ST 1 STB Status Byte IST B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 0 TCT Take Control M AC o io O 1 0 0 ji 1 TAG Talk Address Group M AD 1 0 1 UCG Universal Command Group M UC 0 O 1 1 UNL Unlisten AD 01111111111 11 1 UNT Untalk AD 11011111111 1 1 5 24 Figure 5 7 IEEE 488 Remote Message Coding Remote Operation 5 Using Commands 5 23 Using Commands 5 24 5 25 Communications between the controller and the 5500A Cali
108. Response on an Oscilloscope lle Edge Pun Ci OM rei ee ie rides Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser The Leveled Sine Wave Function eee Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage 8 3 5500A Operator Manual 8 4 8 36 8 37 8 38 8 39 8 41 8 72 8 74 8 75 The MORE OPTIONS Sweeping Through a Frequency Range eee Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope The Time Marker Function eene Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope Testing the rigget iiie ase erae leere RE seca Testing Video Triggers nennen Verifying 1 eite pedet aedi eaa Measuring Input Resistance and Capacitance Input Impedance Measurement eene Input Capacitance Testing Overload Remote Commands and General Commands s az7sszes cg Edge Function Comman
109. Set whether the internal temperature sensor INT or an external reference value EXT is used for Thermocouple TC outputs and measurements If the first parameter is EXT the second parameter must be the temperature value to use as the reference for the thermocouple reference junction temperature Once set the 5500A Calibrator retains the reference setting until power off reset Parameters INT EXT lt value of external reference gt CEL or FAR Example REF EXT 25 6 CEL Set the thermocouple reference to external with a value of 25 6 C 6 39 5500A Operator Manual 6 40 TC REF 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Reference query Return the source and value of the temperature being used as a reference for thermocouple simulation and measurement in Celsius CEL or Fahrenheit FAR depending on active units The choices are Internal reference INT or External reference EXT If INT is returned the reference temperature return is 0 unless you are in a thermocouple mode of operation and the 5500A Calibrator is in Operate Responses INT lt value of reference temperature gt CEL or FAR EXT lt value of reference temperature gt CEL or FAR Example TC REF returns INT 2 988E 01 CEL Return Internal 29 88 Celsius when the thermocouple reference is
110. Software RS 232 interface Oscilloscope Calibration Option 5500A Transit Case for calibrator 5500A Side Handle for transporting the calibrator 5500A Lead Set Amplifier Replacement fuse 2 5 A 250 V Time Delay 100 V or 120 V line voltage Replacement fuse 1 25 A 250 V Time Delay 200 V or 240 V line voltage MET CAL IEEE PCI MET CAL IEEE NT RS 232 Modem Cable 2 44 m 8 ft SERIAL 2 TO UUT to UUT DB 9 5500A Operator Reference Guide 5500A Operator Manual includes Operator and Programmer Reference Guides Calibration Software IEEE 488 and RS 232 interface Metrology Asset Management Software IEEE 488 Cable 0 5 m 1 64 ft IEEE 488 Cable 1 m 3 28 ft IEEE 488 Cable 2 m 6 56 ft RS 232 Null Modem Cable 1 5 m 5 ft SERIAL 1 FROM HOST to PC COM DB 9 RS 232 Null Modem Cable 1 83 m 6 ft SERIAL 1 FROM HOST to PC COM DB 25 Test Instrument Cart 24 in 61 cm Rack Mount Kit for 5500A Shielded IEEE 488 Cable 0 5 m 1 64 ft Shielded IEEE 488 Cable 2 m 6 56 ft Shielded IEEE 488 Cable 4 m 13 ft 9 3 5500A Operator Manual 9 4 9 2 Rack Mount Kit The Y5537 rack mount kit provides all the hardware necessary to mount the 5500A on slides in a 24 inch 61 cm equipment rack Instructions are provided in the kit To rack mount the 5725A Amplifier order kit Y5735 IEEE 488 Interface Cables Shielded IEEE 488 cables are available in three lengths See Table 9 1 The cables attach to the 5500A to any oth
111. Status Change Registers Wite using ISCE0 110 0 transition ISCE1 0 to 1 tension ISCE 1to 0 ORO to 1 Instrument Status Register 1514131211 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read using ISR Event Status E Register Read using ESR Output Buffer Event Status 7161541312110 Enable Register m Read using ESE Logical OR Write using Error Queue Read using ERR Read by Serial Service Request Generation Status Byte Register SRQSTR SRQ on on RS 232 bus IEEE bus a Read using STB Logical OR Service Request 71 514131210 Enable Register Read using Write using SRE F5 04 eps Figure 5 8 Status Register Overview 5 36 5 44 5 45 Remote Operation 5 Checking 5500A Status Requesting service The RQS bit is set to 1 whenever bits ESB MAV EAV or ISCB change from 0 to 1 and are enabled 1 in the SRE When RQS is 1 the 5500A asserts the SRQ control line on the IEEE 488 interface You can do a serial poll to read this bit to see if the 5500A is the source of an SRQ Master summary status Set to 1 whenever bits ESB MAV EAV or ISCB are 1 and enabled 1 in the SRE This bit can be read using the STB command in serial remote control in place of doing a serial poll Set to 1 when one or more enabled ESR bits are 1 Message avai
112. TRG VAL TRIGGER 45 TO TAKE READING 90 INPUT G1 VM GE HE DATA FROM THE 45 100 ER ABS V VM V 1E6 COMPUTE ERROR 110 PRINT 5500 OUTPUT V U PRI THE RESULTS 120 PRINT 45 MEASURED VM V 130 PRINT ERROR SER PPM 140 END Verifying a Meter on the RS 232 UUT Serial Port This program selects 10 V dc output verifies that the 5500A Calibrator is set to 10 V then triggers a Fluke 45 to take a reading It displays 5500A Calibrator output the Fluke 45 reading and the meter error in ppm The program assumes that the 5500A Calibrator uses the IEEE 488 interface with bus address is 4 and the Fluke 45 is on the 5500A Calibrator SERIAL 2 TO UUT port 10 REM THIS PROGRAM VERIFIES THE ACCURACY OF A FLUKE 45 AT 10V DC 20 INIT PORT O INITIALIZE THE INTERFACE 30 CLEAR PORT 0 pO 40 PRINT 084 UUT SEND VDC S AUTO TRIGGER 2 n SET FLUKE 45 50 PRINT 804 UUT SEND THE FLUKE 45 PROMPT 60 PRINT 04 P GE HE FLUKE 45 PROMPT 70 PRINT 84 OUT 10 V OPER SE HE 5500A TO 10 V DC 80 PRINT 4 WAI OUT WAIT FOR SETTLE GET VALUE 90 PRINT 4 V US F V2 U2 GE HE DATA FROM 5500A 100 PRINT 04 UUT SEND TRG VAL n TRIGGER FLUKE 45 READING 110 PRINT 804
113. Twodgts 4to33v 4to33v 33V Twodgts Twodgts 10 to 500 kHz See AC Voltage Sine Waves Specifications 0 3 to 3 3 V 500 kHz to 1 MHz 8 dB at 1 MHz typical Two digits 1to 2 MHz 32 dB at 2 MHZ typical Auxiliary Output Dual Output Mode 10 to 330 mV Three digit 0 01 to 10 Hz 50 05 ree digits 0 4 to 3 3 V Two digits P10 to 10 kHz See AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications 1 27 5500A Operator Manual 1 33 AC Voltage Non Sine Wave Specifications Triangle Wave amp 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty Truncated Sine 5 C Maximum Frequency Range of output of range Voltage Resolution 1 Output Normal Channel Single Output Mode 2 9 to 92 999 mV 0 01 to 10 Hz Two digits on each range 9310929999 mv 101045 Hz 09310920009 V 45Hzio 1 kHz Tio 20kH ME 9 3 to 92 9999 V 2010 100 kHz Auxiliary Output Dual Output Mode 93 to 929 999 mV 0 01 to 10 Hz Two digits on each range 1010 45 Hz 0 93 to 9 29999 V 45 Hz to 1 kHz Six digits on each range to 10 kHz To convert p p to rms for triangle wave multiply the p p value by 0 2886751 To convert p p to rms for truncated sine wave multiply the p p value by 0 2165063 Uncertainty is stated in p p Amplitude is verified using an rms responding DMM Uncertainty for truncated sine outputs is typical over this frequency band 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty Square Wave teal 5 R
114. UUT SEND 45 READING TO 5500A 120 INPUT Q4 VM P GE 45 READING AND PROMPT 130 ER ABS V VM V 1E6 COMPUTE ERROR 140 PRINT 5500 OUTPUT V U PRIN HE RESULTS 150 PRINT FLUKE 45 MEASURED ER PPM PRIN HE RESULTS 160 END Using OPC OPC and WAI The OPC OPC and WAI commands let you maintain control of the order of execution of commands that could otherwise be passed up by subsequent commands If you had sent an OUT command you can check if the output has settled be sending the query OPC As soon as the OUT command has completed output settled 1 appears in the output buffer You should always follow an OPC command with a read command The read command causes program execution to pause until the addressed instrument responds The following sample program shows how you can use OPC 10 PRINT 84 OUT 100V 1KHZ OPER OPC 5500A ADDRESS IS 4 20 INPUT 64 A READ THE 1 FROM THE 5500A 30 PROGRAM HALTS HERE UNTIL A 1 IS PUT INTO THE OUTPUT BUFFER 40 PRINT OUTPUT SETTLED 5 45 5500A Operator Manual 5 46 5 64 5 65 The OPC command is similar in operation to the OPC query except that it sets bit 0 OPC for Operation Complete in the Event Status Register to 1 rather than sending a 1 to the output buffer One simple use for OPC is to include it in the program in order for it to generate
115. UUT serial port in binary block or string data format over the 5500A Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port The command may be sent over gpib or RS 232 ports but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation Include a line feed RS 232 character to terminate the block data or End or Identify EOI command 488 Parameter 2 lt gt lt characters string definite length f O character string indefinite length lt character string character string Examples SEND 206F1S2R0 definite length format Send the data 15280 to UUT in definite length format The format is 2 two numbers follow 06 characters follow F1S2R0 6 characters UUT SEND 0F1S2R0 indefinite length format Send the data F1S2R0 to UUT in indefinite length format The format is 0 then the characters UUT SEND F1S2RO character string Send the data F1S2R0 to UUT as a character string Special Case When the character string sent to a UUT must end in a carriage return CR command or line feed LF command or both you must use the following Definite Length Format Follow the instructions above and after the character string add a command J for CR or M for LF or both where J means hold down the lt Cntl gt key and type the letter J For example sending the string REMS in this format with both CR and LF you would count 4 characters for REMS and 1 character each for J and M for
116. When the wave selection is truncs a truncated sinewave current or voltage signal is present on the calibrator outputs Figure 4 14 The variables for the truncated sinewave are amplitude and frequency Whenever a truncated sinewave is selected the Output Display indicates amplitudes in peak to peak units Peak to Peak 67 5 L 112 5 Figure 4 14 Truncated Sinewave 4 39 Setting Harmonics When the calibrator is outputting dual ac voltages or ac power sinewaves only the calibrator sources two signals with adjustable harmonic difference with a maximum harmonic frequency output of 10 kHz For example a 120 V 60 Hz signal can be set on the front panel NORMAL terminals and 1 V 300 Hz 5th harmonic output on the AUX terminals The fundamental can be configured on either the NORMAL or the AUX terminals with the harmonic output on the opposite terminals Note that the maximum AUX output is 3 3 V while the maximum NORMAL output is 1000 V Unless both the fundamental and harmonic frequencies are allowed for the given amplitude the output is not allowed Complete the following procedure to enter a harmonic output This procedure assumes you have already sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output 1 Press the softkey WAVE MENUS opening the waveform menu 2 Press the softkey HARMONIC MENUS opening the harmonic submenu below is typical 4 42 Front Panel Opera
117. a temperature output for a K thermocouple use K type thermocouple wire and K type miniconnectors Set the UUT to measure temperature on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired temperature output maximum 6 numeric keys For example 123 456 5 Foran output in C press the key For an output in F press and then the key 6 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your temperature output For example 123 456 C below 7 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 8 Press to activate the calibrator output Four softkey labels appear on the Control Display 4 35 5500A Operator Manual Note The entered temperature will be cleared to 0 32 F if you change between tc and rtd or change the type of thermocouple except for a B type thermocouple which clears to 600 C If this should occur select OUTPUT tc the desired thermocouple TYPE and then reenter the temperature TC terminal DUTPLUT 50 0700 MENUS te 5 rt LL rri TF C cl La UNITS JREF pd REF intrnli BLC intrnl 250 to E ap extrnl 23164 C E J H T BC Out TC terminal Output at the front panel TC terminals Displays the actual dc voltage at the front panel TC terminals This is a display only not a softkey
118. a total of 6 characters The command would be UUT SEND 206REMS J M then enter The J and M characters actually perform the CR and LF functions Indefinite Length Format This format may not be used when a character string requires CR and LF commands Character String Follow the instructions above and after the character string add a n for CR or V for LF or both where the alpha character is entered in lower case For example in the terminal mode to send the string REMS in this format with both CR and LF the command would be 00 SEND REMS nr In the computer mode where commands are entered as part of a command string use double quotes to show embedded quotes For example uut send REMS n r The following characters and commands may be implemented as described above Carriage Return J n Line Feed M Tab Tab t Backspace SH Form Feed L 6 45 5500A Operator Manual 6 46 UUT_SET X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled UUT Serial Port Set command Set the RS 232 C settings for the 5500A Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands To set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port see the SP
119. accepted in command parameters and used in responses All commands and units may be entered in UPPER or lower case Table 5 8 Units Accepted in Parameters and Used in Responses Meaning HZ Frequency in units of hertz KHZ Frequency in units of kilohertz MHZ Frequency in units of megahertz UV Volts in units of microvolts MV Volts in units of millivolts V Volts in units of volts KV Volts in units of kilovolts UA Current in units of microamperes MA Current in units of milliamps A Current in units of amps PCT Percent PPM Parts per million DBM Volts in units of decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt into 6000 load OHM Resistance in units of ohms KOHM Resistance in units of kilohms MOHM Resistance in units of megohms NF Capacitance in units of nanofarads PF Capacitance in units of picofarads UF Capacitance in units of microfarads MF Capacitance in units of millifarads F Capacitance in units of farads CEL Temperature in degrees Celsius FAR Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit NS Period in units of nanoseconds US Period in units of microseconds MS Period in units of milliseconds S Period in units of seconds 5 5 31 5500A Operator Manual 5 32 5 38 General Rules The general rules for parameter usage is as follows 1 gx wx um o When a c
120. activate the value and move it to the Output Display gl023i eps Other settings in the display will remain unaltered unless you key in an entry and specify the units for that setting 8 90 Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob To adjust values in the Output Display using the rotary knob 1 Turn the rotary knob A cursor appears in the output display under the lowest digit and begins changing that digit If you wish to place the cursor in the field without changing the digit press OPR 109 00 HHz gl003i eps 2 To move the cursor between the voltage and frequency fields press 225 5500A Operator Manual 8 91 8 92 8 68 OPR 109 00 HHz gl004i eps Use the 4 and keys to move the cursor to the digit you want to change 4 Turn the rotary knob to change the value When you use the rotary knob in either Volt mode or Marker mode the Control Display shows the new value s percentage change from the reference value This is useful for determining the percentage of error on the oscilloscope You can set the reference value to the new value by pressing izg HG iig og f iH gl005i eps 5 Press to remove the cursor from the Output Display and save the new value as the reference value Note If you attempt to use the rotary knob to adjust a value to an amount that is invalid for the function you are using or is outside the value s range
121. an SRQ Service Request Then an SRQ handler written into the program can detect the operation complete condition and respond appropriately You can use OPC similarly to OPC except your program must read the ESR to detect the completion of all operations The following sample program shows how you can use OPC 10 REMOTE 20 PRINT 64 OUT 100V 1KHZ OPER OPC 5500A ADDRESS IS 4 30 PRINT 4 ESR PUT THE ESR BYTE IN BUFFER 40 INPUT 84 A READ THE ESR BYTE 50 IF A AND 1 0 GOTO 30 TRY AGAIN IF NO OPC 60 PRINT OUTPUT SETTLED 70 END The WAI command causes the 5500A Calibrator to wait until any prior commands have been completed before continuing on to the next command and takes no other action Using WAI is a convenient way to halt operation until the command or commands preceding it have completed The following sample program shows how you can use WAI 10 REMOTE 20 PRINT 84 OUT 100V 1KHZ OPER WAI 5500A ADDRESS IS 4 30 PRINT 64 OUT READ THE OUTPUT VALUE 40 PRINT 04 5 65 5 AS CONTAINS THE OUTPUT VALUE 50 PRINT OUTPUT SETTLED 60 PRINT OUTPUT IS 5 85 at CS 70 END Taking a Thermocouple Measurement The following program takes one measurement at a time 10 REM Set Bus Timeout to 20
122. and currents that this test can output Failing to do so could damage your oscilloscope Output UUTTRIP TLIMIT OUTVAL MODE SCOPE 4 15 108 DC A DC volt AC edge levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the OVERLD menu is described below OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the output signal UUTTRIP Indicates test results NO appears if the overload protection did not trip within the selected time limit A value in seconds appears e g 4 1 s if the overload protection has tripped within the time limit T LIMIT indicates the selected time limit for application of the output value Press this softkey to key in or edit a different time limit 1 s to 60 s allowed OUT VAL Indicates the output voltage type You can select DC or AC and a value ranging from 5 V to 9 V shown in Output Display Key in or edit this value MODE Indicates you are in OVERLD Overload mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes 8 33 5500A Operator Manual Default overload settings are 5 000 V and DC At any time you can also set the overload time limit with the following command sequence INSTMT OTHER SETUP SETUP TLIMDEF SETUP
123. ange requency of output of range 2 Voltage Resolution Output Normal Channel Single Output Mode 2 9 to 65 999 mV 0 01 to 10 Hz Two digits on each range 5610 659 999 mV 101045Hz 0 66 to 6 59090 V 45 Hz to 1 KHz 6 6 to 65 9999 V 2 201010092 Auxiliary Output Dual Output Mode 66 to 659 999 mV 0 01 to 10 Hz Two digits on each range 10 to 45 Hz 0 66 to 6 59999 V 45 Hz to 1 kHz Six digits on each range 10 2 To convert to rms for square wave multiply the p p value by 5000000 Uncertainty is stated in p p Amplitude is verified using an rms responding DMM 1 28 Introduction and Specifications 1 Additional Specifications 1 34 AC Voltage DC Offset Specifications 1 Year Absolute Offset Uncertainty teal 5 Output dc uV Max Peak Signal Range 2 Normal Channel Offset Range Sine Waves rms 3 3 to 32 999 mV 0 1 33 33 to 329 999 mV 0 1 330 0 33 to 3 29999 V 0 1 3300 3 3 to 32 9999 V 0 1 33 mV Triangle Waves and Truncated Sine Waves p p 9 3 to 92 999 mV 0 1 93 93 to 929 999 mV 0 1 930 0 93 to 9 29999 V 0 1 9300 9 3 to 92 9999 V 0 1 93 mV Square Waves p p 6 6 to 65 999 mV 0 1 66 66 to 659 999 mV 0 1 660 0 66 to 6 59999 V 0 1 6600 6 6 to 65 9999 V 0 1 66 mV Offsets are not allowed on ranges above the highest range shown above The maximum offset value is determined by the difference between the peak value of
124. angle readings displayed by the Tester are within the minimum and maximum limits listed in Table 4 5 Note The Tester will read a positive phase when the 5500A output is a negative phase because on the 5500A the polarity of the phase is always relative to the NORMAL channel output 10 Repeat the previous three steps using the settings and limits in Table 4 5 Table 4 5 Harmonics Performance for Volts Harmonics Screen Bon Mar Performance Limits Amplitude Harmonic Phase Harmonic Amplitude Phase cursor V No deg No MIN MAX MIN MAX 7 00 1 10 1 6 7 7 3 8 12 70 3 3 67 73 14 26 7 00 9 30 9 6 7 7 3 21 39 700 13 13 67 73 29 5 70 a 5o 2 65 75 35 65 zo a 62 78 40 11 Press to remove the voltage from the Tester Front Panel Operation Sample Applications 4 4 61 Testing Harmonics Amps Performance 1 Press until is displayed above the upper right corner of the harmonics display 2 Press until V f is displayed in the top status line of the Tester 3 Press until 208 is displayed in the top status line of the Tester 4 Connect the calibrator NORMAL output to the V and COM connectors on the Tester Connect the calibrator AUX output to the Current Probe connector on the Tester 6 Set the calibrator output to 7 0 V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 20 mV at 60 Hz on the AUX
125. are in Wavegen mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes 8 82 5500A SC300 Option 8 Summary of Commands and Queries 8 110 Summary of Commands and Queries This section describes commands and queries that are used specifically for the oscilloscope calibration option Each command description indicates whether it can be used with IEEE 488 and RS 232 remote interfaces and identifies it as a Sequential Overlapped or Coupled command IEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232 Applicability X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Each command and query have a check box indicating applicability to IEEE 488 general purpose interface bus or GPIB and RS 232 remote operations Sequential Commands Sequential Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands For more information see Sequential Commands in Chapter 5 Overlapped Commands Overlapped Commands SCOPE TRIG and OUT IMP are designated as overlapped commands because they may be overlapped interrupted by the next command before they have completed execution When an overlapped command is interrupted it may take longer to execute while it waits for other commands to be completed To prevent an overlapped command from being interrupted during execution use OPC OPC or WAI These commands prevent inte
126. auto the calibrator uses your voltage setting to automatically set the range limit that provides the most accurate output When set to locked the range limit remains fixed and you can decrease the voltage down to the bottom of the range For example assume the range limit is 40 mV If you enter 5 mV with auto selected the calibrator will automatically change the range limit to 10 mV and output 5 mV from within the 10 mV range However if you start with the 40 mV range locked and then enter 5 mV the calibrator will output 5 mV from within the 40 mV range 8 23 5500A Operator Manual 8 24 8 37 8 38 The default range setting is auto which should always be used unless you are troubleshooting discontinuities in your oscilloscope s vertical gain The range setting will always return to auto after you leave LEVSINE mode MODE Indicates you are in LEVSINE mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other calibration modes Sweeping Through a Frequency Range When you change frequencies using the sweep method the output sine wave sweeps through a specified range of frequencies This feature lets you identify the frequency at which the oscilloscope s signal exhibits certain behavior you can quickly see the frequency response of the oscilloscope Before you start this procedure make sure you are in the MORE OPTIONS menu and the sine wave is displayed on the oscilloscope Perform
127. be completed To prevent an overlapped command from being interrupted during execution use OPC OPC WAI These commands prevent interruptions until they detect the command s completion For more information see Overlapped Commands in Chapter 5 Coupled Commands SCOPE and OUT IMP are coupled commands because they can be coupled combined with other commands to form a compound command sequence Care must be taken to ensure that commands are not coupled in a way that may cause them to disable each other since this may result in a fault For more information see Coupled Commands in Chapter 5 5500A SC600 Option 8 Remote Commands and Queries 8 50 General Commands SCOPE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Programs the 5520A SC oscilloscope calibration hardware if installed The instrument settings are determined by this command s parameter Once in SCOPE mode use the OUT command to program new output in all functions except Impedance Measurement and the RANGE command as required in OVERLD PULSE and MEAS Z functions only OPER STBY OPC OPC and all operate as described in Chapter 6 The state of the oscilloscope s output while in SCOPE mode is reflected by the bit in the ISR that is assigned to SETTLED OFF VOLT EDGE Parameter LEVSINE MARKER WAVEGEN Table 8 15 SCOPE Command Parameters Description Example Turns the oscilloscope hardware off Pr
128. binding posts on the front panel of the 5725A supplies extended capability Since most meters have a separate input terminal for the high current ranges this eliminates the need to change cables during a procedure Appendices Appendix Title A el id B ASCII and IEEE 488 Bus Codes eese ener C RS 232 IEEE 488 Cables and Connectors D Creating a Visual Basic Test E Error e eter Appendix Glossary adc analog to digital converter A device or circuit that converts an analog signal to digital signals absolute uncertainty Uncertainty specifications that include the error contributions made by all equipment and standards used to calibrate the instrument Absolute uncertainty is the numbers to compare with the UUT for determining test uncertainty ratio accuracy The degree to which the measured value of a quantity agrees with the true correct value of that quantity For example an instrument specified to 1 uncertainty is 99 accurate apparent power The power value obtained by simply multiplying the ac current by the ac voltage on a circuit without consideration of any phase relationship between the two waveforms See true power for comparison assert To cause a digital signal to go into a logic true state af audio frequency The frequency range of human hearing normal
129. bits parity PNONE none PODD odd PEVEN even Example SET returns 9600 DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE Return the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port as shown when set to the factory default values Summary of Commands and Queries Remote Commands 6 VAL X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Measurement Value command Return the last value of the thermocouple temperature measurement The unit returns indicates the status of the reading Responses measurement value CEL measurement value FAR 0 00 00 OVER 0 00 00 OPENTC 0 00E 00 NONE Example VAL returns 0 00 00 NONE Return 0 and NONI value is in Celsius value 1s in Fahrenheit value is over or under capability open thermocouple wrong mode or no measurement E when there is no recent thermocouple measurement either because the 5500A Calibrator is not in the thermocouple measurement mode or because no measurement has been made yet VVAL X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Measurement Voltage command Return the last value of the thermocouple temperature measurement in volts If the last measurement was an overload or open
130. calibration settings for your oscilloscope This example shows the gain at 20 mV to be 4 divisions at 5 mV per division gl006i bmp 4 Change the voltage to the next value recommended for calibrating your oscilloscope model and repeat this procedure at the new voltage level verifying the gain is correct according to the specifications in your manual 5 Repeat the procedure for each channel 8 71 5500A Operator Manual 8 98 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope The pulse response is calibrated with a square wave signal that has a fast leading edge rise time Using this signal you adjust the oscilloscope as necessary until it meets its particular specifications for rise time and pulse aberrations Following pulse verification the frequency response is checked by applying a leveled sine wave and acquiring a frequency reading at the 3 dB point when the amplitude drops approximately 30 8 99 The Edge Function The Edge function is used for calibrating the pulse response for your oscilloscope To reach the Edge menu press the softkey under MODE until edge appears Qutput at SCOPE TRIG MODE terminal S s FF edge A444 5 OFF edge 1 levzine marker Wasegern volt gl027i eps Each option in the Edge menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 50 Q Indicates the location and impedance of the signal output If the
131. clearing the remote state see the REMOTE command and front panel lockout see the LOCKOUT command This command duplicates the IEEE 488 GTL Go To Local message Parameter None Example LOCAL Set the instrument into the local state clearing the remote state and front panel lockout if enable LOCKOUT 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Lockout command Puts the 5500A Calibrator into the lockout state when in remote control see the REMOTE command This means no local operation at the front panel is allowed during remote control To clear the lockout condition use the LOCAL command This command duplicates the IEEE 488 LLO Local Lockout message Parameter None Example LOCKOUT Set the instrument into the front panel lockout state The front panels controls cannot be used LOWS IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Low Potential Output Terminals command Select whether or not the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal are internally tied together default or are open This feature is used for ac power dc power dual dc volts and dual ac volts outputs Once set the 5500A Calibrator retains the LO setting until power off or reset Parameter OPEN disconnect NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals TIED connect
132. diode and a transistor These reference amplifiers exhibit extremely low uncertainty and drift and are superior to zener diode or temperature compensated zener diode voltage references 5500A Operator Manual reference standard The highest echelon standard in a laboratory the standard that is used to maintain working standards that are used in routine calibration and comparison procedures relative uncertainty 5500A uncertainty specifications that exclude the effects of external dividers and standards for use when range constants are adjusted Relative uncertainty includes only the stability temperature coefficient noise and linearity specifications of the 5500A itself reliability A measure of the uptime of an instrument repeatability The degree of agreement among independent measurements of a quantity under the same conditions resistance A property of a conductor that determines the amount of current that will flow when a given amount of voltage exists across the conductor Resistance is measured in ohms One ohm is the resistance through which one volt of potential will cause one ampere of current to flow resolution The smallest change in quantity that can be detected by a measurement system or device For a given parameter resolution is the smallest increment that can be measured generated or displayed rf radio frequency The frequency range of radio waves from 150 kHz up to the infrared range rms
133. eese Wave Generator Specifications sss sese eee eee Pulse Generator Trigger Signal Specifications Pulse Function Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker Function Trigger Signal Specifications Edge Function Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function Trigger Signal Specifications esse see eee ee eee Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications Overload Measurement Oscilloscope Connections sss sese eee ee eee eee Starting the SC600 The Output TTT TT Adjusting the Output ana Value ete aee Adjusting Values with the Rotary Using and Resetting the SC600 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope Th VOLT rettet eee The Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration Procedure Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency
134. for capacitance The external sensing capability of the four and two wire compensated connections provides increased precision for resistance values below 110 kQ and capacitance values 110 nf and above Part of the setting up the calibrator output for resistance and capacitance includes selections for four wire compensation COMP 4 wire two wire compensation COMP 2 wire and two wire no compensation COMP off See Setting Resistance Output and Setting Capacitance Output later in this chapter Note that compensated connections for capacitance are to compensate for lead and internal resistances not for lead and internal capacitances Four Wire Connection The four wire connection is typical for calibrating laboratory measurement equipment Increased precision is provided for resistance values below 110 kQ and capacitance values 110 nF and above For other values the lead resistances do not degrade the calibration and the Calibrator changes the compensation to off COMP off Two Wire Compensation The two wire connection is typical for calibrating precision handheld Digital Multimeters DMMs with a two wire input Increased precision is provided for resistance values below 110 and capacitance values 110 nf and above For other values the Calibrator changes the compensation to off COMP off Compensation Off Compensation off is a typical connection for calibrating handheld analog meters or DMMs with a two wire input This conn
135. for more information Whenever a non sinusoidal waveform is selected the Output Display shows peak to peak Waveform is not available for a sinewave output in dBm instead of volts 4 23 Setting DC Current Output Complete the following procedure to set a dc current output at the 5500A front panel AUX terminals 5725A Amplifier BOOST terminals if a 5725A is connected If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value 1 2 gt 9o vL Press to clear any output from the 5500A Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure dc current on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 Press to select the polarity of the current default is Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 234 567 mA below Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 10 Press to activate the calibrator output 4 21 5500A Operator Manual Several softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the dc current function OUTPUT if an auxiliary amplifier is connected to the calibrator and a Range softkey at 3500A 1 33
136. in remote configurations This manual also provides a glossary of calibration specifications and error code information The Operator Manual includes the following topics e Installation e Operating controls and features including front panel operation e Remote operation IEEE 488 bus or serial port remote control e Serial port operation printing displaying or transferring data and setting up for serial port remote control Introduction and Specifications 5725A Amplifier e Operator maintenance including verification procedures and calibration approach for the 5500A e Oscilloscope Calibration Option e Accessories 1 10 5500A Operator Reference Guide The 5500A Operator Reference Guide contains a summary of operating instructions and a front panel and rear panel feature reference 1 11 55004 Remote Programming Reference Guide The 5500A Remote Programming Reference Guide contains a summary of remote commands and reference information useful in determining system status using the status byte and related registers 1 12 5500A Service Manual The 5500A Service Manual can be ordered through your local Fluke Sales or Service representative see Service Information in Chapter 2 The 5500A Service Manual includes theory of operation performance testing maintenance calibration troubleshooting parts lists and schematic diagrams 1 13 5725A Amplifier The Fluke 5725A Amplifier Figure 1 3 is an external unit ope
137. interface operation the Service Request Enable Register is used to assert the SRQ control line on detection of any status condition or conditions the programmer chooses For RS 232 interface operation the SRQSTR string is sent over the serial interface when the SRQ line is set See the SROSTR command description in Chapter 6 for more information Serial Poll Status Byte STB The 5500A Calibrator sends the serial poll status byte STB when it responds to a serial poll This byte is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on The value of this byte at power on is determined by the value of the service request enable register SRE which is saved in nonvolatile memory The STB byte is defined as shown in Figure 5 9 If you are using the RS 232 as the remote control interface transmitting the P character in the Terminal mode hold down the lt gt key and press P returns the SPLSTR Serial Poll String and the status byte Refer to the STB command and for RS 232 interface operation the SPLSTR and SPLSTR commands in Chapter 6 for more information 5 35 5500A Operator Manual 59 V SOx A OS 6 ESS YA OO 4 amp SSI A Eo d Instrument Status Change Enable Registers Write using ISCEO 1 to 0 transition ISCE1 0 to 1 transition ISCE 1 to 0 AND 0 0 1 Read using ISCEO tension 1toOt ISCE1 0 to 1 transition ISCE 11000 0101 Logical OR Instrument
138. internal and at 29 88 C If the temperature return for the internal reference is 0 0 00 00 the 5500A Calibrator is not in Operate and or the Calibrator is not in a thermocouple mode TC X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Type command Set the Thermocouple TC temperature sensor type The TC type is used when the output 15 set to a temperature value with the OUT command and the temperature sensor type is set to TC with the 5 TYPE command When the thermocouple type is changed while simulating a temperature output the temperature is changed to 0 C Once set the 5500A Calibrator retains the TC type until power off or reset w Parameters B type thermocouple C type thermocouple E type thermocouple J type thermocouple K type thermocouple default N type thermocouple R type thermocouple S type thermocouple T type thermocouple 10 uV C linear output Example TC_TYPE J Set the thermocouple type for simulating a temperature output to a J type thermocouple Remote Commands Summary of Commands and Queries 6 TC_TYPE IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Type query Return the Thermocouple TC temperature sensor type When the th
139. limit the value will not change and the 5520A will beep If you need to reach a different range of values turn the knob quickly to jump to the new range Using D and The and keys cause the current value of the signal to jump to a pre determined cardinal value whose amount is determined by the current function These keys are described in more detail under the descriptions for each function Resetting the Oscilloscope Option You can reset all parameters in the 55204 to their default settings at any time during front panel operations by pressing the key on the front panel After resetting the 5500A press to return to the Oscilloscope Calibration Option the Volt menu appears Press to reconnect the signal output 5500A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 93 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 94 The oscilloscope voltage gain is calibrated by applying a low frequency square wave signal and adjusting its gain to meet the height specified for different voltage levels designated by the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope The signal is applied from the 5520A in Volt mode The specific voltages that you should use for calibration and the graticule line divisions that need to be matched vary for different oscilloscopes and are specified in your oscilloscope s service manual The Volt Function The Voltage gain is calibrated using the Volt function This f
140. local operation The Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local SJ 5 25 2 45 gl41f eps The left side of the Control Display shows information regarding the present output function However front panel operation is restricted to use of the power switch and the Go To Local softkeys Pressing either of these softkeys using RS 232 to send the command LOCAL or IEEE 488 to send the GTL Go To Local message returns the 5500A Calibrator to the local state 5 20 Remote with Lockout State When the 5500A Calibrator is placed in lockout either via RS 232 LOCKOUT command or via the IEEE 488 message LLO the 5500A front panel controls are totally locked out In remote with lockout the Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL LOCKOUT SJ 5 25 2 2 gl46f eps The left side of the Control Display shows information regarding the present output function However front panel operation is restricted to use of the power switch To return the 5500A Calibrator to the local with lockout state send the RS 232 LOCAL command or the IEEE 488 GTL Go To Local message and unasserts the REN line 5 21 5500A Operator Manual Table 5 1 summarizes the possible Remote Local state transitions For more information on IEEE 488 GPIB messages see IEEE 488 Overview Table 5 1 Operating State Transitions From To Front Pa
141. of obstructions The air entering the instrument must be at room temperature make sure the exhaust air from another instrument is not directed into the fan inlet e Clean the air filter every 30 days or more frequently if the calibrator is operated in dusty environment See Chapter 7 Maintenance for instructions on cleaning the air filter Connecting the 5725A Amplifier The 5500A provides an interface connection for the Fluke 5725A Amplifier You designate whether the 5500A or 5725A is the preferred source of current and voltage in a calibrator setup menu see Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation A single connection cable provides the complete link for analog and digital control signals Refer to the 5725A Instruction Manual for installation instructions 2 7 5500A Operator Manual 2 8 Chapter 3 Features Contents ys TE Te Front Panel Features eese Rear Panel Features viscisscsactenvecnsccrsevdevurvestsccesestosersanndssnavetabensnatavsnavecanes Softkey Menu Trees 2 ae eiit ne esten ceti see ivt tess 3 3 3 1 5500A Operator Manual 3 2 Features 3 Introduction 3 2 Introduction This chapter is a reference for the functions and locations of the 5500A Calibrator s front and rear panel features Please read this information before operating the calibrator Front panel operating instructions for the calibrator are provided in
142. option if it is present An annunciator on the key indicates when the option is enabled If the ScopeCal option is not installed in the calibrator and the Scope key is pressed the calibrator will beep with no change in the calibrator s status BOOST The BOOST 5725A Amplifier Boost key enables or disables output from an amplifier when it would not otherwise be automatically selected The BOOST key sets the 5500A to standby if this selection moves the output location An annunciator on the key indicates when the 5725A is being used When available an amplifier is automatically selected for output settings that exceed 5500A capabilities but fall within the limits of the selected amplifier The BOOST key is only needed to activate an amplifier for an output setting that is available from either the 5500A or the amplifier This allows you to take advantage of amplifier capabilities in addition to extended range such as higher compliance voltage PREV MENU The PREV MENU Previous Menu key recalls the previous set of menu choices Each press of this key backs up one level of the menu tree until the display indicates the top level menu selection of the function selected Softkeys The functions of the five unlabeled blue softkeys are identified by labels on the Control Display directly above each key The functions change during operation so that many different functions are accessible through these keys A group of softkey labels is called
143. output signal are indicated in the Output Display the display on the left side The following example shows the default settings for Volt mode which are set when you start the Oscilloscope Calibration Option gl022i eps If STBY is displayed press the key The Output Display will show OPR and the output should appear on the oscilloscope 8 66 5500A SC300 Option 8 Starting the Oscilloscope Calibration Option 8 88 Adjusting the Output Signal The 5520A provides several ways to change the settings for the output signal during calibration Since oscilloscope calibration requires many adjustments of the output signal the three available methods for changing these settings for oscilloscope calibration are summarized below These methods provide the means of jumping to a new value or sweeping through a range of values 8 89 Keying in a Value To key a specific value directly into the 5520A from its front panel 1 Key in the value you want to enter including the units and prefixes For example to enter 120 mV press 1 2 0 Hm y The Control Display will show 120 IS 2 5 5 Units and prefixes printed in purple in the upper left corner of the keys are accessed through the key For example to enter 200 us press 2 0 0 snr Ha T anr 8 910021 If you make error press to clear the Control Display and return to the menu 2 Press to
144. particular installation If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures e Reorient the receiving antenna e Relocate the equipment with respect to the receiver e Move the equipment away from the receiver e Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the computer and receiver are on different branch circuits If necessary the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00345 4 Declaration of the Manufacturer or Importer We hereby certify that the Fluke Model 5500A is in compliance with BMPT Vfg 243 1991 and is RFI suppressed The normal operation of some equipment e g signal generators may be subject to specific restrictions Please observe the notices in the users manual The marketing and sales of the equipment was reported to the Central Office for Telecommunication Permits BZT The right to retest this equipment to verify compliance with the regulation was given to the BZT Bescheinigung des Herstellers Importeurs
145. power function dual dc volts function dual ac volts function measure temperature with a thermocouple oscilloscope ac volts function oscilloscope dc volts function oscilloscope marker function oscilloscope leveled sine function oscilloscope edge function FUNC returns DCV_DCV Return DCV_DCV when the 5500A Calibrator output function dual dc volts Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries HARMONIC X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped X Coupled Harmonic command Make the frequency of one output a multiple of another output for the ac voltage or ac power functions sinewaves only For example in dual ac voltage have the frequency of the voltage output on the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals at 60 Hz and the frequency of the voltage output on the AUX terminals at the 7th harmonic 420 Hz The range for the harmonics is 1 to 50 You can assign the fundamental frequency output on either the 5500A Calibrator NORMAL terminals or AUX terminals or 5725A Amplifier BOOST terminals if a 5725A Amplifier is connected using the second PRI and SEC parameters Omitting the second parameter leaves the fundamental and the harmonic locations unchanged Parameters value PRI fundamental at 55004 NORMAL terminals value SEC fundamental at 5500A AUX terminals or 5725A Amplifier BOOST terminals if 5725A is connected
146. pulse width of 50 ns and a period of 200 ns with the following sequence 5j 0 swer Pk su 5 2 0 J O snr smrt To change only the pulse width enter a value in seconds You can enter this value with units e g 200 ns or without units e g 0 0000002 To change only the period enter a frequency with units e g 20 MHz changing the period to 50 ns 5500A Operator Manual 8 45 Measuring Input Resistance and Capacitance Measured SCOPE MEASURE MODE res 500 meas Z terminal A A A res 500 volt res edge cap levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the Impedance Capacitance MEAS 2 menu is described below e Measured SCOPE terminal Indicates the location of the measured input e MEASURE Indicates the type of test You can select res 50 Q or res 1 MQ termination for impedance or cap capacitance MODE Indicates the Calibrator is in MEAS Z mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes If you have selected Capacitance measurement the menu appears as follows Measured 8 SCOPE SET MEASURE MODE terminal OFFSET cap meas 2 CLEAR OFFSET e SET OFFSET With t
147. rtd connections e TYPE RTD Type Selects the rtd curve pt385 curve amp 0 00385 ohms ohm C pt3926 curve amp 0 003926 ohms ohm C or 1120 empirical curve e OUTPUT Temperature Output Device Selects the temperature device thermocouple tc or resistance temperature detector rtd Select rtd COMP Compensation Applies 4 wire compensation 2 wire compensation or turns compensation off Compensation refers to methods of connecting the 5500A to the UUT to cancel out test lead resistance See Four wire versus Two wire Connections earlier in this chapter for more information For the 3 lead connection Figure 4 9 select COMP off Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 4 33 Measuring Thermocouple Temperatures Complete the following procedure to measure the output of a thermocouple connected to the TC input If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500A 2 Connect the thermocouple to the front panel TC connector Note Use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of thermocouple For example K type wire and K type miniconnectors 3 Press 5 amp 5 to display the TC menus below fie as aT Tans TC I m G DHG UID to 4 amp 5 C OpenTCD UNITS GAS 073 22 ary F an i intrni anm Bj intrnl 25fl s B OFF E extrnl z3ie r C 1 1 D B C
148. second In terms of volts and ohms one watt is the power dissipated by one ampere flowing through a one ohm load working standard A standard that is used in routine calibration and comparison procedures in the laboratory and is maintained be comparison to reference standards zero error Same as offset error The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is applied is its zero or offset error 5500A Operator Manual A 10 Appendix ASCII and IEEE 488 Bus Codes B 1 5500A Operator Manual B 2 DECIMAL OCTAL HEX BINARY 7654 3210 DEV NO MESSAGE ATN TRUE ASCII CHAR DECIMAL 64 OCTAL HEX 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 Appendices ASCII and IEEE 488 Bus Codes BINARY DEV 7654 3210 MESSAGE ATN TRUE A D D R E 5 5 D C 0 M M A N D S 3 gt gt Arm lt lt GGO rm omm zc gt 1000 1001 1010 1011 gt 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 0001 0010 0011 0 0100 0101 0110 0111 09 zm o r H A 074 075 076 077 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 3 oOzocomco Fb 01 eps B 5500A Ope
149. seconds Init IEEE Bus 20 TIMEOUT 20 1000 30 INIT PORT 0 40 CLEAR 6 100 REM Reset 5500A TC measurement mod 110 PRINT 6 RST TC TYPE J TC MEAS FAR 200 PRINT Hit Carriage Return to take a Reading 210 INPUTLINE A 220 RE rigger and wait for measurement 230 PRINT 06 TRG 240 REM Read measurement unit 250 INPUT 86 M US 260 GOTO 200 Using the RS 232 UUT Port to Control an instrument The SERIAL 2 TO UUT 5 232 port is used to pass commands on to another instrument For example a meter that is being calibrated can have its RS 232 port connected the calibrator SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port Commands sent from a controller can be routed through the calibrator s UUT port and received by the meter or UUT There six special UUT_ commands incorporated into the calibrator for passing commands on to an instrument connected to the UUT port Refer to Chapter 6 5 66 Remote Operation Remote Program Examples Input Buffer Operation As the 5500A Calibrator receives each data byte from the controller it places the bytes in a portion of memory called the input buffer The input buffer holds up to 350 data bytes and operates in a first in first out fashion IEEE 488 The 5500A Calibrator treats the EOI IEEE 488 control line as a separate data byte and inserts it into the input buffer if it is encountered as part of a message terminator Input buffer operation is transparent to the program running on the controller
150. signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press LoPR disconnect the signal press 5 You cannot change the output impedance in Edge mode e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to toggle the trigger off and on When on the reading will show 1 which indicates that the external trigger is at the same frequency as the edge output The external trigger can be useful for many digital storage oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on fast rise time signals You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing MODE Indicates you in Edge mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes 8 72 5500A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 100 Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This sample procedure shows how to check the oscilloscope s pulse response Before you check your oscilloscope see your oscilloscope s manual for the recommended calibration settings Before you start this procedure verify that you are running the oscilloscope option in Edge mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu at SCOFE TRIG MODE terminal 50 OFF edge 5 5 5 5 5 gl028i eps Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the pulse response 1 Connect the 5520A to Channel 1 on the o
151. sound the beeper Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 9 The Polarity key changes the polarity of the output for dc voltage or current functions Press the key then ENTER to toggle the output polarity The TRIG OUT Trigger Output BNC connector is used to trigger the oscilloscope during oscilloscope calibration This is active only when the ScopeCal option is installed The SCOPE Oscilloscope connector is used for outputs during oscilloscope calibration This is active only when the ScopeCal option is installed The TC Thermocouple connector is used for thermocouple simulation during temperature meter calibration and thermocouple measurements You must use the correct thermocouple wire and plug when using this connector For example if simulating a K thermocouple use K type thermocouple wire and K type plug for making connections The AUX Auxiliary Output jacks are used for ac and current outputs the second voltage output in dual voltage modes and ohms sense for 2 wire and 4 wire compensated resistance and capacitance measurements and RTD simulation The NORMAL Normal Output jacks are used for ac and dc voltage ohms and capacitance sourcing and Resistance Temperature Detector RTD simulation 3 9 5500A Operator Manual 3 10 NORMAL ENABLE CALIBRATION 2 OV JO IEEE 488
152. the INCR command REFOUT Returns the value of the reference which is the output values of the 5500A the last time a new reference was established with an OUT NEWREF or MULT External Connection Commands CUR_POST Selects the active binding posts for current output This applies to current and power outputs CUR_POST Returns the active binding posts for current output EARTH Select whether or not external earth ground is open or tied to the internal guard shields EARTH Return whether or not external earth ground is open or tied to the internal guard shields LOWS Return whether or not the low terminals are internally open or tied together LOWS Select whether or not the low terminals are internally open or tied together for dual outputs RTD_TYPE Sets the Resistance Temperature Detector RTD sensor type RTD_TYPE Returns the Resistance Temperature Detector RTD type used for RTD temperature simulations 5500A OUT command Operator Manual TC_REF Sets whether the internal temperature sensor or an external reference value is used for Thermocouple TC outputs and measurements TC_REF Returns the source and value of the temperature being used as a reference for thermocouple simulation and measurement TC_TYPE Sets the Thermocouple TC temperature sensor type TC_TYPE Returns the thermocouple TC sensor type used for temperature simulations and measurements TSENS_TYPE Sets the temp
153. the dc voltage function as follows a Turn on the DMM and set its function switch to y b Set the warmed up calibrator to 3 5 V dc Press c Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator output for a reading of 3 5000 on the DMM display d Verify that the error shown on the control display is less than the specification for the DMM in its Users Manual e Check the DMM error at 35 0 V 35 0 V 350 0 V Hint use the Verify the errors are within specification When 47 causes the output to go over 33 V the calibrator goes into standby When this happens press to operate f Check the DMM error at 1000 V to verify it is within specification g Set the output of the calibrator to 350 mV and press Verify the errors within specifications 4 53 5500A Operator Manual 4 54 a 5 Test the ac voltage function Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to Y b Set the output of the calibrator to 350 mV at 60 Hz and press opr Verify the errors are within specifications c Check the error against specifications at the following voltages and frequencies 350 mV 60 Hz 5 kHz amp 20 kHz 3 500 V 60 Hz 5 kHz amp 20 kHz 35 00 V 60 Hz 5 kHz amp 20 kHz 329 0 V 60 Hz 5 kHz amp 20 kHz 100 0 V 20 kHz 200 0 V 20 kHz 300 0 V 20 kHz 1000 V 60 Hz amp 5 kHz 6 Test the
154. the following procedure to sweep through frequencies 1 Make sure the output signal shows the starting frequency If not key in the starting frequency then press 2 Toggle FREQ CHANGE to sweep Toggle the RATE to a lower frequency if you want to observe a very slow sweep over a small range 3 Key in the end frequency then press After you press ENTER the signal sweeps through frequencies between the two values you entered and the Sweep menu Sweeping from previous to displayed frequency appears the Control Display 4 You can let the signal sweep through the entire range or you can halt the sweep if you need to record the frequency at a certain point To interrupt the sweep press the softkey under HALT SWEEP The current frequency will appear on the Output Display and the MORE OPTIONS menu will reappear on the Control Display Note When you interrupt the frequency sweep by pressing HALT SWEEP the FREQ CHANGE method switches back to jump 5 Repeat the procedure if necessary For example if you did a fast sweep you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slow sweep over a subset of your previous frequency range Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure This sample procedure which verifies the frequency response on your oscilloscope is usually performed after the pulse response is verified This procedure checks the bandwidth by finding the frequency at the 3 dB poi
155. the value of the squarewave output duty cycle 1 00 to 99 00 Response value of duty cycle in percent Example DUTY returns 1 234E 01 Return 12 34 for the value of the squarewave duty cycle EARTH 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Earth Ground command Select whether or not the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal is tied to chassis earth ground Once set the 5500A Calibrator retains the earth setting until power off or reset Parameters OPEN disconnect front panel LO terminal from chassis ground TIED connect front panel LO terminal to chassis ground Example EARTH TIED Load TIED to tie the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal to earth the front panel key annunciator is on EARTH 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Earth Ground query Return whether or not the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal is tied to chassis earth ground Responses OPEN front panel LO terminal disconnected from chassis ground front panel LO terminal connected to chassis ground Example EARTH returns OPEN Return OPEN when EARTH is not tied to the NORMAL LO terminal the front panel key annunciator is off Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Que
156. then quickly short out the VIEW switch grid Hold this position until the display is held in self test This puts the UUT into the Reference Junction Sensor calibration mode and the VIEW maneuver turns off a filter so that the reading settled immediately Using a K thermocouple bead supplied with the 5500A LEADS test lead kit and the 55004 Calibrator MEAS TC mode press 4 measure the reference junction transistor temperature by placing the K bead into the middle hole of the isothermal block The bead tip should be placed into the well against the body of Q1 Hint Covering the well and positioning the bead with a piece of tissue may help the bead stay in place Do not hold the bead in place with your hands as this may introduce a measurement error Wait for the temperature reading to stabilize Adjust R16 for a temperature reading on the UUT that is the same as displayed on the 5500A Calibrator Power down the UUT and reassemble da Ln Q KA CA CA CA CA CA CA CA 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 Chapter 5 Remote Operation Contents ERN Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control TEEE 488 Port Setup Procedure sss esse sese T
157. to 191 Example SRE 56 Enable bits 3 EAV 4 MAV and 5 ESR SRE IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Service Request Enable query Return the byte in the Service Request Enable SRE Response lt gt the decimal equivalent of the SRE byte 0 to 191 Example SRE returns 56 Return 56 when bits 3 EAV 4 and 5 ESR are enabled SRQSTR X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Service Request String command Set the Serial Mode SRQ Service Request response up to 40 characters in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands SRQSTR is sent to the host over the serial interface when the SRQ line is asserted terminal mode only Default format is 02 02 04 04x where the 02 8 bits means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 2 hex digits and 04x 16 bits means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 4 hex digits The string representations are SRO STB ESR ISCRO ISCRI See the commands respectively STB ESR ISCRO and ISCR1 A typical string in the default format sent to the host 15 580 44 00 0000 1000 This
158. trigger lt 5 ps Leading Edge Aberrations 2 within 2 ns from 50 of rising edge lt 8 of output 2 mV 2to5ns lt 2 of output 2 mV 5 to 15 ns lt 1 of output 2 mV after 15 ns lt 0 5 of output 2 mV Typical Duty Cycle 45 to 55 Tunnel Diode Pulse Drive Square wave at 100 Hz to 100 kHz with variable amplitude of 60 V to 100V p p 1 The Frequency Range extends to 10 MHz with the Rise Time specification increased to lt 350 ps 2 All edge aberration measurements are made with a Tektronix 11801 mainframe with an SD26 input module 8 7 5500A Operator Manual 8 8 8 5 Leveled Sine Wave Specifications Leveled Sine Wave Characteristics into 500 Table 8 3 Leveled Sine Wave Specifications 50 kHz reference Frequency Range 50 kHz to 100 MHz to 300 MHz to 100 MHz 300 MHz 600 MHz Amplitude Characteristics for measuring oscilloscope bandwidth Range p p Resolution Adjustment Range 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 Flatness relative to 50 kHz Short Term Amplitude Stability 2 of output 300 uV not applicable Frequency Characteristics Resolution 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C Distortion Characteristics 2nd Harmonic 3rd and Higher Harmonics 5 mV to 5 5 V lt 100 mV 3 digits gt 100 mV 4 digits continuously adjustable 4 of output 6 of output 300 uV 300 uV 3 5 of outpu
159. typical AC Current Triangle Wave Characteristics typical Introduction sss Turning on the Calibrator Warming up the Calibrator Using the Softkeys Using the Setup Menu Using the Instrument Setup Menu sse Selecting an External Amplifier sse ee eee eee eee Utility Functions Menu Using the Format EEPROM Menu seen Resetting the Calibrator Zeroing the Calibrator Using the Operate and Standby Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT sss Recommended Cable and Connector When to Use EARTH Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections 0022 2 Cable Connection Instructions ii Sin in ip LB L gt gt L gt gt gt gt gt 2 D LE 4 18 Rms Versus Peak to Peak Waveforms sss eee ee eee eee 4 16 4 19 Auto Range Versus Locked 4 17 4 20 Setting the enne enne enne nennen nnns 4 17 4 21 Setting DC Voltage Output sees eee eee eee 4 18 4 22 Setting AC Voltage Output sees eee ee eee 4 19 4 23 Setting DC Current Output sees sees ereenn 4 2 4 24 Setting AC Current
160. und daB diese Software auf fehlerfreien Datentr gern gespeichert wurde Fluke bernimmt jedoch keine Garantie daf r daB die Software fehlerfrei ist und st rungsfrei arbeitet Von Fluke autorisierte Weiterverkaufsstellen werden diese Garantie ausschlieBlich f r neue und nichtbenutzte an Endverbraucher verkaufte Produkte leisten sind jedoch nicht dazu berechtigt diese Garantie im Namen von Fluke zu verl ngern auszudehnen oder in irgendeiner anderen Weise abzu ndern Der Erwerber hat das Recht aus der Garantie abgeleitete Unterst tzungsleistungen in Anspruch zu nehmen wenn er das Produkt bei einer von Fluke autorisierten Vertriebsstelle gekauft oder den jeweils geltenden internationalen Preis gezahlt hat Fluke beh lt sich das Recht vor dem Erwerber Einfuhrgeb hren f r Ersatzteile in Rechnung zu stellen wenn dieser das Produkt in einem anderen Land zur Reparatur anbietet als das Land in dem er das Produkt urspr nglich erworben hat Flukes Garantieverpflichtung beschr nkt sich darauf da Fluke nach eigenem Ermessen den Kaufpreis ersetzt oder aber das defekte Produkt unentgeltlich repariert oder austauscht wenn dieses Produkt innerhalb der Garantiefrist einem von Fluke autorisierten Servicezentrum zur Reparatur bergeben wird Um die Garantieleistung in Anspruch zu nehmen wenden Sie sich bitte an das n chstgelegene und von Fluke autorisierte Servicezentrum oder senden Sie das Produkt mit einer Beschreibung des Problems und unter Vo
161. voltage dc offset specifications Accessing the Fuse and Selecting Line Voltage 2 5 Adjusting the Phase Air Filter Cleaning the 7 4 Amplitude Calibration 8 16 8 18 8 69 8 71 Applications 4 52 Calibrating a Fluke 51 Thermometer Calibrating an 80 Series DMM Testing a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer Auto Range Auto Range versus Locked Range 4 17 B BOOST 3 5 BOOST remote command 6 8 BOOST remote command 6 8 INDEX 1 5500A Operator Manual INDEX 2 Bus Setup 5 7 C Cable Connection Instructions 4 11 Cable Connections for Testing a 40 Series Watts Function 4 59 Cable Connections for Testing a 50 Series Thermometer 4 62 Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series Current Function 4 55 Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series General Functions 4 53 Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series High Amps Function Cable recommendations 4 9 Cables 4 52 Calculating power uncertainty 1 25 Calibrating an 80 Series DMM 4 52 Fluke 51 Thermometer Calibrating the Meter Calibrating the Thermocouple Calibration Check Performing a 7 6 CALIBRATION Switch 3 10 Calibration Switch Enabled Commands 5 29 Capacitance Accuracy Capacitance Output Setting Caution 14 63 17 6 CAUTION 2 3 2 7 4 6 4 9 4 18 19 24 h 26 14 28 4 30 7 4 3 6 CFREQ remote command
162. voltage limits and can be changed only with new entries or returned to factory defaults 1020V and 1020V using SETUP see menu F ND spec 3 800 UV ec 1 Year Spec r 3 000 uv A A TA 2 STORE i CAL REPORT j PRINT COMSTS i i SETUP REPORTS to AC to STOF REPORT Select the desired CAL Calibration feature CAL to calibrate the 5500A see the Service Manual CAL DATES to review when the 5500A Calibrator was last calibrated CAL REPORTS to printout the calibration data Future Z Future F3 04g eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 19 5500A Operator Manual 68 LAS INTERVLE FORMAT DEST AA FAGE 11 YEAR i stored i print host A A to AB 90 day active spread uut 1 year consts stored LINES VERE PAGE 68 DE AB SCOPE onn i OHMS i ZERO ERE ACT AC CAL i CAL i ZERO i backup AJ A Only if scope option installed to AE to AD backup abort cont 5500A CAL opens the calibration menu Refer to the Service Manual for instructions ZERO zeros the 5500A Calibrator OHMS ZERO zeros the ohms portion of the 5500A Calibrator ERR ACT Error Action set backup abort or cont continue Connect voltmeter to Hormal terminals amp AD set it to measure DC i GO
163. warmup but specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete 2 Press the key on the 5500A Calibrator front panel Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to select the serial port for remote operation then continue to Step 4 CAL SHO IHSTMT UTILITY SPECS SETUP FURCTHS AI 2 2 B9 5 L THF OUTPUT DISPLA REMOTE itz SETUP SETUP SETUP ISI 2 2 2 BS Y HOST HOST serial SETUP SETUP SETUP B9 BE Select ap ib Bea To step 4 gl43f eps Remote Operation Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control 5 4 Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to select the HOST serial port parameters to match the PC COM parameters Individual softkey functions are discussed in Chapter 3 Features If operating the port with a computer program instead of individual commands from a terminal select Remote I F comp From step 3 2 DATA STOF STALL PARITY HET BITS BIT om oF EF nane 25 2 A i sonm OE F nore none odd rtects even 600 REMOTE I F term CELF A AJ 5 i5 BN 300 tern 200 camp 1200 LE 2400 4300 7600 SET FIRST MEHL SJ 2 2 B 575121
164. when it is in standby F5 07 eps Figure 5 11 Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCEs and ISCRs 5 41 5500A Operator Manual 5 42 ooo 5 56 Programming the ISR ISCR and ISCE To read the contents of the ISR send the remote command ISR To read the contents of the ISCRO or 1 send the remote command ISCRO or ISCR1 To read the contents of the ISCEO 1 send the remote command 5 0 or ISCE1 The 5500A Calibrator responds by sending a decimal number that represents bits 0 through 15 Every time you read the ISCRO or 1 its contents are zeroed The following sample program reads all five registers 10 THIS PROGRAM READS THE ISR ISCR AND ISCE REGISTERS 20 NOTE THAT THE ICSR COMMANDS CLEAR THE ISCR CONTENTS 30 PRINT 06 ISR ASK ISR CONTENTS 40 INPUT 6 A RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5500A 50 PRINT 6 ISCRO ASK FOR AND CLEAR ISCRO CONTENTS 60 INPUT 6 B RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5500A 70 PRINT 6 ISCEO ASK FOR ISCEO CONTENTS 80 INPUT 86 C RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5500A 50 PRINT 86 ISCR1 ASK FOR AND CLEAR ISCR1 CONTENTS 60 INPUT 06 D RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5500A 70 PRINT 06 5 1 ASK F
165. 0 Performing a Calibration Check Maintenance AC Current Amplitude Accuracy cont Nominal Value A Frequency Hz 5 kHz 10 kHz 1 kHz 5 kHz 45 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 500 Hz 1 kHz 45 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz Measured Value A Deviation 90 Day Spec 0 159 0 459 0 171 0 791 0 094 0 094 0 714 0 171 0 471 0 068 0 098 0 268 7 15 5500A Operator Manual 7 16 7 15 Capacitance Accuracy The Capacitance Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of the synthesized capacitance output at the 5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals Use the Fluke 6304C LCR Meter with PM9540 BAN output cable This cable eliminates the need for a four wire connection Make sure there are no other connections to the 5500A especially the SCOPE BNC Connecting any additional grounds to the 5500A can cause erroneous capacitance outputs To overcome a noise problem increase the meter s signal current by increasing either the frequency which will decrease the capacitance or the voltage level Nominal value nF LCR Stimulus Measured Deviation 90 Day Spec Frequency Hz Value F 0 35 nF 1 kHz 3 23 0 48 nF 1 kHz 2 46 0 6 nF 1 kHz 2 05 1 nF 1 kHz 1 38 1 2 nF 1 kHz 1 22 3 nF 1 kHz 0 71 3 3 nF 1 kHz 0 68 10 9 nF 1 kHz 0 47 12 nF 1 kHz 1 03 30 nF 1 kHz 0 52 33 nF 1 kHz 0 49 109 nF 1 kHz 0 2
166. 0 5 10 MHz _________ 038 1 1 kHz Pp 08 1 100 kHz Pp 08 1 10 MHz _______ 08 2 5 1 kHz Pp 0 35 25 100 kHz P 08 2 5 10 MHz ps 8 70 Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification Table 8 29 Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Hz Value V p p V p p V p p 100 0 2202 10000 0 2202 55 100 1 1002 55 10000 1 1002 100 100 2 0002 100 10000 2 0002 8 54 5500A SC600 Option 8 Verification Tables 8 71 Marker Generator Verification Table 8 30 Marker Generator Verification Period 5 Measured Deviation s 1 Year Value s Spec s 4 979 5 24 91 3 s 2 002 5 4 06E 3 5 50 0 ms 3 75E 6 s 20 0 ms 50E 9 s 10 0 ms 25E 09 s 50 0 us 125 12 5 20 0 50 15 5 10 0 ns 25 15 5 50 0 5 125 15 5 20 0 ns 50 15 5 10 0 ns 25 15 5 5 00 5 12 5 15 5 2 00 ns 5E 15s 8 72 Pulse Generator Verification Period Table 8 31 Pulse Generator Verification Period Nominal Pulse Width Period Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p s s Value s s s 0 0000005 25 08 0 0000005 002 1 1 8 73 Pulse Generator Verification Pulse Width 8E 08 2E00 11 Table 8 32 Pulse Generator Verification Pulse Width Nominal Pulse Width Period Measured
167. 0 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz S60MHz Measured Value V p p Deviation 1 Year Spec V p p V p p f 00021 O 21 0001 21 0004 o 0004 o 0004 O 221 0004 O 221 0004 o oon _________ 0 004 ____________0 00385 00038 __________0 0051 __ ___________0 0051 __ 1 001001 1 001001 1 001001 1 001001 1 001001 oo J 001001 1 001001 21 001001 0 006085 ___________0 006085 _________0 00808 000808 001600 001600 001600 001600 001600 ___________0 01606 21 001600 001600 na f 00061 21 00061 __________ 0 0081 O 21 0008 1 001601 5500A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 Table 8 24 Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Value V p p 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Frequency Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570
168. 0 us to 1 of final value 10 for loads 100 1 41 Current Triangle Wave Characteristics typical Linearity to 400 Hz 0 3 of p p value from 10 to 90 point 1 of p p value with amplitude gt 50 of range 1 31 5500A Operator Manual 1 32 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation Contents Unpacking and Inspection eese Replacing The terere te et tene ere Selecting Line Voltage aieo eed Connecting To POWer desereret eai tbe ato Bee Ho certe Lodge Service Placement and Rack Cooling Considerations eiric rai in isnot rien an ii a Connecting the 5725A Amplifier sese ee eee eee eee 2 1 5500A Operator Manual 2 2 Preparing for Operation 2 Introduction 2 1 2 2 Item Model or Part Number Calibrator 5500A Line Power Cord See Table 2 2 and Figure 2 2 5500A Getting Started Manual 945159 5500A Operator Reference Guide 945097 5500A Remote Programming Reference Guide 105783 CD ROM contains Operator and Service Manuals 1627768 Certificate of Calibration Form G749 AA Warning The 5500A Calibrator can supply lethal voltages Read this section before operating the calibrator Introduction This chapter provides i
169. 000 1 6501 triangle 0 0018 1000 0 000154 triangle 0 0219 1000 0 000757 triangle 0 0899 1000 0 002797 triangle 0 219 1000 0 00667 triangle 0 899 1000 0 02707 triangle 6 59 1000 0 1978 triangle 55 1000 1 6501 8 43 5500A Operator Manual 8 44 8 61 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 502 Output Impedance Table 8 20 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 500 output impedance Wave Shape Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Hz Value V p p V p p V p p square 0 0018 1000 0 000154 square 0 0064 1000 0 000292 square 0 0109 1000 0 000427 square 0 011 1000 0 00043 square 0 028 1000 0 00094 square 0 0449 1000 0 001447 square 0 045 1000 0 00145 square 0 078 1000 0 00244 square 0 109 1000 0 00337 square 0 11 1000 0 0034 square 0 28 1000 0 0085 square 0 449 1000 0 01357 square 0 45 1000 0 0136 square 0 78 1000 0 0235 square 1 09 1000 0 0328 square 1 1 1000 0 0331 square 1 8 1000 0 0541 square 2 5 10 0 0751 square 2 5 100 0 0751 square 2 5 1000 0 0751 square 2 5 10000 0 0751 sine 0 0018 1000 0 000154 sine 0 0109 1000 0 000427 sine 0 0449 1000 0 001447 sine 0 109 1000 0 00337 sine 0 449 1000 0 01357 sine 1 09 1000 0 0328 sine
170. 000 V 65 Hz 90 0 161 1000 V 500 Hz 0 0 161 1000 V 500 Hz 90 0 161 1000 V 1 kHz 0 0 161 1000 V 5 kHz 0 0 241 1000 V 33 mA 7 kHz 10 kHz 0 0 54196 optional Optional 33 mA 10 kHz 0 54196 800 V 7 22 AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Current Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Current tests the voltage outputs at the NORMAL terminals in the presence of a high current Nominal Nominal Phase Measured WEE S Value V Frequency degrees Value V Deviation 90 Day Spec ia NORMAL 33 mV 11A 65 Hz 0 0 10196 33 mV 11A 65 2 90 0 101 330 mV 11A 1 kHz 0 0 038 3 3 V 2 19A 5 kHz 0 0 048 3 3 V 329 mA 10 kHz 0 0 048 7 19 5500A Operator Manual 7 23 AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Power incorrect Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are The AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Power tests the accuracy of the ac power output at high power levels Nominal Nominal Value V Value Frequency NORMAL A AUX 329 V 2 19 A 5 kHz
171. 02 04x 04 where the term 02x 8 bits means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 2 hex digits and 04x 16 bits means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 4 hex digits The string representations are SPL STB ESR ISCRO ISCR1 See the commands respectively STB ESR ISCRO and ISCR1 A typical string in the default format sent to the host is SPL 44 00 0000 1000 This command is for format For values instead of format enter a P lt cntl gt p character Also see the SROSTR command Parameter lt string gt n n represents the NEWLINE character hex 0A Example SPLSTR SPL 02x 02x 04x 04x n Set the SPLSTR to the default values SPL 02x 02x 04x 04x n SPLSTR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Serial Poll Response String query Return the string programmed for Serial Poll response For values enter a P lt cntl gt p character Also see the SRQSTR command Response lt string gt Example SROSTR returns SRO 02x 02x 04x 04x n Return the SPLSTR string format default settings in this example SRC_PREF 488 85 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Source Preference command Set the source preference to 5500A Calibrator or 5725A Amplifier when 5725A Amplifier is attached which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory W
172. 0E 01 Return 10 when the output voltage is 10 V dc and output current 1 A dc for 10 watts real power Example POWER returns 1 00000E 01 Return 10 when the output voltage is 10 V ac and output current 2 ac and power factor is 5 for 10 watts real power PR PRT X IEEE X RS 232 Description Prints a self calibration report out the selection serial port Parameters 1 Type of report to prin STORED ACTIVE CONSTS 2 Format of report PRINT designed to be read SPREAD designed to be loaded into a spreadsheet 3 Calibration interval to be used for instrument specification in the report 1900 90 day spec 1 year spec 4 Serial port through which to print HOST UUT Example PR PRT STORED PRINT 190D HOST PUD X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Protected User Data command Store a string of 64 characters maximum which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands This command works only when the CALIBRATION switch on the rear panel of the 5500A Calibrator is in the ENABLE position Include a line feed RS 232 character to terminate the block data or End or Identify EOI command IEEE 488 Parameter 2 lt nn gt lt nn characters string gt definite length 0 lt cha
173. 1 General Specifications 1 23 Temperature Calibration RTD Specifications Absolute Uncertainty Absolute Uncertainty Range tcal 5 C Range teal 5 C RTD Type ec H 0 RTD ec H 8 90 days 90 days 20010 90 20010 90 395 1000 10010300 0 08 oo nae 1009260 oo 300540 0 09 500 40060 009 ___ PL 3026 100 10130 00 90 300540 0 09 0 10 Pss 10000 26010300 005 oo 40060 oo 0010 oo oo was __8000 oo oo loe 1001260 o 1200 Ni120 30 40 00 09 cuar 100 Pt 385 2000 1 Resolution is 0 003 C 2 Applies for COMP OFF to the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals and 2 wire and 4 wire compensation 3 Based on MINCO Application Aid No 18 1 21 5500A Operator Manual 1 22 1 24 DC Power Specification Summary Absolute Uncertainty 5 C of Watts output I Voltage Range 5500A Calibrator Current Range 3 3 to 8 999 mA 9 to 32 999 mA 33 to 89 99 mA 90 to 329 99 mA Voltage Range 0351008999 031921999A 22 44999 astoria oo o0 00 0 iyer a3mvtoro20v 008 os 02 90 aan owowa 1 To determine dc power uncertainty with more precision see the individual DC Voltage Specifications and DC Current Sp
174. 2 5 1000 0 0751 triangle 0 0018 1000 0 000154 triangle 0 0109 1000 0 000427 triangle 0 0449 1000 0 001447 triangle 0 109 1000 0 00337 triangle 0 449 1000 0 01357 triangle 1 09 1000 0 0328 triangle 2 5 1000 0 0751 5500A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 8 62 Leveled Sinewave Verification Amplitude Table 8 21 Leveled Sinewave Verification Amplitude Nominal Value V p p 0 005 0 0075 0 0099 0 01 0 025 0 039 0 04 0 07 0 099 0 1 0 25 0 399 0 4 0 8 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 5 Frequency 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz Measured Value V p p Deviation 1 Year Spec V p p V p p 21 00004 221 00005 0 000498 221 0005 221 00008 00000 221 0001 O ooo f 00017 000228 _________0 0023 __ 0003 O 000828 0008 O __________0 0163 o J 0023 21 00263 ___________0 0683 __ 1 8 63 Leveled Sinewave Verification Frequency Table 8 22 Leveled Sinewave Verification Frequency Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Value Hz Hz Hz 55 50 kHz 0 125 5 5 500 kHz 1 25 55 5 MHz 125 55 50 MHz 125 55 500 MHz 1250 8 45 5500A Operator Manual 8 46 Harmonic 2nd harmonic 3rd harmonic
175. 2 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port 5 7 488 Remote Message Coding sese eee 5 8 Status Register Overview sees eee 5 9 Status Byte and SRE Bit Definitions essen nennen 5 11 Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCEs and 58 8 7 1 Accessing the FUSE a ous eb deae rb CT PERRA ERE Rte dis STR S 7 2 Accessing the Air ener enne xii LA rl LL LE S bed Jl bed ael eret 1 Q9 HA a rn en NO S c DA Ax DX pacco co SO I QN eeu Oo 1 Introduction and Specifications Contents Etro Te T How to Contact Fluke eese eene Operation Overview esses ennemis Local Operation aee rere ette Hose eo IER Sie Heo s Remote Operation RS 232 sss Remote Operation 488 Where To Gro from Here seed niet ierit Instruction Manuals sese ee eee ee eee 55004 Operator Manual esses 55004 Operator Reference Guide sees 5500A Remote Programming Reference 5500A Service
176. 200 1 3V 50 kHz 26 200 2 0 V 50 kHz 40 200 5 5 V 50 kHz 110 200 8 120 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Flatness Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p Deviation mV 1 Year Spec mV 5 0 mV 500 kHz 0 17 5 0 mV 1 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 1 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 2 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 5 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 10 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 20 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 50 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 100 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 125 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 160 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 200 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 220 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 235 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 250 MHz 0 20 10 0 mV 500 kHz 0 25 10 0 mV 1 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 1 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 2 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 5 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 10 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 20 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 50 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 100 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 125 MHz 0 30 8 92 5500A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Flatness cont Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p Deviation mV 1 Year Spec mV 10 0 mV 160 MHz 0 30 10 0 mV 200 MHz 0 30 10 0 mV 220 MHz 0 30 10 0 mV 235 MHz 0 30 10 0 mV 250 MHz 0 30 40 0 mV 500 kHz 0 70 40 0 mV 1 MHz 0 70 40 0 m
177. 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register query Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register Response value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example ISCR1 returns 4108 Return decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 if bits 12 SETTLED 3 IBOOST and 2 VBOOST are set to 1 Summary of Commands and Queries Remote Commands 6 ISR IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status Register query Returns contents of the Instrument Status Register Response Example lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 ISR returns 4108 Return decimal 4108 if bits 12 SETTLED 3 BOOST and 2 VBOOST set to 1 LIMIT Limit command Set the maximum permissible output magnitude negative and positive for voltage and current which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands Both negative and positive values must be entered Once set the 5500A Calibrator retains the limit settings until either another limit is entered or the FORMAT SETUP command resets the limits and all other defaults to the facto
178. 2609 5 mA excep sway 15 00 15 20 mA for i020 i oor s oo 39 45 to 65 Hz ZA except 340 to 1020 V 6 mA for 45 to 65 Hz General Specifications Introduction and Specifications AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications cont Range 100 to 1020 V 100 to 750 V 10 to 329 999 mV 0 33 to 3 29999 V Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C Maxi Frequency of output uV Resolution Burden M 90 days 5725A Amplifier __ 006 i mv 009 100 44 Auxiliary Output dual output mode only 2 tav 5m leso loos 5mA 5 to 10 kHz o3 1400 04 0 1 Remote sensing is not provided Output resistance is lt 5 for outputs gt 0 33 V The AUX output resistance is lt 1 The maximum load ca pacitance is 500 pF subject to the maximum burden current limits 2 There are two channels of voltage output The maximum frequency of the dual output is 10 kHz 1 5500A Operator Manual AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications cont Maximum Distortion and Noise Range Frequency 10 Hz to 5 MHz Bandwidth output uV 33 to 32 9999 V 33 to 329 999 V 5725A Amplifier 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 07 96 100 to 1020 V 1 to 20 kHz 0 15 96 20 to 30 kHz 0 3 96 30 to 100 kHz 0 4 Auxiliary Output dual output mode only 10 Hz to 100 kHz Bandwidth 10 to 20 Hz 0 2 200 20 to 45 Hz 0 06 200 10 to 329 999 mV
179. 44 8 62 Leveled Sinewave Verification Amplitude sees eee eee 8 45 8 63 Leveled Sinewave Verification Frequency 8 45 8 64 Leveled Sinewave Verification 8 46 8 65 Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness esses 8 47 8 66 Edge Verification Amplitude sse 8 53 8 67 Edge Verification Frequency eese 8 53 8 68 Edge Verification Duty Cycle sse 8 53 8 69 Edge Verification Rise 8 54 8 70 Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification sess 8 54 8 71 Marker Generator Verification eee eee eee 8 55 8 72 Pulse Generator Verification 8 55 8 73 Pulse Generator Verification Pulse Width sss 8 55 8 74 Input Impedance Verification 8 56 8 75 Input Impedance Verification Capacitance 8 56 GoanhtlecidengIm 8 76 Ue ease 8 8 77 Oscilloscope Calibration Option 8 8 78 Volt Function Specifications sese 8 60 8 79 Edge Function Specifications sse 8 61 8 80 Leveled Sine Wave Function
180. 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 08 200 1 to 5 kHz 0 3 200 5 to 10 kHz 0 6 200 10 to 20 Hz 0 2 200 20 to 45 Hz 0 06 200 0 33 to 3 29999 V 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 08 200 1 to 5 kHz 0 3 200 5 to 10 kHz 0 6 200 Introduction and Specifications 1 General Specifications 1 20 AC Current Sine Wave Specifications Absolute Uncertainty 5 C Compliance Max Range Frequency of output Resolution Voltage Inductive Load aane 009 015 0 125 0 15 0 029 to 0 32999 45 1kHz 0 09 025 0 125 025 001 30Vrms 1 uH 0 33 to 3 2999 mA 0 01 uA 3 0V rms 1 uH _5 045 06 03 10 to 20 Hz 2 20 to 45 Hz 3 310 32 999 5 Hz to 1 kHz 009 30Vrms 500 Hz to 10 to 20 Hz 20 to 45 Hz 33 to 329 99 45 Hz to 1 kHz nO 110 5 kHz 5 uH 500 Hz to 10 to 45 Hz 45 Hz to 1 kHz s 0 33 to 2 19999 10 uA 3 0 to H 2 0 V rms 2 5 uH 1 to 5 kHz He dg 5 kHz 0 7 4510 65 Hz 0 05 200 65 to 500 Hz 45 to 65 Hz 2 210 11A 100 uA 500 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 5500A Operator Manual AC Current Sine Wave Specifications cont Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C li Max Range Frequency of output uA Resolution Voltage Inductive 90 days Load 5725A Amplifier 5to11A 100 1 The actual voltage compliance Vc is a function of current output lo and is given by the formula Vc 3 37 lo 3 11 The highe
181. 500A Calibrator current and directing it to the 5725A Amplifier with any 5500A voltage Enter the desired current and voltage Select boost with the I OUT softkey Verify source preference is 5500 Verify the annunciator is off The 5500A current appears on the 5725A CURRENT OUTPUT terminals The 5500A voltage appears on the 5500A front panel NORMAL terminals 5725A Amplifier Output A A Warning Boosted voltage operation produces high voltage at higher current levels than normally available from the calibrator During boosted voltage operation the potential risk of injury or fatal accident is greater than during normal operation Note Refer to the 5725A Instruction Manual for setup and installation instructions Proceed as follows to set a boosted output from the 5725A Amplifier 1 2 2 Press to clear any output from the 5500 Install the 5725A as described in the 5725A Instruction Manual Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Note that for boosted current you connect to the 5725A front panel terminals for boosted voltage you connect to the 5500A front panel NORMAL terminals Front Panel Operation Editing and Error Output Settings 4 4 Set the UUT to measure the output on the desired range Set the calibrator source preference to 5725 press the front panel key softkey INSTMT SETUP softkey OUTPUT SETUP softkey SOURCE PREFRNCE to selec
182. 500A Service Manual and the Module Exchange Program Refer to the Fluke catalog or contact a Technical Service Center representative for the module exchange procedure Preparing for Operation 2 Placement and Rack Mounting 2 7 Placement and Rack Mounting You may place the calibrator on a bench top or mount it in a standard width 24 inch 61 cm deep equipment rack For bench top use the calibrator is equipped with non slipping non marring feet To mount the calibrator in an equipment rack use the 5500A Rack Mount Kit Model Y5537 Instructions for rack mounting the calibrator are packed with the rack mount kit Cooling Considerations AA Warning To avoid risk of injury never operate or power the 5500A Calibrator without the fan filter in place A Caution Damage caused by overheating may occur if the area around the air intake is restricted the intake air is too warm or the air filter becomes clogged Baffles direct cooling air from the fan throughout the chassis to internally dissipate heat during operation The accuracy and dependability of all internal parts of the calibrator are enhanced by maintaining the coolest possible internal temperature You can lengthen the life of the calibrator and enhance its performance by observing the following rules e The area around the air filter must be at least 3 inches from nearby walls or rack enclosures e The exhaust perforations on the sides of the calibrator must be clear
183. 5500A Calibrator is powered and in the reset condition if in doubt press 5 0 key then click the Commandl button below Remote Operation 5 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control F5 0h bmp 5 Observe the 5500A Calibrator Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL below REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local 2 2 5 5 6 Click the Command2 button Observe the 5500A Calibrator Control Display changes back to the reset condition below The Command3 button is used for RS 232 UUT port testing later in this chapter 330 mV auta Al 2 25 2 l4 7 Close the program by clicking the top left corner and Close gl42f eps 5 10 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control 5 11 The SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial data port connects a UUT to a PC or terminal via the 5500A Calibrator Figures 5 1 and 5 2 This pass through configuration eliminates the requirement for two COM ports at the PC or Terminal The UUT_ commands see Chapter 6 handle the UUT port data flow The RS 232 cable length for each port should not exceed 15 meters although longer cable lengths are permitted if the load capacitance measured at a connection point including signal terminator does not exceed 2500 pF RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure Complete the following procedure to set up the SERIAL 2 TO UUT port defaults in bold The RS 232 parameters you ar
184. 7 Menu Tree 3 12 Modem Cables 94 MORE OPTIONS menu 8 23 8 75 MULT remote command Multiplier Keys 3 7 MULTIPLY 3 7 Multiply Using Multiply and Divide 4 50 N NEW REF 3 6 NEWREF remote command 6 25 Null Modem Cables 9 4 NUMERIC keys 3 8 OLDREF remote command ONTIME remote command OPC remote command OPC remote command 6 26 OPER remote command Operate and standby modes 4 8 OPER remote command Operating State Transistions Local State 5 21 Local with Lockout State 5 21 Remote State 5 21 Operating State Transitions Remote with Lockout State 5 21 Operation Overview 1 4 OPR key 3 5 Measuring Thermocouple Temperatures OPT remote command Options and Accessories 9 3 Options and Accessories Chapter 8 9 3 Oscilloscope Calibration Adjusting Output Signal 8 14 8 66 Amplitude 8 16 B 18 8 69 8 71 Commands and Queries 8 34 8 83 Edge Function 8 19 8 72 Frequency Response 8 21 8 24 74 8 78 Frequency Sweep 8 24 8 77 Horizontal Time Base 8 26 8 80 Introduction 8 5 Leveled Sine Wave Function 8 21 74 Marker Function 8 26 8 80 MORE OPTIONS menu 8 23 8 75 Oscilloscope Connection 8 13 8 65 Pulse Response 8 19 8 20 8 21 8 72 8 73 Resetting Parameters 8 15 8 68 Starting 8 13 8 66 Testing the Trigger 8 28 8 82 8 26 8 80 Time Marker TIm
185. 8 120 nF 1 kHz 0 44 300 nF 1 kHz 0 29 330 nF 100 Hz 0 49 1 09 uF 100 Hz 0 28 1 2 uF 100 Hz 0 51 3 uF 100 Hz 0 36 3 3 uF 100 Hz 0 56 10 9 uF 100 Hz 0 35 12 uF 100 Hz 0 55 30 uF 100 Hz 0 40 33 uF 100 Hz 0 68 109 uF 100 Hz 0 47 120 uF 100 Hz 0 75 300 uF 100 Hz 0 60 330 uF 50 Hz 1 09 1 1 mF 50 Hz 1 03 Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check 7 16 Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy The Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy test checks the internal temperature reference To perform this test measure a lag bath temperature within 5 C of the 5500 Set the 5500A to Internal Reference J thermocouple type See Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple in Chapter 4 Make connections with J type thermocouple wire Nominal Value C 5500A Reads C Deviation C 90 Day Spec C Lag bath temp 0 1 7 17 Thermocouple Sourcing Accuracy The Thermocouple Sourcing Accuracy test checks the accuracy of the thermocouple sourcing circuitry For this test measure the dc output at the 5500A front panel TC connector with a dc meter observe polarity on the TC connector Select External Reference and the linear output 104 as the thermocouple type See Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple in Chapter 4 Nominal Value C Equivalent Value Measured Value Deviation 90 Day Spec m
186. 8 m AUR terminals SUX auta aux auta boost lacked e OUTPUT Output Location Selects the current output terminals from the 55004 Calibrator aux and 5725A Amplifier boost If an external 5725A Amplifier is not connected the OUTPUT softkey label will not appear in the display Range Operating Range Selects autorange auto or lock locked for the present range When auto the default setting is selected the calibrator automatically selects the range that provides the best output resolution When locked is selected the calibrator will not change ranges when you are editing the output The locked selection is usually made when you do not want range changes that may cause a small perturbation in the output e g when checking the linearity of a given multimeter range 4 24 Setting AC Current Output Complete the following procedure to set an ac current output at the 5500A front panel AUX terminals or 5725A Amplifier BOOST terminals if a 5725 is connected If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 3 Setthe UUT to measure ac current on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output maximum six numeric keys For example 123 456 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example
187. A SERIAL 2 TO UUT UUT serial port DB 9 943738 5500A SERIAL 2 TO UUT UUT serial port DB 25 TRANSMIT DATA Tx DTE READY DTR RECEIVED DATA Rx GROUND REQUEST SEND RTS CLEAR TO SEND CTS Fe 02 eps Figure C 2 SERIAL 1 FROM HOST Port Connector Pinout TRANSMIT DATA Tx RECEIVED DATA Rx GROUND RECEIVED LINE SIGNAL DETECTOR 8150 2996415 00 OQ Q CLEAR TO SEND CTS X DCE READY DSR REQUEST TO SEND RTS C 2 Fe 03 eps Figure C 3 SERIAL 2 TO UUT Port Connector Pinout connection side Appendices C RS 232 IEEE 488 Cables and Connectors NULL MODEM CABLE SERIAL 1 FROM HOST SERIAL 2 MODEM CABLE TO UUT RLSD Rx Fe 04 eps Figure C 4 Serial Port Connections DB 9 DB 9 5500A Operator Manual SERIAL 1 FROM HOST n NULL MODEM CABLE SERIAL 2 TO UUT RLSD Rx Tx MODEM CABLE Figure C 5 Serial Port Connections DB 9 DB 25 Fe 05 eps Appendix D Creating a Visual Basic Test Program Creating a Visual Basic Test Program The following procedure creates a test program in Visual Basic that you may use to test 5500A Calibrator RS 232 Host port and RS 232 UUT port operation This program is referenced i
188. Calibration tcal 15 C to 35 C Storage 20 C to 70 C Temperature Coefficient Temperature Coefficient for temperatures outside tcal 5 C is 0 1X C of the 90 day specification or 1 year as applicable per C Relative Humidity Operating 80 96 to 30 C 70 to 40 C 40 to 50 C Storage 95 non condensing Altitude s Operating 3 050 m 10 000 ft maximum Non operating 12 200 m 40 000 ft maximum Safety Complies with IEC 1010 1 1992 1 ANSI ISA S82 01 1994 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 Analog Low Isolation 20V EMC Designed to comply with FCC Rules Part 15 VFG 243 1991 If used in areas with Electromagnetic fields of 1 to 3 V m resistance outputs have a floor adder of 0 508 Q Performance not specified above 3 V m This instrument may be susceptible to electro static discharge ESD from direct contact to the binding posts Good static aware practices should be followed when handling this and other pieces of electronic equipment Line Power e Line Voltage selectable 100 V 120 V 220 V 240 V Line Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz Line Voltage Variation 10 about line voltage setting Power Consumption 5500A Calibrator 300 VA 5725A Amplifier 750 VA Dimensions 5500A Calibrator Height 17 8 cm 7 in standard rack increment plus 1 5 cm 0 6 in for feet on bottom of unit e Width 43 2 cm 17 in standard rack width
189. Calibrator does not respond to the INPUT statement from the controller The Message Available MAV bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte is 1 if there is something in the output queue and 0 if the output queue is empty 5 57 Remote Operation 5 Remote Program Examples Error Queue When a command error execution error or device dependent error occurs its error code is placed in the error queue where it can be read by the ERR command See Appendix F for a list of error messages A way to decode an error code is to send the command EXPLAIN which returns a description of a error code Reading the first error with the ERR command removes that error from the queue A response of 0 means the error queue is empty The Error Available EAV bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte indicates whether the queue is empty The error queue is cleared when you turn off the power and when you use the CLS Clear Status common command The error queue contains up to 16 entries If many errors occur only the first 15 errors are kept in the queue A 16th entry in the queue is always an error queue overflow error and all later errors are discarded until the queue is at least partially read The first errors are kept because if many errors occur before the user can acknowledge and read them the earliest errors are the most likely to point to the problem The later errors are usually repetitions or consequences of the original problem 5 58
190. Control Displays appears as follows with VOLT mode selected Output SCOPE TRIG V DIV MODE 1 MQ DC AC off MENU volt The location of the output signal is indicated on the Control Display the display the right side If your Calibrator is connected but the output does not appear on the oscilloscope you may have the Calibrator in standby mode The settings for the output signal are indicated in the Output Display the display on the left side If STBY is displayed press the key The Output Display will show OPR and the output should appear on the oscilloscope 8 20 Adjusting the Output Signal The Calibrator provides several ways to change the settings for the output signal during calibration Since oscilloscope calibration requires many adjustments of the output signal the three available methods for changing these settings for oscilloscope calibration are summarized below These methods provide the means of jumping to a new value or sweeping through a range of values 8 21 Keying Value The following example is for use the LEVSINE mode To key a specific value directly into the Calibrator from its front panel 1 Key in the value you want to enter including the units and prefixes For example to enter 120 mV press 1 2 0 Pm y The Control Display will show 120 A 2 2 5 Note Units and prefixes printed in red in the upper lef
191. D for temperature measurements The 5500A Calibrator simulates the RTD temperature as a resistance output on the NORMAL terminals and simulates the thermocouple temperature as a dc voltage output on the TC terminals If the temperature sensor type is changed the temperature output is reset to 0 degrees C Once set the 5500A Calibrator retains the temperature sensor type until power off or reset Parameters TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance Temperature Detector Example ISENS TYPE RTD Set the temperature sensor type to an RTD TSENS TYPE X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Temperature Sensor Type query Return the temperature sensor type thermocouple TC or Resistance Temperature Detector RTD for temperature measurements Responses TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance Temperature Detector Example TYPE returns TC Return TC when the temperature sensor type is a thermocouple 6 43 5500A Operator Manual 6 44 TST X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Self Test command Initiate self test and return a 0 for pass or a 1 for fail If any faults are detected they are displayed on screen terminal mode or are logged into the fault queue where they can be read by the ERR query computer mode Response 0 pass self test 1 fail s
192. Deviation 1 Spec Value V s s Value s s 4 0 9 296 n 4 0 9 205 22m 4 0 9 204 225 4 0 8 2083 4 8 55 5500A Operator Manual 8 74 Input Impedance Verification Resistance Table 8 33 Input Impedance Verification Resistance Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec 0 04 0 05 60 0 06 600 1000 1500 8 75 Input Impedance Verification Capacitance Table 8 34 Input Impedance Verification Capacitance Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value pF Value pF pF pF 5 pF 0 75 29pF 1 95 49 2 95 8 56 8 86 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 5500A SC300 Option Contents Page INFO CUCHOM n E E ines Oscilloscope Calibration Option Volt Function Specifications sese Edge Function eee Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications esses Time Marker Function Specifications Wave Generator Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function Oscilloscope Connections eese Starting the Oscilloscope Calibration
193. E sinewave TRI trianglewave SQUARE squarewave TRUNCS truncated sinewave or NONE waveform does not apply Parameter Example 1st waveform 2nd waveform WAVE SI N SINE TRI SQUARE TRUNCS NONE SINE TRI SQUARE TRUNCS NONE Set the waveforms for a dual output to Sinewave on the primary output 55004 Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals and Squarewave on the secondary output front panel AUX terminals WAVE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Waveform query Return the waveform types for ac outputs Waveform choices are SINE sinewave TRI trianglewave SQUARE squarewave TRUNCS truncated sinewave or NONE waveform does not apply Responses Example Return SQUARI terminals is a squarewave and NONI 1st waveform 2nd waveform WAVE returns SQUAR panel AUX terminals SINE TRI SQUARE TRUNCS NONE SINE TRI SQUARE TRUNCS NONE E NONE E when the ac primary output 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL E when there is no secondary output on the front ZCOMP X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Impedance Compensation command Activate or deactivate 2 wire or 4 wire impedance compensa
194. E 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped X Coupled Current Post command Select the active 5725A Amplifier 5500 Calibrator front panel binding posts terminals for current output This also applies to power outputs The current post setting is retained until the 5500 Calibrator power is turned off or the 5500A Calibrator button is pressed If the current output can only be sourced by the 5725A Amplifier for example 2 A at 10 kHz the parameter AUX will return an error Value not available Parameters AUX selects the 5500A Calibrator AUX terminals BOOST selects the 5725A Amplifier terminals Example CUR POST AUX Select the 5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals for the output current CUR POST X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Current Post query Return the active front panel binding post terminals 5725A Amplifier BOOST or 5500A Calibrator AUX used for current output Responses AUX 5500A Calibrator AUX terminals are selected BOOST 5725A Amplifier BOOST terminals are selected Example CUR_POST returns AUX Return AUX when the 5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals are selected for output current Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries DC OFFSET X 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped X Coupled DC Voltage Offse
195. ET Wave ime 0 Cim Y 1 Press the softkey WAVE to select the desired waveform sinewaves sine trianglewaves tri squarewaves square or truncated sinewave truncs 2 Press the softkey OFFSET opening the offset entry display Enter the desired offset using the numeric keys and decimal point key For example 0 123 V below Hb OGG V 5 123 3 Press the key to enter the offset and then Front Panel Operation 4 Using the 5725A Amplifier 4 44 Using the 5725A Amplifier The 5725A Amplifier increases the current and voltage bandwidth and drive capability of the 5500A Calibrator The 5725A Amplifier has separate voltage boost and current boost amplifiers however only one boost function can be used at any one time When operated in dual output modes such as ac power the 5725A Amplifier can supply one output while the 5500A Calibrator supplies the other output In the voltage boost mode the 5725A output appears on the 5500A Calibrator NORMAL terminals In the current boost mode the 5725A output appears on the 5725A CURRENT OUTPUT terminals You can also redirect 5500A current to the 5725A output terminals 0 2 2 dc and 300 uA 2 2 ac The Output Display on 5500A always shows the actual output of the amplifier not the excitation output of the 5500A Rules of Operation Whenever the 5500A Calibrator front panel key annunciator is on either the 5725A voltage boost amplifier or current b
196. F 1 Connect the Fluke 51 Thermometer to the calibrator using the appropriate connection cable Figure 4 19 The connection cable and miniconnector material must match the thermocouple type For example if testing a K thermocouple the cable and miniconnector are for a K thermocouple FLUKE 55004 CALIBRATOR A 0 SENSE AUX V NORMAL AUX H Connection wiring must match thermocouple type J etc 14 19 Figure 4 19 Cable Connections for Testing 50 Series Thermometer 2 Verify that the EARTH indicator is on if not press as necessary Set up the calibrator by pressing 0 enter Ensure the softkey labeled OUTPUT indicates tc If not press the OUTPUT softkey until it does 4 Select the thermocouple type and reference source by pressing the TC MENUS softkey Ensure the REF SRC softkey selection indicates intrnl If not press the REF SRC softkey Ensure the TYPE softkey indicates either J or K depending on which one the 51 is set to Continue to press the TYPE softkey until the selected thermocouple type is displayed 5 Enter the calibrator settings listed in Table 4 7 and verify performance is within specifications see Section 1 4 62 Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications Table 4 7 Thermocouple Performance Thermocouple 5500A Display Readings Type 1 Setting D gises K 182 0 C 182 0 0 9
197. FLUKE 5500A Multi Product Calibrator Operator Manual December 1994 Rev 11 7 06 1994 2006 Fluke Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A All product names are trademarks of their respective companies LIMITED WARRANTY amp LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment Parts product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller and does not apply to fuses disposable batteries to any product which in Fluke s opinion has been misused altered neglected or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non defective media Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke Warranty support is available if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price Fluke reserves the right to invoice B
198. Fluke garantit que le logiciel fonctionnera en grande partie conform ment ses sp cifications fonctionnelles pour une p riode de 90 jours et qu il a t correctement enregistr sur des supports non d fectueux Fluke ne garantit pas que le logiciel ne contient pas d erreurs ou qu il fonctionne sans interruption Les distributeurs agr s par Fluke appliqueront cette garantie des produits vendus leurs clients neufs et qui n ont pas servi mais ne sont pas autoris s appliquer une garantie plus tendue ou diff rente au nom de Fluke Le support de garantie est offert si le produit a t acquis par l interm diaire d un point de vente agr par Fluke ou bien si l acheteur a pay le prix international applicable Fluke se r serve le droit de facturer l acheteur les frais d importation des pi ces de r paration ou de remplacement si le produit achet dans un pays a t exp di dans un autre pays pour y tre r par L obligation de garantie de Fluke est limit e au choix de Fluke au remboursement du prix d achat ou la r paration remplacement gratuit d un produit d fectueux retourn dans le d lai de garantie un centre de service agr par Fluke Pour avoir recours au service de la garantie mettez vous en rapport avec le centre de service Fluke le plus proche ou envoyez le produit accompagn d une description du probl me port et assurance pay s franco lieu de destination au centre de service agr par
199. Frequency function a Press on the calibrator set the DMM function switch to and press on the DMM b Set the calibrator to 150 mV at 19 0 kHz and press opr Verify the error is within specification c Set the calibrator to 150 mV at 190 kHz Hint press twice to move the cursor to the frequency reading in the output display and press Y Verify the error is within specification 7 Test Frequency Sensitivity and Trigger Levels Press on the calibrator set the DMM function switch to and press on the DMM to choose the frequency mode Set the calibrator to 300 mV at 1 kHz and press opr Verify the frequency error is within specification Change the calibrator output to 1 7 V Verify the frequency error is within specification Change the calibrator output to 1 0 V Verify that the DMM displays 000 0 frequency Change the DMM range to 40 V by pressing RANGE Change the calibrator output to 6 0 V Verify the frequency error is within specification Change the calibrator output to 2 0 V Verify that the DMM displays 000 0 frequency Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications 8 Test the Ohms function as follows Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to gt b Set the calibrator to 190 0 Q with 2 wire compensation see Figure 4 2 Press opr Verify the error is within specifications c Repeat the previous step for 19 00 kQ 1 900 MQ and 19 00 MQ Verify the errors a
200. GES OR LOSSES INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA WHETHER ARISING FROM BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BASED ON CONTRACT TORT RELIANCE OR ANY OTHER THEORY Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B V P O Box 9090 P O Box 1186 Everett WA 98206 9090 5602 BD Eindhoven U S A The Netherlands 5 94 LIMITE DE GARANTIE ET LIMITE DE RESPONSABILITE La soci t garantit l absence de vices des mat riaux et la fabrication de ce produit dans des conditions normales d utilisation et d entretien La p riode de garantie est de un an et prend effet la date d exp dition Les pi ces les r parations de produit et les services sont garantis pour un p riode de 90 jours Cette garantie ne s applique qu l acheteur d origine ou l utilisateur final s il est client d un distributeur agr par Fluke et ne s applique pas aux fusibles aux batteries piles interchangeables ni aucun produit qui de l avis de Fluke a t malmen modifi n glig ou endommag par accident ou soumis des conditions anormales d utilisation et de manipulation
201. GPIB test failed 700 DDE R Saving to NV memory failed 701 DDE R NV memory invalid 702 DDE NV invalid so default loaded 703 DDE NV obsolete so default loaded 800 DDE FR Serial parity error s 55 is serial port 801 DDE FR Serial framing error s s is serial port 802 DDE FR Serial overrun error s s is serial port 803 DDE FR Serial characters dropped s s is serial port 900 DDE FR Report timeout aborted 1000 DDE FR Sequence failed during diag 1001 DDE FR Guard xing link diag fail 1002 DDE FR Inguard bus r w diag fail 1003 DDE FR A6 A D comm fault 1004 DDE FR A6 A D or DAC fault 1005 DDE FR A6 DAC fine channel fault 1006 through 1090 Error messages for self diagnostics Refer to Chapter 4 of the 5500A Service Manual for the message and a description of the possible cause 1200 DDE FR Sequence name too long 1201 DDE FR Sequence RAM table full 1202 DDE FR Sequence name table full 1300 CME R Bad syntax 1301 CME R Unknown command 1302 CME R Bad parameter count 1303 CME R Bad keyword 1304 CME R Bad parameter type 1305 CME R Bad parameter unit 1306 EXE R Bad parameter value 1307 QYE R 488 2 I O deadlock 1308 QYE R 488 2 interrupted query 1309 QYE R 488 2 unterminated command 1310 QYE R 488 2 query after indefinite response 1311 DDE R Invalid from GPIB interface 1312 DDE R Invalid from serial i
202. Generator Specifications Table 8 5 Wave Generator Specifications Square Wave Sine Wave and Triangle Wave into 1 MQ into 50 Q into 50 or 1 MQ 1 8 mV to 55 V p p 1 8 mV to 2 5 V p p 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 10 Hz to 10 kHz 396 of p p output 100 uV Sequence Typical DC Offset Range 1 2 5 e g 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV 0 to 24096 of p p amplitude 1 Frequency Range 10 Hz to 100 kHz Resolution 4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C t 25 ppm 15 mHz 1 The DC offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms 8 9 5500A Operator Manual 8 8 Pulse Generator Specifications Table 8 6 Pulse Generator Specifications Pulse Generator Characteristics Positive pulse into 50 Typical rise fall times 1 ns Available Amplitudes 2 5 V 1 V 250 mV 100 mV 25 mV 10 mV Range 4 ns to 500 ns Pulse Period 4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency and width 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty at Cardinal 2 5 ppm Points tcal 5 C 1 Pulse width not to exceed 40 of period 2 Pulse width uncertainties for periods below 2 ms are not specified 5500A SC600 Option 8 SC600 Option Specifications 8 9 Trigger Signal Specifications Pulse Function Table 8 7 Trigger Signal Specifications Pulse Function 2 Division Ratio 1 Amplitude into 50 p p Typical Ris
203. Hiermit wird bescheinigt daB die Fluke Model 5500A in Ubereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der BMPT AmtsbIVfg 243 1991 funk entst rt sind Der vorschriftsmaBige Betrieb mancher Ger te z B Mef3sender kann allerdings gewissen Einschr nkungen unterliegen Beachten Sie deshalb die Hinweise in der Bedienungsanleitung Dem Bundesamt f r Zulassungen in der Telecommunikation wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerates angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur berpr fung der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen einger umt Fluke Corporation SAFETY TERMS IN THIS MANUAL This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC publication 1010 1 1992 1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Measuring Control and Laboratory Equipment and ANSI ISA 582 01 1994 and CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 This User Manual contains information warning and cautions that must be followed to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition Use of this equipment in a manner not specified herein may impair the protection provided by the equipment This instrument is designed for IEC 1010 1 Installation Category II use It is not designed for connection to circuits rated over 4800 VA WARNING statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or loss of life CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to equipment SYMBOLS MARKED ON EQUIPMENT AN WARNING Risk of el
204. Hz 4 650 200 mv 10 mV 10 kHz 4 800 __ 95Hz 5 550 200 mv 300mv __ 10Hz 0 273 __ 45Hz 0 203 200 mv 300 mV 1 kHz 0 203 200 mv __ __ 5kkz 0 300 200 mv 300mv 10 kHz 0 450 300 9 5 Hz 5 550 3V 10Hz 0 165 3V 45 Hz 0 085 200 mv 3V 1 2 0 085 5 kHz 0 197 300 10kHz _ 0 347 Note The verification tests below are optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect 1000 V 10 mV 45Hz _ 3 780 1000 100 KHz _ 0 450 500V 100mV ___ 5kHz 0 600 250V 1V 10kHz 0 440 5500A Operator Manual 7 14 7 14 AC Current Amplitude Accuracy The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of ac current at the 5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals Nominal Value A Frequency Hz Measured Value A Deviation 33 uA 1 kHz 329 mA 1 kHz 90 Day Spec 0 848 1 395 0 169 0 222 1 019 0 236 0 136 0 166 0 346 0 986 0 171 0 241 0 096 0 466 0 159 0 089 0 089 0 159 0 459 0 161 0 241 0 086 0 466 0 159 0 079 0 079 0 159 0 459 0 161 0 241 0 086 0 466 0 159 0 080 0 08
205. I characters EOF 012 000 EFF 512 EOF End of File ASCII characters are entered with a range of 000 to 255 first character and 000 to 255 second character The factory defaults are 012 000 where the FF form feed character signals an advance to the next page and the NULL ignore character holds position When the NULL character is 000 then effectively the EOF is only the FF character or L for the factory F3 04d eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees GFIB PORT ADDRESS 4 O i DOWN P Up i D to 20 GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus selects the port address when using the IEEE 488 bus The factory default is 4 DISPLAY i DISPLAY BET GHTHE ZS i CONTRAST to R to Q DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS and DISPLAY CONTRAST apply to both the Output Display and Control Display pd Just po 015 PLAY DISPLAY Contrast i Q A E 5 GG levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 There are eight levels of contrast 0 to 7 for the Output Display and Control Display Each may have its own level of contrast The factory defaults are 7 and 7 pd Just UIS PLAY DISPLAY R Bright aa a levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 There are eight levels of brightness 0 to 7 for the Output Display and Control Display Each may have it
206. INT 06 ESR ASK FOR THE ESR CONTENTS 30 INPUT 86 RETRIEVE HE REGISTER CONTENTS 40 PRINT 06 ESE ASK FOR THE ESE CONTENTS 50 INPUT 086 B RETRIEVE HE REGISTER CONTENTS 60 PRINT ESR A DISPLAY THE ESR REGISTER CONTENTS VALUE 70 PRINT ESE B DISPLAY THE ESE REGISTER CONTENTS VALUE 80 END Convert the contents of variables A and B into binary and you can read the status of the registers For example if A is 32 its binary equivalent is 00000000 00100000 Therefore bit 5 CME in the ESR is set 1 and the rest of the bits are reset 0 This means that the calibrator tried to execute an incorrectly formed command 5 39 5500A Operator Manual 5 40 5 51 5 52 5 5 5 54 By setting the bits in the ESE you can mask disable the associated bits in the ESR For example to prevent the occurrence of a command error from causing bit 5 ESB in the serial poll status byte to go to 1 you can reset to 0 bit 5 in the ESE register The following sample program accomplishes this by checking the status of the CME bit then toggling it if it is 1 10 THIS P
207. If an error is encountered check the typing or consult the National Instruments manual regarding Win32 Interactive control The count message is the amount of characters sent over the bus Copy g ALL right Type help for help or q to quit ibdev 4 sendb 82 69 77 88 11 13 9 Verify that the UUT is in remote 10 From the prompt type a then press the ENTER RETURN key 5 20 Remote Operation 5 Changing between Remote and Local Operation 5 16 Changing between Remote and Local Operation In addition to local mode front panel operation and remote the 5500A Calibrator can be placed in a local lockout condition at any time by command of the controller Combined the local remote and lockout conditions yield four possible operating states described as follows 5 17 Local State The 5500A Calibrator responds to local and remote commands This is normal front panel operation All remote commands are allowed to execute 5 18 Local with Lockout State Local with lockout is identical to local except the 5500A Calibrator will go into the remote with lockout state instead of the remote state when it receives a remote command 5 19 Remote State When the 5500A Calibrator is placed in remote either via RS 232 REMOTE command or via IEEE 488 asserting the REN line it enters the remote state In the remote state the Output Display continues to display the output setting or measurement as in
208. M returns 1 40135E 02 OHM 0E 00 0 0 00H 00 The respective values for the above examples are 15 2 V 188 3 mA 442 Hz 1 23 V 2 34 V 60 Hz 4 02 dBm 9 6 dBm 60 Hz 4 02 dBm 1 23 V 9 6 dBm 2 34 V 4 02 dBm 2 34 V 60 Hz 4 02 dBm 1 23 V 1 924 15 2 V 188 3 mA 442 Hz 25 86 dBm 188 3 mA 442 Hz 25 86 dBm 15 2 V 104 3 C Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries 219 74 F same value as 104 3 C in Fahrenheit 4 274 mV same value as 104 3 C for a K type thermocouple in volts 140 135 Q same value as 104 3 C for a pt385 RTD in ohms The primary and secondary units are V DBM A OHM F CEL FAR The units for the lt frequency value gt is always assumed to be Hz OUT ERR X IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Output Error query Return the UUT error and units computed by the 5500A Calibrator after shifting the output with the INCR command The return units are PPM parts per million PCT percent DB decibels or 0 if there is no error The UUT error is not computed when editing frequency Response lt value of error units Example OUT ERR returns 1 00000 01 Return 10 when the UUT is reading low by 10 PHASE X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Phase Difference command Set a phase differe
209. MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz S60MHz 390 MHz 400 MHz Measured Value V p p Deviation V p p na na na 1 Year Spec V p p a 55004 Operator Manual 8 52 Table 8 24 Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Value V p p 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Frequency 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz Measured Value V p p Deviation 1 Year Spec V p p V p p _________ 0 0521 00821 S 00821 O S 00821 O ooo S 00821 21 0051 1 0 051 ___________0 0681 ___________0 0681 048601 21 0148601 221 01860 221 01860 21 048601 1 048601 1 04860 ___ ________0 086 O 21 00826 1 04001 02200 02200 10201 10201
210. NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals Example LOWS TIED Tie the front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals together LOWS X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Low Potential Output Terminals query Return whether or not the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal are internally tied together default or are open Response OPEN disconnected NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals TIED connected NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals Example LOWS returns OPEN Return OPEN when the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are not tied together Remote Commands Summary of Commands and Queries 6 MULT Multiply command Multiply the reference magnitude as selected with the EDIT IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled command or default to the primary output The reference magnitude is the present reference in either direct mode or in error mode Parameter Example value multiplier expressed as a floating point number MULT 2 5 Multiply the existing reference by 2 5 creating a new reference For example an existing reference of 1 V is multiplied to 2 5 V NEWREF X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled
211. OR ISCE1 CONTENTS 80 INPUT 86 E RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5500A 90 PRINT ISR A DISPLAY ISR 100 PRINT ISCRO B DISPLAY ISCRO 110 PRI ISCEO0 C DISPLAY ISCEO 100 PRINT ISCR1 D DISPLAY ISCRI1 110 PRI 1 E DISPLAY 5 1 120 END Convert the returned variables into binary and you can read the status of the instrument For example if a register contains 4 its binary equivalent is 00000000 00000100 Therefore bit 3 VBOOST is set 1 and the rest of the bits are reset 0 By setting the bits in an ISCE register you can mask disable the associated bits in the ISCR For example to cause an SRQ interrupt when the output has settled bit 12 SETTLED in the ISCEI register must be 1 The ISCB bit must also be enabled in the SRE The following sample program loads a decimal 1024 into the ISCE which sets bit 12 and resets the other bits 10 THIS PROGRAM LOADS 00010000 00000000 BINARY INTO THE ISCE 20 PRINT 86 ISCE 4096 LOAD DECIMAL 4096 INTO ISCE 30 PRINT 06 ISCE READ BACK ISCE VALUE 40 INPUT 06 po E pH 50 PRINT ISCE PRINT IT IT SHOULD BE 4096 60 END Output Queue The output queue is loaded whenever a query is processed and holds up to 800 characters The controller reads it with a statement such as a BASIC INPUT statement removing what it reads form the queue If the queue is empty the 5500A
212. OTE its 48 SETUP SETUP SETUP itz ipts amp 8 The list below describes submenus accessed by each softkey e TMP STD Temperature Standard Toggles the degree reference between the 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard ipts 68 and the 1990 International Temperature Standard its 90 factory default This setting is saved in the nonvolatile memory e OUTPUT SETUP Opens the Output Setup menu to select the source of the output signals 5500A or 5725A current and voltage output limits thermocouple type and RTD type e DISPLAY SETUP Opens submenus to set the brightness and contrast of both the Control Display and Output Display e REMOTE SETUP Allows you to change the configuration of the two RS 232 ports SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT and IEEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB See Chapter 5 Remote Operation for more information Selecting an External Amplifier When the 5500A Calibrator is operated in conjunction with the 5725A Amplifier you must select the 5500A or the 5725A as the preferred source of the output signals The SOURCE PREFRENCE Source Preference selection is applicable only whenever the 5500A or the 5725A can produce the output or overlap capability To select a source preference proceed as follows 1 Press the key to display the Setup Menu 2 Press the INSTMT SETUP softkey to open the Instrument Setup Menu 3 Press the OUTPUT SETUP softkey to display the SO
213. Press until the Tester is in the Text Screen mode Verify that the W KW VA KVA and VAR KVAR readings within the minimum and maximum limits specified in Table 4 4 Press until the Tester is in the Harmonics screen mode Verify that the fundamental frequency phase angle readings are between the minimum and maximum readings listed in Table 4 4 Repeat the previous three steps using the calibrator outputs and performance limits listed in Table 4 4 Press to remove the voltage from the Tester Testing Harmonics Volts Performance 1 6 2 3 4 5 Press until the harmonics screen is displayed on the Tester v Press until is displayed above the upper right corner of the harmonics display Press until A is displayed the top status line of the Tester Press until 420s is displayed in the top status line of the Tester Connect the calibrator NORMAL output to the V and COM connectors on the Tester Connect the calibrator AUX output to the Current Probe connector on the Tester Set the calibrator output to 7 0V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 700 mV at 60 Hz on the AUX output Press the WAVE MENUS softkey and ensure the phase angle is 10 0 degrees Press the HARMONIC MENU softkey and ensure the HARMONIC selection is set to 1 and the FUNDMTL selection is set to aux Press Move the Tester cursor to the corresponding harmonic number Verify that the harmonic amplitude and phase
214. Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 4 Cn e CE 10 Press to activate the calibrator output Several softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the ac voltage function depending on which waveform is selected DUTY OFFSET and WAVE DUTY OFFSET S ric qa re 1 0m to zine 4 DIGI specifications tri zgare truncs 4 20 Front Panel Operation Setting the Output DUTY Duty Cycle When the squarewave is selected DUTY appears allowing you to modify the duty cycle of the squarewave The range is 1 00 to 99 00 The default is 50 00 The duty cycle must be 50 00 if you want to enter an OFFSET see below OFFSET Voltage Offset Appears when the desired output is less than 33V sinewaves 65 V squarewaves or 93 V trianglewaves and truncated sinewaves This softkey allows you to add a positive or negative dc offset voltage to the ac output signal See Entering a DC Offset later in this chapter for more information When a voltage output is expressed in dBm voltage offset is not available You can enter an offset for a squarewave output only when the duty cycle is 50 00 see DUTY above WAVE Waveform Allows you to select one of four different types of waveforms sinewave trianglewave squarewave and truncated sinewave See Waveform Types later in this chapter
215. RED 140 RESUME 200 1 5500A SRQ handler 210 IF SPL 6 AND 8 THEN GOSUB 1300 If STB EAV call handler 220 Test other STB bits if desired here 299 RETURN 300 5500 STB EAV error handler 320 PRINT 46 ERR Read and clear error 330 INPUT 06 E ES Read in error and explanation 340 PRINT Error E ES Print error and explanation 350 IF E lt gt 0 THEN GOTO 1320 Until no more errors 1360 STOP Other commands for your app 1370 END 5 61 5 62 5 63 Remote Operation 5 Remote Program Examples Verifying a Meter on the IEEE 488 Bus This program selects 10 dc output verifies that the 5500 Calibrator is set to 10 V then triggers a Fluke 45 to take a reading It displays calibrator output Fluke 45 reading and the meter error in ppm The program assumes that the calibrator bus address is 4 and the Fluke 45 bus address is 1 10 REM THIS PROGRAM VERIFIES THE ACCURACY OF A FLUKE 45 AT 10V DC 20 INIT PORT 0 INITIALIZE THE INTERFACE 30 CLEAR PORT 0 pon 40 PRINT 1 VDC RATE 5 AUTO TRIGGER 2 SETS FLUKE 45 TO 10V DC 50 PRINT 1 OUT 10 V OPER SE HE 5500A TO 10V DC 60 PRINT 4 WAI OUT WAIT FOR SETTLE REQUEST THE OUTPUT VALUE 70 PRINT 4 V US F V2 U2 HE DATA FROM THE 5500A 80 PRINT 01
216. ROGRAM RESETS BIT 5 CME IN THE ESE 20 PRI 6 ESE 33 INITIAL ESE IS CME OPC 30 5 100 GET AND PRINT INITIAL ES 40 IF AND 32 THEN 32 CLEAR BIT 5 50 PRINT 6 ESE A LOAD ESE WITH NEW VALU 60 GOSUB 100 GET AND PRINT NEW ESE 70 END 100 PRI Q6 ESE ASK FOR ESE CONTENTS 110 INPUT Q6 A RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS 120 PRI ESE 130 RETURN Instrument Status Register ISR The Instrument Status Register ISR gives the controller access to the state of the 5500A Calibrator including some of the information presented to the operator on the Control Display and the display annunciators during local operation Instrument Status Change Registers There are two registers dedicated to monitoring changes in the ISR These are the ISCRO Instrument Status 1 0 Change Register and the ISCR1 Instrument Status 0 1 Change Register Each status change register has an associated mask register Each ISCR is cleared set to 0 when the 5500A Calibrator is turned on every time it is read and at each CLS Clear Status command Instrument Status Change Enable Registers The Instrument Status Change Enable registers ISCEO and ISCE1 are mask registers for the ISCRO and ISCRI registers If a bit in the ISCE is enabled set to 1 and the corresponding bit in the ISCR makes the appropriate transition the ISCB bit in the Status Byte is set to 1 If all bits in the ISCE are disabled s
217. RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Store query return whether a cal store is needed Response 115 yes 0 if no CAL SW X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Switch query Return the setting of the calibration enable switch Response integer 1 for enable 0 for normal Example 1 5500A Operator Manual CFREQ IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Capacitance Frequency query Return the optimal frequency for stimulus when measuring or calibrating capacitance output Response lt gt ofthe optimal frequency Example CFREQ returns 1 0 2 Return 100 Hz as the optimal frequency for the selected capacitance output 1 0 for this example The return is 0 if not sourcing capacitance CLS 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Clear Status command Clear the ESR ISCRO ISCR1 the error queue and the ROS bit in the status byte This command terminates pending operation complete commands OPC or OPC Parameter None Example CLS Clear the ESR ISCRO ISCR1 the error queue and the RQS bit in the status byte CUR POST IEE
218. SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 97 Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This example procedure describes how to use the Volt menu to calibrate the oscilloscope s amplitude gain During calibration you will need to set different voltages and verify that the gain matches the graticule lines on the oscilloscope according to the specifications for your particular oscilloscope See your oscilloscope manual for the recommended calibration settings and appropriate gain values Before you start this procedure verify that you are running the oscilloscope option in Volt mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu pee SCOPE e MDL MODE i Hc volt A 5 5 Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the vertical gain gl026i eps 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope making sure the oscilloscope is terminated at the proper impedance 1 MQ for this example Verify that the key on the 5520A is lit indicating that the signal is connected 2 Key in the voltage level that is recommended for your oscilloscope For example to enter 20 mV press 2 0 then press enter See Keying ina Value earlier in this chapter 3 Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary The waveform should be similar to the one shown below with the gain at exactly the amount specified for the
219. SCOPE terminal Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press stBy e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to cycle through the trigger settings The available trigger settings are off 1 trigger signal appears on each marker 10 trigger signal appears on every tenth marker and 100 trigger signal appears at every 100th marker You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing 719 Indicates you are in Marker mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes 8 80 5500A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 8 108 Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This sample procedure uses the Time Marker function to check the horizontal deflection time base of your oscilloscope See your oscilloscope s manual for the exact time base values recommended for calibration Before you begin this procedure verify that you are in Marker mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Qutput at SCOPE TRIG MODE terminal 502 OFF marker 5 5 5 gl034i eps Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the time base 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope Select 50 Q impedance or use an external 50 Q te
220. ST serial port which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands To set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port see the UUT_SET command The factory default values are shown below in bold type To return to the factory defaults see the FORMAT SETUP command The interface selection sets the command response with command echo back for commands and error messages with TERM terminal or no echo back with COMP computer Parameters lt baud rate value gt 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 lt interface gt TERM terminal COMP computer lt flow control gt XON xon xoff NOSTALL none RTS rts cts lt number data bits gt DBIT7 7 bits DBITS 8 bits number stop bits SBIT1 1 bit or SBIT2 2 bits parity PNONE none PODD odd PEVEN even end of line char carriage return LF line feed CRLF carriage return line feed Example SP SET 9600 TERM XON DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE CRLFE Set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port to the factory default values SP SET IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Host Serial Port Set query Return the RS 232 C settings for the 5500A Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST seri
221. The Service Request Enable Register SRE enables or masks the bits of the Serial Poll Status Byte The SRE is cleared at power up Refer to Figure 5 9 for the bit functions 5 37 5500A Operator Manual 5 38 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 49 Programming the STB and SRE By resetting to 0 the bits in the SRE you can mask disable associated bits in the serial poll status byte Bits set to 1 enable the associated bit in the serial poll status byte The following sample BASIC program enables the Error Available EAV bit 10 THIS PROGRAM SETS EAV IN THE SRE 20 PRINT 6 SRE 8 LOAD THE REGISTER 30 PRINT 6 SRE ASK FOR THE SRE CONTENTS 40 INPUT 06 RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS 50 PRINT SRE 60 RETURN The following BASIC program generates an error and checks the Serial Poll Status Byte Enable the EAV bit with the example above 10 THIS PROGRAM GENERATES AN ERROR AND CHECKS 20 PRINT 86 OUT 1300V 1300V IS OUT OF 5500A RANGE 30 A SPL 6 DO SERIAL POLL 40 IF A AND 72 0 PRI and RQS should have been set 50 PRINT 06 STB RETRIEVE BYTE 60 INPUT Q6 A 70 IF A AND 8 0 HEN PRI EAV should have been set Event Status Register ESR The Event Status Register is a two byte register in which the hig
222. URCE PREFRENCE softkey TVPEJSOURCE PREFREHCE OUTPUT 85 k LIMITS 551010 4 Press a SOURCE PREFRENCE softkey to select the 5500 or 5725 if connected This setting is saved in the nonvolatile memory 4 5 5500A Operator Manual 4 6 4 8 4 9 Utility Functions Menu The Setup Menu softkey labeled UTILITY FUNCTNS Utility Functions provides access to Self Test Format Nonvolatile Memory and Instrument Configuration TEST FORMAT IMSTMT TEST HV CONFIG e SELF TEST This softkey initiates a calibrator selftest FORMAT NV MEM Format Memory Opens a menu to restore all or part of the data in the nonvolatile memory to factory defaults INSTMT CONFIG Instrument Configuration Allows you to view the versions of software installed in the calibrator as well as the user entered report string Using the Format EEPROM Menu Caution Use with extreme care The format nonvolatile memory menu softkeys permanently erase calibration constants Pressing ALL or CAL invalidates the state of calibration of the 5500A Pressing FORMAT NV MEM in the utility functions menu opens the following Format HV Memory ALL CAL SETUP EAR the softkeys in this menu require the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to be in the ENABLE position The nonvolatile memory contains calibration constants and dates setup parame
223. USTS VON DATEN UNABHANGIG DAVON OB SIE AUF VERLETZUNG DER GEWAHRLEISTUNGSPFLICHT RECHTM SSIGE UNRECHTM SSIGE ODER ANDERE HANDLUNGEN ZUR CKZUF HREN SIND Angesichts der Tatsache da in einigen L ndern die Begrenzung einer gesetzlichen Gew hrleistung sowie der Ausschlu oder die Begrenzung von Begleit oder Folgesch den nicht zul ssig ist k nnte es sein da die obengenannten Einschr nkungen und Ausschl sse nicht f r jeden Erwerber gelten Sollte irgendeine Klausel dieser Garantiebestimmungen von einem zust ndigen Gericht f r unwirksam oder nicht durchsetzbar befunden werden so bleiben die Wirksamkeit oder Erzwingbarkeit irgendeiner anderen Klausel dieser Garantiebestimmungen von einem solchen Spruch unber hrt Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B V Postfach 9090 Postfach 1186 Everett WA 98206 9090 5602 B D Eindhoven USA Niederlande GARANTIA LIMITADA LIMITACION DE RESPONSABILIDAD Se garantiza que cada uno de los productos de Fluke no tiene defectos de material y mano de obra si es objeto de una utilizaci n y un mantenimiento normales El per odo de garant a es de un afio y comienza a partir de la fecha de env o Las piezas reparaciones y mantenimiento del producto est n garantizados durante 90 d as Esta garant a se concede exclusivamente al comprador original o al cliente usuario final de un revendedor autorizado por Fluke y no es de aplicaci n a fusibles bater as o pilas desechables o cualquier otro producto
224. UUT port via the RS 232 Host port Connect the UUT and PC as shown in Figure 5 5 Note the use of a modem cable NOT null modem for UUT connection See Appendix D for information about RS 232 cables and connectors Modem Cable J Null Modem Cable RS 232 SERIAL 2 EM EN UUT 5500A Calibrator Controller 5 13 F5 0i eps Figure 5 5 Typical RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Connections Terminal This procedure uses the Terminal accessory supplied with Windows or equal to test RS 232 UUT port operation Visual Basic This procedure uses Visual Basic see Appendix E to test RS 232 Host port and RS 232 UUT port operation Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 UUT port operation via the RS 232 Host port using the Windows Terminal accessory or equal 1 Complete RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure the 5500A RS 232 UUT port to match the parameters of the UUT RS 232 port 2 Complete Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal to set up the 5500A RS 232 Host port to match the parameters of the PC COM port After Step 9 return to this procedure and continue to Step 3 below 3 the Terminal screen type UUT SEND uut command where uut command is the command you selected for the UUT response then press Enter Observe the UUT responds For example to send t
225. Undesired changes in the waveform of a signal Harmonic distortion disturbs the original relationship between a frequency and other frequencies naturally related to it Intermodulation distortion imd introduces new frequencies by the mixing of two or more original frequencies Other forms of distortion are phase distortion and transient distortion errors The different types of errors described in this glossary are offset error linearity error random error scale error systematic errors and transfer error flatness A measure of the variation of the actual output of an ac voltage source at different frequency points when set to the same nominal output level A flat voltage source exhibits very little error throughout its frequency range Glossary Appendices A floor The part of the uncertainty specification of an instrument that is typically a fixed offset plus noise Floor can be expressed as units such as microvolts or counts of the least significant digit For the 5500A the floor specification is combined with fixed range errors in one term to determine total uncertainty full scale The maximum reading of a range of a meter analog to digital converter or other measurement device or the maximum attainable output on a range of a calibrator gain error Same as scale error Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter s response curve is not exactly 1 A meter with only gain error
226. V mV 0 C 0 000 mV 0 003 mV 100 C 1 000 mV 0 305 100 C 1 000 mV 0 305 1000 C 10 000 mV 0 035 1000 C 10 000 mV 0 035 10000 C 100 000 mV 0 008 10000 C 100 000 mV 0 008 7 18 Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy The Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy tests the accuracy of the thermocouple measuring circuitry For this test input a dc voltage into the 5500A front panel TC terminals using copper plugs and wire observe polarity on the TC connector select External Reference and the linear output 104 V C as the thermocouple type See Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple in Chapter 4 Optional You can also source a known temperature using a J type thermocouple connection and Internal Reference Source 0 C 100 C 1000 C and 200 C Input Value Nominal Reading Actual Reading Deviation 90 Day mV WEN ov 0 00 C 0 003 mV 100 mV 10 000 00 C 0 008 100 mV 10 000 00 C 0 008 5500A Operator Manual 7 18 7 19 DC Power Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The DC Power Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL tests the amplitude accur
227. V 1 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 2 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 5 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 10 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 20 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 50 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 100 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 125 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 160 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 200 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 220 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 235 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 250 MHz 0 90 100 0 mV 500 kHz 1 60 100 0 mV 1 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 1 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 2 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 5 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 10 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 20 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 50 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 100 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 125 MHz 2 10 100 0 mV 160 MHz 2 10 100 0 mV 200 MHz 2 10 8 93 5500A Operator Manual 8 94 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Flatness cont Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value Deviation mV 1 Spec mV 100 0 mV 220 MHz 2 10 100 0 mV 235 MHz 2 10 100 0 mV 250 MHz 2 10 400 0 mV 500 kHz 6 10 400 0 mV 1 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 1 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 2 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 5 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 10 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 20 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 50 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 100 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 125 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 160 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 200 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 220 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 235 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 250 MHz 8 10 1 2 V 500 kHz 19 60 1 3V 1 MHz 19 60 1 3V 1 MHz 19 60 1 3V 2 MHz 19 60 1 3V 5 MHz 19 60 1 3V 10 MHz 19 60 1 3V 20 MHz 19 60 1 3V 50 MHz 19 60
228. Y key 3 5 STBY remote command Summary of Commands and Queries 6 8 Oscilloscope Calibration Option Syntax Information General Response Messages Parameter Rules T Tab Characters 5 32 Taking a Thermocouple Measurement TC MEAS remote command TC OFFSET remote command TC OFFSET remote command TC OTCD remote command TC OTCD remote command TC REF remote command TC TYPE remote command 6 39 TC REF remote command 6 40 6 38 Index continued TC_TYPE remote command D remote command 6 41 TC D remote command 6 42 TEMP STD remote command Temperature Simulation RTD Terminators 5 33 Testing a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer 4 58 Testing Harmonics Amps Performance Testing Harmonics Volts Performance Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic 5 14 Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation using Visual Basic 5 18 Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal Testing the IEEE 488 Port 5 8 Testing the Meter 4 53 Testing the RS 232 Host Port 5 12 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port 5 19 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Testing the Thermometer 4 62 Testing Watts VA VAR Performance 4 58 Thermocouple Measuring Temperatures 4 39 Thermocouple TC Measurement Commands ier Thermocouple Measurement Accurac
229. _SET command The factory default values are shown below in bold type To return to the factory defaults see the FORMAT SETUP command The interface selection sets the command response with command echo back with TERM terminal and no echo back with COMP computer Parameters lt baud rate value gt 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 lt flow control gt XON xon xoff NOSTALL none RTS rts cts lt number data bits gt DBIT7 7 bits or DBITS 8 bits number stop bits SBIT1 1 bit or SBIT2 2 bits parity PNONE none PODD odd PEVEN even Example UUT SET 9600 XON DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE Set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port to the factory default values UUT SET X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled UUT Serial Port Set query Return the RS 232 C settings for the 5500A Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port To return the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port see the SP_SET command The factory default values are shown below in bold type To return to the factory defaults see the FORMAT SETUP command Responses lt baud rate value gt 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 lt flow control gt XON xon xoff NOSTALL none RTS rts cts lt number data bits gt DBIT7 7 bits DBITS 8 bits number stop bits SBIT1 1 bit or SBIT2 2
230. a menu A group of interconnected menus is called a menu tree 3 5 5500A Operator Manual ELKE 5500A CALIBRATOR F3 01c eps Figure 3 1 Front Panel View cont Table 3 1 Front Panel Features cont T 9 3 6 The NEW REF New Reference key is active during error mode operation and establishes the present output value as a new reference for meter error computation SETUP The SETUP Setup Menu key puts the 5500A in the setup mode displaying the setup menu in the control display Setup options can be selected using the softkeys under the control display The RESET Reset Calibrator key aborts the current operating state of the 5500A and returns it to the power up default state except when operating under remote control The CE Clear Entry key clears a partially completed keypad entry from the Control Display If there is a partially completed entry when CE is pressed the output is unaffected 4 FIELD The EDIT FIELD Edit Output Display Field key and associated left right arrow keys provide step adjustment of the output signals If any of these keys are pressed or the knob is rotated a digit on the Output Display becomes highlighted and the output increments or decrements as the knob is rotated If a digit rolls past O or 9 the digit to its left or right is carried An error d
231. acy of the dc power of the NORMAL terminals Nominal Value Nominal Value Measured Value Deviation 90 Day Spec V A V NORMAL AUX NORMAL 20 mV 2 19 A 0 02096 20 mV 11A 0 020 7 20 DC Power Amplitude Accuracy AUX Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The DC Power Amplitude Accuracy AUX tests the amplitude accuracy of the dc power output of the AUX terminals Nominal Value Nominal Value Measured Value A Deviation 90 Day Spec V A AUX NORMAL AUX 1000 V 100 uA 0 06 1000 V 1 mA 0 015 329 V 2 19A 0 025 1000 V 11A 0 041 Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check 7 21 Power Amplitude Accuracy High Voltage Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Voltage tests the current outputs at the AUX terminals in the presence of a high voltage Nominal Nominal Phase Measured 90 Day Value V Value Frequency Hz degrees Value A Deviation Spec NORMAL A AUX AUX 65 2 0 0 161 1
232. al AC Voltage Output Dual DC Voltage Output DUTY remote command DUTY remote command When to Use EARTH Connection EARTH 3 5 EARTH remote command EARTH remote command 8 19 8 72 Edge Function Specifications 3 6 EDIT remote command EDIT remote command Editing and Error Output Settings 4 49 Editing Output Settings Editing the Output Setting EEPROM Format Menu 4 6 ENTER key 3 8 Entering a DC Offset Entering a Phase Angle 4 44 ERR remote command ERR UNIT remote command Entering a Power Factor Error Mode Operation Error Mode Commands Error Mode Keys that exit 4 49 Error Output Displaying the Error Queue Error Settings ESE Bit assignments Programming the ESE remote command ESE remote command ESR Explained Programming the Register 5 38 ESR remote command Event Status Enable Register ESE 5 38 Register ESR 5 38 Register Bit assignments EXPLAIN remote command 6 17 External Connection Commands 6 3 Extra Space or Tab Characters 5 32 Bit assignments Factory Defaults for SETUP 4 7 Fan Filter 3 10 FAULT remote command Features Front Panel 3 4 Rear Panel Features Chapter 3 3 3 FORMAT remote command 6 17 Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections KST Frequency Response Calibration Frequenc
233. al port To return the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port see the UUT_SET command The factory default values are shown below in bold type To return to the factory defaults see the FORMAT SETUP command Responses baud rate value 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 interface TERM terminal COMP computer flow control XON xon xoff NOSTALL none RTS rts cts number data bits DBIT7 7 bits or DBITS 8 bits number stop bits SBIT1 1 bit or SBIT2 2 bits parity PNONE none PODD odd PEVEN even end of line char gt CR carriage return LF line feed CRLF carriage return line feed Example SP SET returns 9600 TERM DBIT8 58111 CRLF Return the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port as shown when set to the factory default values 6 35 5500A Operator Manual SPLSTR IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Serial Poll String command Set the Serial Poll String string up to 40 characters which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands The SPLSTR is sent to the host over the serial interface when a P lt cntl gt P character is sent The default format is SPL 02
234. alibrator to a UUT 25004 CALIBRATOR FLUKE 87 MUE RMS MULTIMETER Qu O 0 mV NORMAL AUX N SENSE MAX 14 03 Figure 4 3 UUT Connection Resistance Compensation Off FLUKE 25004 CALIBRATOR de SENSE INPUT SCOPE F4 04 eps Figure 4 4 UUT Connection Capacitance Four Wire Compensation 4 13 5500A Operator Manual _ FLUKE 87 MULTIMETER C Qum Cum FLUKE 55004 CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX SCOPE A 01 5 MA RID AUX V HI S Q 14 05 Figure 4 5 UUT Connection Capacitance Two Wire Compensation FLUKE 55004 CALIBRATOR FLUKE 87 venus MULTIMETER Gm Gum amp O 200V PK A Q SENSE AUXV NORMAL AUX SCOPE RTD 14 06 Figure 4 6 UUT Connection Capacitance Compensation Front Panel Operation Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT FLUKE 25004 CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX 56 0 SENSE 14 07 Figure 4 7 UUT Connection DC Voltage AC Voltage FLUKE 25004 CALIBRATOR FLUKE 87 MUE RMS MULTIMETER 02 mV NORMAL AUX SCOPE A SENSE
235. ances to cancel any errors due to lead resistance This can be accomplished for example by using three identical test lead lengths and identical connector styles 3 Setthe UUT to measure temperature on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired temperature output maximum 6 numeric keys For example 123 456 5 Foran output in C press the key For F press and then the key 4 37 5500A Operator Manual 4 38 6 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your temperature output For example 123 456 C below 7 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 8 Press to activate the calibrator output Four softkey labels appear on the Control Display Press the OUTPUT softkey to toggle the rtd selection displaying the rtd setup menu and four softkey positions Note The temperature you entered above will be cleared to 0 C 32 F if you change between tc thermocouple and rtd resistance temperature detector or change the type of rtd If this occurs select OUTPUT rtd the desired rtd TYPE and then reenter the temperature following steps 4 to 8 Output at TYPE OUTPUT 85 OFF HORMAL terminal pt385 rtd ptT tc 7 miizd d wire Output at 5500A NORMAL terminal Displays the location of the output terminals always NORMAL for
236. and SRQSTR is set to SRQ 02 02 04 04x see the SRQSTR command and SPLSTR is set to SPL 02x 02 04 04x see the SPLSTR command 5500A Operator Manual Serial Ports EOL end of line Features Temperature Standard its 90 Display Contrast level 7 7 Host Connection gpib IEEE 488 Display Brightness level 1 0 GPIB Port Address 4 pt385 RTD Power Up Default Type 8 bits 1 stop bit xon xoff parity none 9600 baud wait 30 sec CRLF Thermocouple Power K Up Default Type Source Preference 5500 EOF end of file 012 000 Current Limits 11A Remote I F term Voltage Limits 1000 V Remote commands see Chapter 6 SROSTR SRQ 02x 02x 04x 04x PUD string cleared Output Display and Control Display respectively There are 8 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FUNC X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Function query Return the present output measurement or calibration function See the response below for output amp measurement modes Responses Example DCV ACV ACV TC_MEAS SACV SDCV MARKER LEVSINE EDGE dc volts function ac volts function dc current function ac current function ohms function capacitance function temperature with an rtd function temperature with a thermocouple function dc power function ac
237. ars Note Make sure there is no cable connected to TRIG OUT while using the Levsine function Dutput a SCOPE MORE SET TO MODE terminal 506 OPTIOMS LAST levs ine 2 5 5 5 5 set to last F ine set to 50 kHz marker wavyegen volt edge gl029i eps Each option in the Levsine menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 50 Q Indicates the location and impedance of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press opR To disconnect the signal press You cannot change the impedance while you are in Levsine mode MORE OPTIONS Opens additional menu items which are described in detail under The MORE OPTIONS Menu SET TO LAST F Toggles between the current frequency setting and the reference value of 50 kHz This option is useful for reverting to the reference to check the output after you make adjustments at another frequency Indicates you are in Levsine mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four calibration modes Note If a question mark appears in the Output Display then no specifications are available for the frequency you are using This will occur at frequencies greater than 250 MHz Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage Three options are available for controlling the sine wave settings SET TO LAST F toggles between the last frequency used and the reference
238. asurement value OHM input impedance value in ohms measurement value F input capacitance value in farads measurement value NONE no measurement is available Example TRG returns 1 00 03 1 input impedance Note You can also use the VAL query to return an impedance measurement value with the SC600 option VAL returns the last measurement whereas TRG gets a new measurement Responses are the same as shown above for the TRG command See Chapter 6 for VAL use with thermocouple measurements 5500A SC600 Option 8 Verification Tables 8 56 Verification Tables The verification test points are provided here as a guide when verification to one year specifications is desired 8 57 DC Voltage Verification Table 8 16 DC Voltage Verification 1MQ output impedance unless noted Nominal Measured Value Deviation 1 Year Spec V dc Do ooo o 0 00004 000325 sd 0 000040625 0 001235 sd 0 000040625 0 00249 0 000041245 0 00249 0 000041245 0005 sd 0 00004125 00055 sd 0 00004125 00005 0 000043125 0000055 0 000043125 0009 0 00004495 00099 0 00004495 001 0 000045 001 0 000045 001775 0 00004875 0 01735 0 00004875 0029 0 00005245 00249 0 00005245 0055 0 0000525 00235 0 0000525 00675 Y 0 00007375 0 0675 0 00007375 0109 Cid 0 00009495 01099
239. bles 8 8 65 Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness Nominal Value V p p 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 005 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0075 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 0 0099 Table 8 24 Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness Frequency 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 360 MHz 400 MHz 570 MHz 590 MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 360 MHz 400 MHz 570 MHz 590 MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 360 MHz 400 MHz 570 MHz 590 MHz 290 MHz _ S90MHz __ _ 580MHz 600MHz 7 290MHz S90MHz aag MHz 580MHz 600MHz 290 MHz Se0MHz 480 MHz 5 600MHz Measured Value V p p Deviation V p p na na na 1 Year Spec V p p na 0 000175 0 000175 0 0002 0 0002 0 0003 0 0003 0 0003 0 0003 0 0003 0 0003 0 0003 0 0003 na 0 0002125 0 0002125 0 00025 0 00025 0 0004 0 0004 0 0004 0 0004 0 0004 0 0004 0 0004 0 0004 na 0 0002485 0 0002485 0 000298 0 000298 0 000496 0 000496 0 000496 0 000496 0 000496 0 000496 0 000496 0 000496 8 47 55004 Operator Manual 8 48 Table 8 24 Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Value V p p 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01
240. block and when the selected thermocouple has copper wires Press the REF softkey to enter the value of the external temperature reference e REF Temperature Reference Displays the value of the temperature reference When the Reference Source is Internal the display shows the internal reference When the Reference Source is External the display shows the value you entered for external reference TYPE Thermocouple Type Selects the thermocouple type used for measurement The default is The 10uV C setting is used for customer supplied linearizations OFFSET Measurement Display Offset Selects an offset value to be added or subtracted from the actual measurement This is useful for differential measurements temperatures above and below a desired temperature TYPE Thermocouple Type Selects the thermocouple type used for measurement The default is The 10uV C setting is used for customer supplied linearizations 4 34 Waveform Types 4 40 AC voltage ac current dual ac voltage and ac power functions provide a softkey to select between four different waveform types sinewave sine trianglewave tri squarewave square and truncated sinewave truncs When the calibrator output is sinewave ac power or dual ac voltage the Control Display shows additional softkeys for harmonics and fundamental frequencies Front Panel Operation 4 Waveform Types 4 35 4 36 4 37 Sinewave When the wave sele
241. brator automatically selects the range that provides the best output resolution When locked is selected the calibrator locks the selected range and will not change ranges when you are editing the output or entering new outputs Values lower or higher than the locked range are not allowed The locked selection is usually made when you do not want range changes that may cause a small perturbation in the output e g when checking the linearity of a given multimeter range 4 20 Setting the Output Setting the calibrator output is similar to entering values into a calculator press the keys that represent the value you desire and then press a units key to identify which of the volts amps hertz etc you want the value to represent The control display indicates the value and units you select as you type them into the calibrator Once you are satisfied with the value and units press If the output display indicates STBY press to output the selection The display of a small u unsettled in the Output Display indicates the calibrator is allowing for its internal circuitry to settle For example to set the output to 10 V dc press 13210 5 y Entr opr To set the output to 20 V at 60 Hz press 2 0 gt v i gt 6 0 Hz To change the output to dc press QW even Step by step procedures are provided for each output function as follows
242. brator consists of commands queries and interface messages Although the commands are based on the 488 2 standard they can be used on either the IEEE 488 or RS 232 interface except for a few specialized RS 232 commands described in Commands for RS 232 Only For more information on command structures see the IEEE 488 2 standard Refer to Chapter 6 Remote Commands when you require additional information about command references used this chapter All commands and units may be entered in UPPER or lower case There are four specific remote control configurations that use commands queries and interface messages IEEE 488 RS 232 Terminal Mode RS 232 Computer Mode and RS 232 Pass Through Mode Setting up and testing each mode is discussed earlier in this chapter IEEE 488 Mode The IEEE 488 mode is used when the 5500A Calibrator is operated by computer program In this mode requested information is returned by query and interface messages are queued and returned by command RS 232 Terminal Mode The RS 232 terminal mode is an interactive mode where an operator inputs commands with immediate returns for requested information queries and interface messages RS 232 Computer Mode The RS 232 computer mode is used when the 5500A Calibrator is operated by computer program In this mode requested information is returned by query and interface messages are queued and returned by command RS 232 Pass Through Mode The RS 232 pas
243. cation Tables 8 8 118 Wave Generator Function Verification 50 Q Load Waveforin Nominal Value Frequency Measured Value Deviation 1 Year Spec mV mV Square 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 25 mV Square 10 9 mV 10 kHz 0 43 mV Square 44 9 mV 10 kHz 1 45 mV Square 109 0 mV 10 kHz 3 37 mV Square 449 0 mV 10 kHz 13 57 mV Square 1 1V 10 kHz 32 50 mV Square 2 2 V 10 kHz 66 10 mV Sine 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 25 mV Sine 10 9 mV 10 kHz 0 43 mV Sine 44 9 mV 10 kHz 1 45 mV Sine 109 0 mV 10 kHz 3 37 mV Sine 449 0 mV 10 kHz 13 57 mV Sine 1 1 V 10 kHz 32 50 mV Sine 2 2 V 10 kHz 66 10 mV Triangle 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 25 mV Triangle 10 9 mV 10 kHz 0 43 mV Triangle 44 9 mV 10 kHz 1 45 mV Triangle 109 0 mV 10 kHz 3 37 mV Triangle 449 0 mV 10 kHz 13 57 mV Triangle 1 1V 10 kHz 32 50 mV Triangle 2 2V 10 kHz 66 10 mV 8 119 Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Amplitude Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p Deviation 1 Year Spec mV mV 5 0 mV 50 kHz 0 300 10 0 mV 50 kHz 0 400 20 0 mV 50 kHz 0 600 40 0 mV 50 kHz 1 000 50 0 mV 50 kHz 1 200 100 0 mV 50 kHz 2 200 200 0 mV 50 kHz 4 200 5500A Operator Manual Leveled Sinewave Function Verification Amplitude cont Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p Deviation 1 Year Spec mV mV 400 0 mV 50 kHz 8 200 500 0 mV 50 kHz 1
244. ccessories Figure 5 3 shows a typical connection IEEE 488 Cable IEEE 488 IEEE 488 Port Port Xe y 5500A Calibrator ET UUT Controller f5 0a eps Figure 5 3 Typical IEEE 488 Port Connections Complete the following procedure to test IEEE 488 operation using Win32 Interactive Control 1 Complete the IEBE 488 Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5500 for GPIB operation Note the GPIB Address Port default is 4 2 Connect the PC and 5500A IEEE 488 ports using a standard IEEE 488 cable See Chapter 9 Accessories for IEEE 488 cables available from Fluke 3 From the programs menu select NI 488 2M software for your operating system 4 From the NIA88 2M software menu select Win32 interactive control A DOS window opens with a prompt as shown below ontrol B onal Instruments Corporation to quit 5 8 Remote Operation 5 Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control 5 At the prompt type the following line to activate the IEEE interface card lt ibdev 0 4 0 10 1 0 gt The second number in this line is the primary address of the calibrator If the address has been changed from the factory default change this line accordingly 6 The prompt reads uao From this prompt type lt ibwrt remote gt then press the ENTER or RETURN key 7 Verify that the calibrator is now in remote control
245. ce Messages IEEE 488 Interface messages manage traffic on the IEEE 488 interface bus Device addressing and clearing data handshaking and commands to place status bytes on the bus are all directed by interface messages Some of the interface messages occur as state transitions of dedicated control lines The rest of the interface messages are sent over the data lines with the ATN signal true All device dependent and common commands are sent over the data lines with the ATN signal false An important thing to note about interface messages is that unlike device dependent and common commands interface messages are not sent literally in a direct way For example when you send a device dependent query to the 5500A Calibrator the controller automatically sends the interface message MTA My Talk Address 488 standards define interface messages Table 5 4 lists the interface messages that the 5500A Calibrator accepts Table 5 4 also shows the BASIC statement to generate the interface message Table 5 5 lists the interface messages that the calibrator sends The mnemonics listed in the tables are not sent in BASIC PRINT statements as commands are in this way they are different from device dependent and common commands Interface messages are handled automatically in most cases For example handshake messages DAV DAC and RFD automatically occur under the direction of an instrument s interface itself as each byte 15 sent over the bus
246. change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes Default Wavegen settings are 20 mV p p 1000 0 Hz WAVE square and offset 0 0 V 8 29 5500A Operator Manual 8 43 Testing Video Triggers 8 30 Output at SCOPE terminal 500 10 ODD FORMAT ntsc edge levsine marker wavegen video overld meas Z pulse You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the VIDEO menu is described below Output SCOPE terminal 50 Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press oPR To disconnect the signal press stev LINE MK Allows you to select the marker line number For ntsc and pal m formats you can also select field or For pal and secam formats the field CODD or is selected automatically based on marker line number FORMAT Scrolls through the available formats You can select ntsc pal pal m and secam MODE Indicates the calibrator is in VIDEO mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes Default video settings are 100 96 format NTSC and videomark 10 5500A SC600 Option 8 Verifying Pulse Capture 8 44 Verifying Pulse Capture EC AMPL TRIG MODE SCOPE 2 5V
247. citance modes Applies a DC offset to an AC output voltage Returns the DC offset voltage Sets the displacement power factor phase angle between the NORMAL and AUX terminals for AC power output only Returns the displacement power factor phase angle between the NORMAL and AUX terminals Sets the duty cycle of SQUARE wave outputs Returns the duty cycle Returns the present output measurement or calibration function Make the frequency of one output be a harmonic multiple of the other output called the fundamental Returns the present instrument harmonic and fundamental locations Activates the 5500A output if it is in standby Returns the operate standby setting Sets the output of the 5500A and establishes a new reference point for the error mode Returns the output amplitudes and frequency of the 5500A Sets the phase between the NORMAL and AUX terminals for dual outputs The NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference Returns the phase between the NORMAL and AUX terminals Returns the equivalent power for DC and AC power output Returns the present output ranges Locks in the present range or selects auto ranging Returns whether or not the preset output range is locked Puts the 5500A in standby Sets the waveforms for AC outputs Returns the waveforms of the output Activate 2 wire or 4 wire or deactivate impedance compensation Returns whether or not impedance compensation is active and if active w
248. consistent with the 5500A capabilities CME Command Error caused D Error causes instrument by incorrect command syntax returns to the power up state unrecognized header or parameter of the wrong type none Error is returned to the initiator only i e local initiator or remote initiator U No Error 1 DDE FR Error queue overflow 100 DDE FR D Inguard not responding send 101 DDE FR D Inguard not responding recv 102 DDE FR D Lost sync with inguard 103 DDE FR Invalid guard xing command Text characters Up to 36 text characters E 1 5500A Operator Manual 104 DDE FR D Hardware relay trip occurred 105 DDE FR D Inguard got impatient 106 DDE FR D A D fell asleep 107 DDE FR D Inguard watchdog timeout 201 DDE FR D 5725A ROM failure 202 DDE FR D 5725A RAM failure 203 DDE FR D 5725A EEPROM failure 204 DDE FR D 5725A data bus failure 205 DDE FR D 5725A CLAMPS circuit failure 206 DDE FR D 5725A HVCLR circuit failure 207 DDE FR D 5725 DAC failure 208 DDE FR D 5725A watchdog timer fault 209 DDE FR D 5725A I heatsink too hot 210 DDE FRS Output tripped to standby 241 DDE FR D 5725A compliance V exceeded 212 DDE FRS 5725A compliance V exceeded 213 DDE FR D 5725A 400V did not shu
249. ction is sine a sinewave current or voltage signal is present on the calibrator outputs Figure 4 11 The variables for the sinewave are amplitude frequency and dc offset voltage Peak RMS 70 7 of Peak Period Figure 4 11 Sinewave Trianglewave When the wave selection is tri the trianglewave is present on the calibrator outputs Figure 4 12 The variables for the trianglewave are amplitude frequency and dc offset voltage Whenever a trianglewave is selected the Output Display indicates amplitudes in peak to peak units Peak to Peak Figure 4 12 Trianglewave Squarewave When the wave selection is square a squarewave current or voltage signal is present on the calibrator outputs Figure 4 13 The variables for the squarewave are duty cycle amplitude frequency and dc offset voltage Whenever a squarewave is selected the Output Display indicates amplitude in peak to peak units If the calibrator is set for a single voltage or current output the duty cycle of the signal can be set through the keypad To enter a new duty cycle press the DUTY CYCLE softkey and up to five numeric keys followed by enter The negative going edge of the squarewave will move based on the duty cycle setting 4 41 5500A Operator Manual Period 9 Peak to Peak Decrease Duty Cycle Increase Duty Cycle Figure 4 13 Squarewave and Duty Cycle 4 38 Truncated Sinewave
250. ctly and that the correct fuse for that line voltage is installed connect the calibrator to a properly grounded three prong outlet Preparing for Operation 2 Connecting To Line Power LINE VOLTAGE INDICATOR CHANGING LINE FUSE CHANGING LINE VOLTAGE F2 01 eps Figure 2 1 Accessing the Fuse and Selecting Line Voltage 2 5 5500A Operator Manual Table 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke Type Voltage Current Fluke Option Number North America 120 V 15A LC 1 North America 240 V 15 A LC 2 Universal Euro 220 V 16 A LC 3 United Kingdom 240 V 13 A LC 4 Switzerland 220 V 10 A LC 5 Australia 240 V 10 A LC 6 South Africa 240 V 5 A LC 7 2 6 2 6 F2 02 eps Figure 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke Service Information Each Model 5500A Calibrator is warranted to the original purchaser for a period of 1 year beginning on the date received The warranty is located at the front of this manual To locate an authorized service center call Fluke using any of the phone numbers listed below or visit us on the World Wide Web www fluke com USA 1 888 99 FLUKE 1 888 993 5853 Canada 1 800 36 FLUKE 1 800 363 5853 Europe 31 402 675 200 Japan 81 3 3434 0181 Singapore 65 738 5655 Anywhere in the world 1 425 446 5500 After warranty service is available but you may choose to repair the calibrator using the information in the Troubleshooting Section of the 5
251. d ERR fetches the earliest error code in the error queue which contains error codes for the first 15 errors that have occurred Execution error An error occurred while the 5500A tried to execute the last command This could be caused for example by a parameter being out of range The command ERR fetches the earliest error in the error queue which contains error codes for the first 15 errors that have occurred Device dependent error An error related to a device dependent command has occurred Query error The 5500A was addressed to talk when no response data was available or appropriate or when the controller failed to retrieve data on the output queue Operation complete All commands previous to reception of a command have been executed and the interface is ready to accept another message F5 06 eps Figure 5 10 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable ESE Programming the ESR and ESE To read the contents of the ESR send the remote command ESR The ESR 15 cleared set to 0 every time it is read To read the contents of the ESE send the remote command ESE The ESE is not cleared when it is read When you read either register the 5500A Calibrator responds by sending a decimal number that when converted to binary represents bits 0 through 15 The following sample BASIC program retrieves the contents of both registers 10 THIS PROGRAM READS THE ESR AND THE ESE REGISTERS 20 PR
252. d press lt Enter gt Observe the 5500A Calibrator Control Display changes back to the reset condition below 3301 auta SJ 2 25 2 2 If you want to experiment with other commands in the command set see Chapter 6 Remote Commands When finished select the Exit command from the File menu to close the Terminal accessory gl42f eps Hint To save the communication parameters in Terminal for future operations first select Save from the File menu and then assign a name for example host t rm Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 Host operation using the Windows based programming language Visual Basic This procedure assumes you have completed Appendix E Creating a Visual Basic Test Program to create the group RS 232 Test Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 operation using Visual Basic 1 Complete the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5500A for RS 232 Host port operation Note the RS 232 Host port parameters that you selected in this procedure 2 Connect the selected COM port on the PC to the 5500A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port using a standard null modem RS 232 cable See Appendix D for information on RS 232 cables and connectors 3 start the program open the Test Ports icon from the RS 232 Test group below RS 232 Test BE 4 Verify the
253. d together either at the UUT or at the 5500A When tied at the UUT select open The default is tied e PHASE Phase Difference Selects the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs See Adjusting the Phase later in this chapter 4 27 Setting a Dual DC Voltage Output Note Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the 5500A via LO s softkey selection tied The calibrator produces a dual dc voltage output by sourcing one dc voltage the NORMAL outputs and a second on the AUX terminals Complete the following procedure to set a dual dc voltage output If you make an entry error press one or more times to clear the display then reenter the value pu T 9o Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation Press to clear any output from the 5500A Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure dual dc voltage on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at the NORMAL terminals maximum seven numeric keys For example 123 4567 Press to select the polarity of the voltage default is Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry for the NORMAL terminals For example 123 4567 mV
254. de only H 1 Two channels of dc voltage output are provided 1 5500A Operator Manual 1 17 DC Current Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 Rescliil Compliance of output uA en Voltage owna so o0 59 mop 2004 5725A Amplifier O T LL ET The actual voltage compliance Vc is a function of current output lo and is given by the formula Vc 5 05 lo 4 67 The highest compliance voltage is limited to 4 5 V Maximum Inductive Load The actual voltage compliance Vc is a function of current output lo and is given by the formula Vc 0 588 10 4 69 The highest compliance voltage is limited to 4 5 V The actual voltage compliance Vc is a function of current output lo and is given by the formula Vc 0 204 10 4 75 The highest compliance voltage is limited to 4 3 V Ranges Bandwidth Bandwidth 0 1 to 10 Hz 10 to 10 kHz rms p p 5725A Amplifier TIE Z5 ppm of output 200 Introduction and Specifications General Specifications 1 18 Resistance Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C sane nn of S ON 09 90 90days 1 dye _ 0 oor oo 0009 oos oo oazo oo 250uatosma 3501999 oor os 0009 os or zmorem mezek oor 06 ome os 01 zswosma oroko ome 6 oon 1
255. ds eee Marker Function Commands eene Video Function Commands esee Overload Function Commands eene Impedance Capacitance Function Commands Verification ee ce tree ere e DC Voltage AC Voltage Amplitude 22 AC Voltage Frequency Verification 484 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 MQ Output Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 500 Output Impedance Leveled Sinewave Verification Leveled Sinewave Verification Frequency Leveled Sinewave Verification Harmonics ssessss Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness sees Edge Verification Edge Verification Frequency Edge Verification Duty Cycle eere Edge Verification Rise Time eene Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification Marker Generator Pulse Generator Verification Period sess Pulse Generator Verification Pulse Width Input Impedance Verification Resistance I
256. e CRLF Source Preference 5500 EOF end of file 012 000 Current Limits Remote VF pera Voltage Limits 1020 V Remote commands see Chapter 6 SROSTR SRQ 9602x 02 04x 04x PUD string cleared Output Display and Control Display respectively There are 8 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 10 Resetting the Calibrator At any time during front panel operation not remote operation you can return the 5500A Calibrator to the power up state by pressing except after an error message which is cleared by pressing a blue softkey Pressing the key does the following e Returns the calibrator to the power up state 0 V dc standby 330 mV range and all OUTPUT SETUP menus set to their most recent default values e Clears the stored values for limits and error mode reference 4 11 Zeroing the Calibrator Zeroing recalibrates internal circuitry most notably dc offsets in all ranges of operation To meet the specifications in Chapter 1 zeroing is required every seven days or when the 5500A Calibrator ambient temperature changes by more than 5 C Zeroing is particularly important when your calibration workload has 1 mQ and 1 mV resolution and when there are significant temperature changes in the 5500A Calibrator work environment There are two zeroing functions total instrument zero ZERO and ohms only zero OHMS ZERO Complete the following procedure to zero the calibrator Note The 5500A Calibra
257. e oscilloscope is terminated at the proper impedance 1 MQ for this example Verify that the key on the Calibrator is lit indicating that the signal is connected 2 Key in the voltage level that is recommended for your oscilloscope For example to enter 20 mV press 2 0 H then press enter See Keying ina Value earlier in this chapter 3 Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary The waveform should be similar to the one shown below with the gain at exactly the amount specified for the calibration settings for your oscilloscope This example shows the gain at 20 mV to be 4 divisions at 5 mV per division gl006i eps 4 Change the voltage to the next value recommended for calibrating your oscilloscope model and repeat this procedure at the new voltage level verifying the gain is correct according to the specifications in your manual 5 Repeat the procedure for each channel 5500A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 30 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an 8 31 Oscilloscope The pulse response is calibrated with a square wave signal that has a fast leading edge rise time Using this signal you adjust the oscilloscope as necessary until it meets its particular specifications for rise time and pulse aberrations Following pulse verification the frequency response is checked by applying a leveled
258. e Generator WAVEGEN function The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on and capture complex TV Trigger signals is checked using the VIDEO function The oscilloscope s input characteristics can be measured using the Input Resistance and Capacitance MEAS Z function The oscilloscope s input protection circuit can be tested using the Overload OVERLD function The menus that implement these functions also include parameters for altering the way the output signal responds to voltage frequency and time settings giving you control of the signal during calibration and providing more methods for observing the signal s characteristics SC600 Option Specifications These specifications apply only to the SC600 Option General specifications that apply to the 5520A hereafter termed the Calibrator can be found in Chapter 1 The specifications are valid under the following conditions The Calibrator is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1 The Calibrator has completed a warm up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off up to a maximum of 30 minutes The 5500A SC600 Option has been active longer than 5 minutes 8 5 5500A Operator Manual 8 6 8 3 Volt Specifications Amplitude Characteristics Range Resolution Adjustment Range 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C Sequence Square Wave Frequency Charac Range 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C T
259. e Marker 8 27 8 81 Trigger Connection 8 13 8 65 V DIV menu 18 178 70 Volt Function 8 16 8 69 Voltage Gain 8 18 8 69 8 71 Wave Generator 8 28 Oscilloscope ents H Oscilloscope Commands 6 6 Oscilloscope Connection 8 13 8 65 eps 6 27 OUT remote command OUT ERR remote command Output Commands 6 5 Output Display Output Editing Output Limits Setting of 4 50 Output Queue 5 42 Output Setting AC Current 4 25 AC Voltage Capacitance DC Current de offset DC Power DC Voltage Dual AC Voltage Dual DC Voltage Power Factor Resistance Temperature Simulation 4 35 Channel and External Trigger Oscilloscope Connections OUT remote command Phase Adjusting Index continued Temperature Simulation RTD Output Signal Adjusting for Oscilloscope Calibration 8 14 8 66 Overlapped Commands p Parameter Syntax Rules 5 31 Peak to Peak Versus Rms Waveforms 4 16 Performances Tests 7 7 PF See Power Factor Phase Accuracy 7 22 Phase Angle Entering a PHASE remote command 6 29 PHASE remote command Power AC Output Setting DC Output Setting Power Cords 2 6 Power Factor Entering of POWER remote command 6 30 Preparing for Operation Chapter 2 2 3 PREV MENU 3 5 Program Examples 5 43 Taking Thermocouple Measurement Using OPC OPC and WAI Verifying a Meter on IEEE 488
260. e Time i 20 ms to 150 ns off 1 10 100 gt 1 lt 2ns 8 10 Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker Function Table 8 8 Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker Function Pulse Period Division Ratio 1 Amplitude into 50 p p Typical Rise Time 5 sto 750 ns off 1 21V 2 ns 34 9 ms to 7 5 ns off 10 21V lt 2 ns 34 9 ms to 2 ns off 100 21V 2 ns 8 11 Trigger Signal Specifications Edge Function Table 8 9 Trigger Signal Specifications Edge Function Edge Signal Division Typical Amplitude Typical Rise Typical Lead Time Frequency Ratio into 50 Time 1 kHz to 10 MHz off 1 21V lt 2ns 40 ns 8 12 Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function Table 8 10 Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function Edge Signal Division Typical Amplitude Typical Rise Typical Lead Time Frequency Ratio into 50 p p Time 10 Hz to 10 kHz off 1 21V 2 ns 1 us 8 13 Trigger Signal Specifications Table 8 11 TV Trigger Signal Specifications Trigger Signal Type Parameters Field Formats Selectable NTSC SECAM PAL PAL M Polarity Selectable inverted or uninverted video Amplitude into 50 Q p p Adjustable 0 to 1 5 V into 50 Q load 7 accuracy Line Marker Selectable Line Video Marker 5500A Operator Manual 8 14 Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications Table 8 12 Oscilloscope Input Resista
261. e WAVE MENUS softkey that appears when outputting dual ac voltages or ac power shown below for ac power output 25 9987 I OUT Wave 1123 4 Als MENUS MENUS WAVE WAVE Lg PHASE Sine Sine open Power Factor 1 000 SHO Hew pF lead PHASE lead laa When one output is a harmonic of the other the phase shift is based on the phase angle or power factor cosine of the harmonic signal For example when the AUX output is generating a 60 Hz signal and the NORMAL output is generating a 120 Hz 2nd Harmonic signal a phase shift of 60 pf of 5 would move the AUX signal 60 of 120 Hz 30 of 60 Hz Entering a Phase Angle Complete the following procedure to enter a phase shift in degrees This procedure assumes you have already sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output 1 Press the softkey WAVE MENUS opening the waveform menu 2 Press the softkey PHASE opening the phase entry menu Front Panel Operation 4 Adjusting the Phase 4 42 3 Press the numeric keys decimal point key to enter the desired phase angle maximum five numeric keys For example 123 45 4 Press to select leading or lagging phase shift default is The Control Display now shows the value of your entry For example a leading phase angle of 123 45 degrees below SHOW PF appears only for sinewaves 6 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the New phase
262. e an SRQ when an error is detected The following program example shows a skeleton program including error catching 10 PRINT Q4 CLS Clear status 20 PRINT Q4 SRE 8 Set SRE Error Available 30 ON SRQ GOTO 1000 Enable SRO Function 100 Place body of program here 900 STOP End of program 1000 REM Start of SRO Handler Start routine 1010 PRINT 84 FAULT Request fault code 1020 INPUT 04 A Input fault code 1030 PRINT 44 EXPLAIN Request fault text 1040 INPUT Q4 AS Input fault text 1050 PRINT Fault AS detected Print message 1060 PRINT 44 STBY Place 5500A in standby 1070 STOP 5500A Operator Manual 5 4 5 1 5 2 Introduction This chapter describes methods for operating the 5500A Calibrator by remote control Remote control can be interactive with the user controlling each step from a terminal or under the control of a computer program running the calibrator in an automated system The 5500A Calibrator rear panel has three ports for remote operations IEEE 488 parallel port also known as a General Purpose Interface Bus or GPIB port and two RS 232 serial ports SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT IEEE 488 The IEEE 488 parallel port is usually used in larger control and calibration systems An IEEE 488 system is more costly to set up but has the ability to serve multiple 5500A Calibrators and multiple UUTs Also paral
263. e both IEEE 488 and RS 232 simultaneously F3 04b eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees 8 DATA 1 STOP 5 PARITY BITS i ixon amp oFFi i on oF EF nane nane add eg rts c ts ever 121 2400 aaa 3688 STALL refers to the method of controlling data flow software control xon off hardware control rts cts or none Factory defaults are shown underlined Future 8 DATA i L PARITY HEAT 178 i none i MENU K 1 none 161 2 none odd PLS ts even STALL refers to the method of controlling data flow software control xon off hardware control rts cts or none Factory defaults are shown underlined F3 04c eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 15 5500A Operator Manual EOL CELF HEAT I F tern au term to M 5t camp 1200 LF 2400 4800 FEDR REMOTE I F Interface has selections term terminal factory default and comp computer EOL End of Line character is either Carriage Return Line Feed CRLF CR Carriage Return or LF Line Feed Factory defaults are shown underlined SET FIRST M EOF HEHU AJ A A to N to K EOF End of File indicates the action taken at the end of a file by entering one or two ASCI
264. e of the channel connectors on your oscilloscope see Figure 8 3 To use the external trigger attach the TRIG OUT connector on the 5520A to the external trigger connection on your oscilloscope To use the external trigger and view its signal with the calibration signal attach the TRIG OUT connector to another channel See your oscilloscope manual for details on connecting and viewing an external trigger F LLIKES 55004 CALIBRATOR OOOO DD D 2 OOOO OOO ROO o D DDD OO gl020f eps Figure 8 3 Oscilloscope Connection Channel and External Trigger 8 65 5500A Operator Manual 8 86 Starting the Oscilloscope Calibration Option Press to start the Oscilloscope Calibration Option The Control Display opens the Volt menu shown below which contains options for calibrating the vertical gain on your oscilloscope This is the first of five calibration menus which you can scroll through by pressing the softkey under MODE Each menu is described in detail in this chapter DU TRUT v pe THC l SE Wo S MDL HODE SCOPE Ino volt 5 5 5 5 8 87 The Output Signal The location of the output signal is indicated on the Control Display the display on the right side If your 5520A is connected but the output does not appear on the oscilloscope you may have the 5520A in standby mode 910211 The settings for the
265. e of the choises Responses GT1000 UUT error is displayed in above 1000 ppm ppm below GT100 UUT error is displayed in above 100 ppm ppm below GT10 UUT error is displayed in above 10 ppm ppm below PPM UUT error is displayed in ppm always PCT UUT error is displayed in always ESE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Event Status Enable command Load a byte into the Event Status Enable ESE register See Event Status Enable Register ESE in Chapter 5 Parameter lt value gt decimal equivalent of the ESE byte 0 to 255 Example ESE 140 Load decimal 140 binary 10001100 to enable bits 7 PON 3 DDE and 2 QYE ESE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Event Status Enable query Return the contents of the Event Status Enable ESE register See Event Status Enable Register ESE in Chapter 5 Response value decimal equivalent of the ESE byte 0 to 255 Example ESE returns 133 Return decimal 133 binary 10000101 when bits 7 PON 2 QYE 1 OPC are enabled ESR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Event Status Register query Return the contents of the Event Status Register ESR and clears the registe
266. e selecting must match the RS 232 parameters of the UUT This port operates independently whether the 55004 Calibrator is controlled from the IEEE 488 port or from the RS 232 Host serial port See Figures 5 1 and 5 2 5 15 5500A Operator Manual Turn the 5500A Calibrator power on You may operate the calibrator during warmup but specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete Press the key on the 5500A Calibrator front panel Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to configure the UUT serial port to match the settings of the UUT RS 232 port The factory defaults shown below in bold are 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Other parameters include flow control STALL SPECS SETUP FUNCTHS ISI 2 5 B9 5 THF pM OUTPUT DISPLAY REMOTE itz SETUP SETUP SETUP ISI 2 2 5 BS Y HOST HOST WUT gpib SETUP SETUP SETUF 2 2 i5 BS STALL 7600 on ok F nane En CAL SHO IHSTMT UTILITY 8 DATA 1 STOP BITS BIT IS 4 2 2 5 he OOE nane 3 nane add 600 rts cts even 1200 2400 45000 7600 gl45f eps 5 12 Remote Operation 5 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Choose or adapt one of the following test procedures to test the 5500A Calibrator RS 232
267. e the timing response of your oscilloscope To access the MARKER menu press the softkey under MODE until marker appears Output at SCOPE TRIG MODE terminal 50Q off marker sine off volt spike fal edge square 10 levsine 5420 100 marker wavegen video pulse meas 7 overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu Each option in the MARKER menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 50 Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press oPR To disconnect the signal press stev 5500A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 8 41 e SHAPE Indicates the type of waveform Depending on frequency setting possible selections are sine spike square 50 duty cycle square wave and sq20 20 duty cycle square wave Note that selections available under SHAPE depend on the selected marker period frequency as follows Selection Period Frequency sine 10 ns 2 ns 100 MHz 500 MHz spike ss 20ns 0 2 Hz 50 MHz square 5s 10ns 0 2 Hz 100 MHz 20 20 ms 100 ns 50 kHz 10 MHz e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to cycle through the trigger settings The available trigger settings are off 1 trigger signal appears on each marker 10 trigger signa
268. e unless noted Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 year Spec Value V p p Hz Value Hz Hz Hz 2 1 10 0 000025 2 1 100 0 00025 2 1 1000 0 0025 2 1 10000 0 025 8 42 5500A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 8 60 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 MQ Output Impedance Table 8 19 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 MQ output impedance 1 Year Spec Wave Shape Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation Value V p p Hz Value V p p V p p V p p square 0 0018 1000 0 000154 square 0 0119 1000 0 000457 square 0 0219 1000 0 000757 square 0 022 1000 0 00076 square 0 056 1000 0 00178 square 0 0899 1000 0 002797 square 0 09 1000 0 0028 square 0 155 1000 0 00475 square 0 219 1000 0 00667 square 022 1000 0 0067 square 0 56 1000 0 0169 square 0 899 1000 0 02707 square 0 9 1000 0 0271 square 375 1000 0 1126 square 6 59 1000 0 1978 square 66 1000 0 1981 square 30 8 1000 0 9241 square 55 10 1 6501 square 55 100 1 6501 square 55 1000 1 6501 square 55 10000 1 6501 sine 0 0018 1000 0 000154 sine 0 0219 1000 0 000757 sine 0 0899 1000 0 002797 sine 0219 1000 0 00667 sine 0 899 1000 0 02707 sine 6 59 1000 0 1978 sine 55 1
269. ear panel serial data RS 232 ports SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT Figure 1 2 Each port is dedicated to serial data communications for operating and controlling the 5500A during calibration procedures For complete information on remote operations see Chapter 5 Introduction and Specifications 1 Operation Overview The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial data port connects a host terminal or personal computer to the 5500A You have several choices for sending commands to the 5500A you can enter commands from a terminal for example using the Terminal accessory from Windows using a PC you can write your own programs using BASIC or you can run optional Windows based software such as 5500 CAL or MET CAL The 5500 CAL software includes more than 200 example procedures covering a wide range of test tools the 5500A can calibrate See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the RS 232 commands The SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial data port connects a UUT to a PC or terminal via the 5500A see Figure 1 2 This pass through configuration eliminates the requirement for two COM ports at the PC or Terminal A set of four commands control the operation of the SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the UUT_ commands 000 000 a OC 5500 Terminal RS 232 Remote Operation u
270. ecifications and Calculating Power Uncertainty 1 25 AC Power 45 Hz to 65 Hz Specification Summary PF 1 Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C of Watts output Voltage Range Current Range 5500A Calibrator KoA e O a 90 days 5725A Amplifier oosa 031021999A 22104499A astona 5500A Calibrator 5725A Amplifier 5500A Calibrator 3310 329 999 mV 90 days 330 mV to 1020 V 33 mV to 1020 V 1 year 330 mV to 1020 V 1 To determine uncertainty with more precision see Calculating Power Uncertainty Introduction and Specifications 1 General Specifications 1 26 Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications Voltages Voltages Power Factor Frequency NORMAL Currents AUX PF no __ 1 to 5 kHz 3 3 to 1020 v T 33 mA to 2 19999 A 100 mV to 3 3 V 11 5 to 10 kHz 3 3 to 1020 v 2 33 mA to 329 99 mA 1103 3 v P 1 ln dual volts voltage is limited to 3 3 to 500 V in the NORMAL output 2 dual volts voltage is limited to 3 3 to 250 V in the NORMAL output e The range of voltages and currents shown in DC Voltage Specifications DC Current Specifications AC Voltage Sine Waves Specifications and AC Current Sine Wave Specifications are available in the power and dual output modes except minimum current for ac power is 0 33 mA However only those limits shown in this table are specified See Calculating Power Uncertainty to determine the unc
271. ection is used for all values of resistance and capacitance and is usually selected when the analog meter or DMM level of accuracy does not require the additional precision This is the default condition whenever an ohms or capacitance output is made following an output that was not ohms or capacitance Front Panel Operation Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4 17 Cable Connection Instructions Table 4 2 indicates a figure reference for each type of connection between a UUT and the 5500A Calibrator referencing Figures 4 1 through 4 10 When calibrating Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs using the three terminal connection shown in Figure 4 9 be sure the test leads have identical resistances to cancel any errors due to lead resistance This can be accomplished for example by using three identical test lead lengths and identical connector styles When calibrating thermocouples it is especially important to use the correct hookup wire and miniconnector between the Calibrator front panel TC jack and the UUT You must use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of thermocouple For example if simulating a temperature output for a K thermocouple use K type thermocouple wire and K type miniconnectors for the hookup To connect the calibrator to a UUT proceed as follows 1 If the calibrator is turned on press to remove the output from the calibrator terminals 2 Make the connections to the UUT by selecting
272. ectric shock Refer to the manual see the Index for references L GROUND Ground terminal to chassis earth AN Attention Refer to the manual see the Index for references This symbol indicates that information about usage of a feature is contained in the manual This symbol appears on the rear panel ground post and by the fuse compartment AC POWER SOURCE The instrument is intended to operate from an ac power source that will not apply more than 264V ac rms between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is required for safe operation USE THE PROPER FUSE To avoid fire hazard for fuse replacement use only the specified unit 110 or 120 V operation 2 5 ampere 250 volt time delay 220 or 240 V operation 1 25 ampere 250 volt time delay GROUNDING THE INSTRUMENT The instrument utilizes controlled overvoltage techniques that require the instrument to be grounded whenever normal mode or common mode ac voltages or transient voltages may occur The enclosure must be grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord or through the rear panel ground binding post USE THE PROPER POWER CORD Use only the power cord and connector appropriate for the voltage and plug configuration in your country Use only a power cord that is in good condition Refer power cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel
273. ed frequency range to 350 MHz is provided but flatness is not specified Amplitude is limited to 3 V for frequencies above 250 MHz 2 Within one hour after reference amplitude setting provided temperature varies no more than 5 C 3 At frequencies below 120 kHz the resolution is 10 Hz For frequencies between 120 kHz and 999 9 kHz the resolution is 100 Hz 4 25 ppm 15 mHz for frequencies of 1 MHz and below 8 62 5500A SC300 Option Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications 8 8 81 Time Marker Function Specifications Time Marker into 50 5 s to 100 us 50 us to 2 us 1 us to 20 ns 10 ns to 2 ns 1 Year Absolute 25 1 1000 25 t 15 000 25 ppm 25 Uncertainty tcal 5 3 1 1 Wave pulsed pulsed pulsed sine sawtooth sawtooth sawtooth Typical Output level gt 1V pk gt 1V pk gt 1V pk gt 2 V p p 2 Sequence cardinal points 5 2 1 from 5 s to 2 ns e g 500 ms 200 ms 100 ms Adjustment Range At least 10 around each cardinal point Resolution 4 digits 25 75 ppm 2 The 2 ns time marker is typically gt 0 5 V p p 3 Away from the cardinal points add 50 ppm to uncertainty 1 t is the time in seconds Examples At 5 s the uncertainty is 5 025 ppm At 50 us the uncertainty is 8 82 Wave Generator Specifications Wave Generator Characteristics Square Wave Sine Wave and Triangle Wave
274. eference is 5725 Verify the annunciator is on The boost current appears on the 5725A CURRENT OUTPUT terminals e Selecting a 5725A Amplifier boost current gt 2 2 A Enter the desired current Select boost with the OUTPUT softkey Source preference unimportant Verify the annunciator is on and cannot be toggled off The boost current appears on the 5725A CURRENT OUTPUT terminals 4 47 5500A Operator Manual 4 48 4 45 Selecting a5725A Amplifier boost voltage between 100 1000 V within the 5500A Calibrator frequency capabilities Enter the desired voltage Verify source preference is 5725 Verify the annunciator is on The boost voltage appears on the 5500A front panel NORMAL terminals Selecting a5725A Amplifier boost current 1 5 2 19999 A and a 5500A Calibrator voltage 100 1000 V Enter the desired current and voltage Select boost with the I OUT softkey Verify source preference is 5725 Verify the annunciator is on The boost current appears on the 5725A CURRENT OUTPUT terminals The voltage appears on the 5500A front panel NORMAL terminals Selecting a5725A Amplifier boost voltage 100 1000 V and any 5500A current Enter the desired current and voltage Select aux with the I OUT softkey Verify source preference is 5725 Verify the annunciator is on The boost voltage appears on the 5500A front panel NORMAL terminals The current appears on the 5500A front panel AUX terminals Selecting 5
275. el producto con una descripci n del problema surgido a portes y seguros pagados por anticipado FOB en Destino al Servicio Oficial Fluke autorizado m s pr ximo Fluke no asume ning n riesgo por los dafios en tr nsito Tras la reparaci n en concepto de garant a el producto ser devuelto al Comprador previo pago del transporte FOB en Destino Si Fluke decide que la aver a ha sido causada por una mala utilizaci n alteraci n accidente o manejo o manipulaci n anormales Fluke har una estimaci n de los costes de reparaci n y solicitar autorizaci n antes de comenzar el trabajo Tras la reparaci n el producto ser devuelto al Comprador previo pago del transporte y se facturar n al Comprador los gastos en concepto de reparaci n y de transporte para su devoluci n FOB en el Punto de env o ESTA GARANT A SE CONCEDE A T TULO NICO Y EXCLUSIVO DEL COMPRADOR Y SUSTITUYE A TODAS LAS DEMAS GARANTIAS EXPRESAS O IMPLICITAS INCLUYENDO PERO SIN LIMITARSE A NINGUNA GARANTIA IMPLICITA DE COMERCIABILIDAD O IDONEIDAD PARA UN FIN O UN USO DETERMINADOS FLUKE NO SE RESPONSABILIZARA DE PERDIDAS O DANOS ESPECIALES INDIRECTOS IMPREVISTOS O CONTINGENTES INCLUIDA LA PERDIDA DE DATOS YA SEAN PRODUCTO DE VIOLACION DE LA GARANTIA O YA SEA EN RELACION CON UN CONTRATO POR RESPONSABILIDAD CIVIL EXTRACONTRACTUAL CONFIANZA O EN CUALQUIER OTRA FORMA Dado que algunos pa ses o estados no permiten la limitaci n del plazo de una garant a imp
276. elf test Example TST returns 1 Return 1 when self test is successful UUT FLUSH X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Flush UUT Receive Buffer command Flush the UUT receive buffer for data received from the UUT over the 5500A Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port The command may be sent over gpib or RS 232 ports but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation Parameter None Example UUT_FLUSH Flush the 5500A Calibrator receive data buffer for the UUT UUT_RECV X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Return UUT Receive Data command Return data from the UUT in IEEE 488 2 Standard format over the 5500A Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port The command may be sent over gpib RS 232 ports but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation Response data binary block data in definite length format from UUT Example UUT RECV returns 211 1 99975 0 Return for example a measurement from the UUT The format is 2 two numbers follow 11 characters follow 1 99975 0 11 characters Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries UUT_SEND X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Send UUT Data command Send data to the
277. elow To increase the frequency slowly fine tune it using the rotary knob To do this press to place a cursor in the Output Display Press again to place it in the frequency field and use the and K keys to move it to the digit you want to change Then change the value by turning the rotary knob Continue making small increments in the frequency until the signal drops to 4 2 divisions At 4 2 divisions the signal is at the frequency that corresponds to the 3 dB point gl010i bmp Remove the input signal by pressing 5187 Repeat this procedure for the remaining channels on your oscilloscope 8 79 5500A Operator Manual 8 106 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope The horizontal deflection time base of an oscilloscope is calibrated using a method similar to the vertical gain calibration A time marker signal is generated from the 5520A and the signal s peaks are matched to the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope 8 107 The Time Marker Function The Time Marker function which is available through the Marker menu lets you calibrate the timing response of your oscilloscope To access the Marker menu press the softkey under MODE until marker appears Output at SCOPE TEIG terminal 50 OFF marker OFF marker 1 la valt Al edae devs ime gl033i eps Each option in the Marker menu is described below e OUTPUT
278. emulated by the 55004 Calibrator The default is The 10 setting is used as an accurate output voltage source for customer supplied linearizations Note The u indicator that occasionally appears in the Output Display indicates an internal adjustment to the measured isothermal block temperature and is normal If it appears for more than 10 seconds nominal or if it appears to flash continuously check to see that you are not externally heating the thermocouple miniconnector or wires Setting Temperature Simulation RTD RTDs have a characteristic resistance at specific temperatures The simulated output then is a resistance value based on the selected temperature and type of RTD being simulated To toggle the degree reference between the 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard ipts 68 and the 1990 International Temperature Standard its 90 see Using the Instrument Setup Menu earlier in this chapter Complete the following procedure to set a simulated RTD temperature output at the 5500A front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Note When calibrating Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs using the three terminal connection shown in Figure 4 9 be sure the test leads have identical resist
279. en logically allowed OUT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the output amplitudes and frequency of the 5500A Calibrator Multipliers e g K or M are not used in the response Parameters Response Examples V optional for ac voltage and TC modes DBM optional for ac voltage modes CEL optional for RTD and TC modes Celsius FAR optional for RTD and TC modes Fahrenheit OHM optional for RTD modes ohms primary amplitude value gt lt primary units secondary amplitude value gt lt secondary units fundamental frequency value OUT returns 1 520000E 01 V 0E 00 0 0 00E 00 OUT returns 1 88300 01 0 00 0 4 420 02 OUT returns 1 23000 00 2 34000 00 6 000 01 OUT DBM DBM returns 4 02E 00 DBM 9 60 00 6 000E 01 OUT DBM V returns 4 02E 00 DBM 2 34000 00 6 000 01 OUT returns 1 92400E 06 OHM 0E 00 0 0 00E 00 OUT returns 1 52000 401 1 88300 01 4 420 02 OUT DBM returns 2 586E 01 DBM 1 88300E 01 A 4 420E 02 OUT returns 1 0430E 02 CEL 00 0 0 00 00 OUT FAR returns 2 19740000EK 02 FAR 0E 00 0 0 00EH 00 OUT V returns 4 2740 03 0 00 0 0 00 00 OUT OH
280. encountered 315 DDE FR Must be in OPER at this step E 2 51 51 51 Tas Pac en ee ee ee es es ee Ce ee ee a ee a SR a a a ee UUUUUUUU0UUuUuUuUuuuUuuUuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuUuuug Ed Edi Dd D Dd Dd Dd Dd Dd Dd Dd d Dd Dd Dd Du Dd Dd Dd Dd Dd Dd Dd d Dd Du d Dd xb Dd Dd d Dd d Appendices Open thermocouple for RJ cal Encoder not responding VERS coder not responding COMM coder not responding STAT coder self test failed Queue from 5725A full Message over display R side Unmappable character d d isan ASCII character did not reset got invalid command Internal state error Invalid keyword or choice Harmonic must be 1 50 Frequency must be 0 AC magnitude must be impedance must be Function not availab Value not available Cannot enter watts by itself Output exceeds user limits Duty cycle must be 1 0 99 0 Power factor must be 0 0 1 0 Can t select that field now Edit digit out of range Can t switch edit field now Not editing output now dBm works only for sine ACV Freq too high f
281. ent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example SCE1 returns 4108 Return decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 if bits 12 SETTLED 3 IBOOST and 2 VBOOST are set to 1 ISCR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status Change Register query Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register ISCRO and Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register ISCR1 See Instrument Status Change Register in Chapter 5 for more information Response value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example ISCR returns 4108 Return decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 if bits 12 SETTLED and 3 IBOOST are enabled set to 1 in the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register and bits 12 SETTLED and 2 VBOOST are enabled set to 1 in the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register ISCRO 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register query Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register Response value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example ISCRO returns 4108 Return decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 if bits 12 SETTLED 3 IBOOST and 2 VBOOST are set to 1 ISCR1 X IEEE 488 X RS
282. enu press the softkey under MODE until wavegen appears Output WAVE SCOPE Z OFFSET MODE SCOPE square 1 MO 0 0V wavegen square 1 sine 500 edge tra levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the WAVEGEN menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press srev e WAVE Scrolls through the three types of waveforms that are available You can select a square sine or triangle wave as the output e SCOPE Z Toggles the calibrator s output impedance setting between 50 Q and 1 e OFFSET Displays the offset of the generated wave To change the offset key in the new value and press Using the rotary knob does not change the offset it changes the actual voltage output When you change the offset you must remain within certain limits to avoid clipping the peaks The limit depends on the wave s peak to peak value Specifically the peak excursion equals the absolute value of the offset plus half of the wave s peak to peak value See Wave Generator Specifications at the beginning of this chapter MODE Indicates you in WAVEGEN mode Use the softkey to
283. er IEEE 488 device Each cable has double 24 pin connectors at both ends to allow stacking Metric threaded mounting screws are provided with each connector Appendix D shows the pinout for the IEEE 488 connector RS 232 Null Modem Cables The 8914 001 and RS40 null modem cables connect the 5500A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port to a printer video display terminal computer or other serial device configured as DTE Data Terminal Equipment Appendix D shows the pinouts for the serial connectors RS 232 Modem Cables The 943738 modem cable connects the 55004 SERIAL 2 TO UUT port to a unit under test serial port with DB 9 male connector Appendix D shows the pinouts for the serial connectors 5500A LEADS The optional test lead kit 5500A LEADS consists of four high voltage safety leads red black white yellow thermocouple extension wires thermocouple miniconnectors and thermocouple measuring beads 5725A Amplifier Accessory The Fluke 5725A Amplifier is an external unit operating under 5500A Calibrator control to extend the volt hertz and voltage compliance capability of the calibrator The amplifier adds the following capabilities to the calibrator with no compromise in accuracy e Frequency limits at higher voltage increase to 100 kHz at 750 V 30 kHz at 1100 V limit increased to 70 mA for frequencies above 5 kHz e Capacitive drive increases to 1000 pF subject to the maximum output current A separate set of
284. er line fuse compartment cover Figure 2 1 The allowed line voltage variation is 10 above or below the line voltage setting To change the line voltage setting complete the following procedure 1 Remove the fuse compartment by following the first two steps in Replacing the Fuse earlier in this chapter 2 Remove the line voltage selector assembly by gripping the line voltage indicator tab with pliers and pulling it straight out of its connector Rotate the line voltage selector assembly to the desired voltage and reinsert 4 Verify the appropriate fuse for the selected line voltage 100 V 120 V use 2 5 A 250 V time delay 220 V 240 V use 1 25 A 250 V time delay and reinstall the fuse compartment by pushing it back into place until the tab locks Connecting To Line Power AA Warning To avoid shock hazard connect the factory supplied three conductor line power cord to a properly grounded power outlet Do not use a two conductor adapter or extension cord this will break the protective ground connection Use the rear panel ground terminal for a protective grounding wire if there is any question as to instrument earth grounding The calibrator is shipped with the appropriate line power plug for the country of purchase If you need a different type refer to Table 2 2 and Figure 2 2 for a list and illustration of the line power plug types available from Fluke After you verify that the line voltage selection is set corre
285. er under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Note Since this is a synthesized output be sure the terminal connections from the 5500 to the UUT are LO to LO and HI to Set the UUT to measure resistance on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired resistance output maximum six numeric keys For example 12 3456 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press Press Q The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your resistance entry For example 12 3456 kQ below 12 2456 ke Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 8 9 Press The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical Press to activate the calibrator output The softkeys allow selection of three lead compensation settings and ohms zero OHMS ZERO OF OFF 2 wire 4 OHMS ZERO Press to recalibrate internal circuitry for the ohms function allow several minutes COMP Compensation Applies 4 wire compensation 2 wire compensation or turns compensation off Compensation is available for resistances up to but not including 110 kQ See Four wire versus Two wire Connections earlier in this chapter for more information 4 30 Setting Capacitance Output Complete the following procedure to set a synthesized capacitance output at the front panel NORMAL terminals I
286. erature sensor type when the output is set to a temperature with the TSENS_TYPE a Returns the temperature sensor type Common Commands CLS Clear status Clears the ESR ISCRO ISCR1 the error queue and the RQS bit in the status byte This command terminates pending operation complete commands or OPC ESE Loads a byte into the Event Status Enable register ESE Returns the contents of the Event Status Enable register ESR Returns the contents of the Event Status Register and clears the register IDN Identification query Returns instrument model number serial number and firmware revision levels for the main front panel inguard and 5725A Amplifier CPUs OPC Enables setting of bit 0 OPC for Operation Complete in the Event Status Register to 1 when all pending device operations are complete OPC Returns a 1 after all pending operations are complete This commands causes program execution to pause until all operations are complete See also WAI OPT Returns a list of the installed hardware and software options including any 5725A Amplifiers that are attached PUD Protected user data command This command allows you to store a string of bytes in nonvolatile memory This command works only when the CALIBRATION switch is in the ENABLE position PUD Returns the contents of the PUD Protected User
287. erminal is tied to analog common which may be tied to earth ground or floated with the key Voltages generated by the 5725A may be routed through these outputs The outputs labeled AUX HI and LO source current and low voltages in the dual voltage function These outputs are also used for four wire or remote sensing in the resistance capacitance and RTD functions When the scope option is installed the BNC connectors labeled Scope and Trig Out deliver voltage signals for Oscilloscope calibration The socket labeled TC is used to measure thermocouples and to generate simulated thermocouple outputs Recommended Cable and Connector Types Warning Using standard banana plugs on the calibrator output will expose lethal voltages when not completely inserted into a mating jack Fluke recommends the use of safety shrouded plugs when working with voltages of 33 volts or greater A Caution To prevent possible equipment damage use only cables with correct voltage ratings Cables to the calibrator are connected to the NORMAL and AUX jacks To avoid errors induced by thermal voltages thermal emfs use connectors and conductors made of copper or materials that generate small thermal emfs when joined to copper Avoid using nickel plated connectors Optimum results can be obtained by using Fluke Model 5440A 7002 Low Thermal EMF Test Leads which are constructed of well insulated copper wire and tellurium copper connectors See Chapter 9 Accessori
288. ermocouple type is changed while simulating a temperature output the temperature is changed to 0 C Responses Example B C J K N R 5 T X TC TYPI B type thermocouple C type thermocouple E type thermocouple J type thermocouple K type thermocouple default N type thermocouple R type thermocouple S type thermocouple T type thermocouple 10 linear output returns Return K when the thermocouple type for simulating a temperature output is a K type thermocouple TC_TYPE_D X IEE E 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Type Default command Set the default thermocouple TC sensor type which is saved in the 5500A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands The TC type is set to the default at power on and reset Parameters Example B C J K N R S T X TC TYPI B type thermocouple C type thermocouple E type thermocouple J type thermocouple K type thermocouple default N type thermocouple R type thermocouple S type thermocouple T type thermocouple 10 linear output J Set the thermocouple type default to a type J thermocouple 6 41 5500A Operator Manual 6 42 X
289. ertainty at these points The phase adjustment range for dual ac outputs is 0 to 179 99 degrees The phase resolution for dual ac outputs is 0 02 degree 1 23 5500A Operator Manual 1 27 Phase Specifications 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C Degrees oss 208 1 For 33 to 1000 V output burden current lt 6 mA For 6 to 20 mA burden current 33 to 330 V the phase uncertainty is 0 4 degree 2 For 33 to 1000 V output burden current 2 mA For 2 to 5 mA burden current 33 to 330 V the phase uncertainty is 1 5 degrees 3 For 33 to 1000 V output burden current 2 mA For 2 to 5 mA burden current 33 to 330 V the phase uncertainty is 5 degrees Phase Phase Power Uncertainty Adder due to Phase Error xo Dum Bt 1 000 0 00 0 01 os se os o 8 3 o 99 Not Specified 6 o 000 273 o orm 89 o 1 To calculate exact ac Watts power adders due to phase uncertainty for values not shown use the following formula ae Cos Adder 1000 For example for a PF of 9205 23 and a phase uncertainty of 0 15 the ac Watts power adder is Adder 1000 9525 15 011 Cos 23 1 24 Introduction and Specifications General Specifications 1 28 Calculating Power Uncertainty Overall unce
290. es 4 9 5500A Operator Manual 4 15 4 16 When to Use EARTH The 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal is isolated from the chassis earth ground When it is desired to make a connection between the NORMAL LO terminal and earth ground press the button lighting the button annunciator The default condition is off annunciator not on To avoid ground loops and noise you must have only one ground connection in the system Usually you make all signal ground connections at the UUT and verify the annunciator is off For the 330 range and synthesized resistance and capacitance be sure the annunciator is off Generally is on only for and volts where the UUT is battery operated and completely isolated from earth ground There must however be a safety ground for the 5500A See Connecting to Line Power in Chapter 2 When enabled by the sourced output a softkey LO appears which allows you to tie or open an internal connection between the NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal When tied and is on then both LO terminals are tied to chassis ground Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections Four wire and two wire connections refer to methods of connecting the 5500A to the UUT to cancel out test lead resistance to assure the highest precision of the calibration output Figures 4 1 through 4 3 illustrate the connection configurations for resistance Figures 4 4 through 4 6 illustrate connection configurations
291. ess a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage entry For example 123 456 mV below 8 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 9 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m 10 Press A 11 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage and current entries For example 123 456 mV and 234 567 mA below 123 456 234 267 mh 12 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output maximum five numeric keys Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press the kilo multiplier key Then press the key For example 1 1234 kHz 4 26 Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 13 The Control Display now shows your entries For example 123 456 mV and 234 567 mA at 1 1234 kHz below 14 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 15 Press to activate the calibrator output When changing power output levels you must reenter both voltage and current in either order Hint Enter voltage or current and then a watts entry value using The remaining volts or current value is calculated and displayed Two softkey labels appear on the Control Display
292. ess to activate the calibrator output Front Panel Operation Setting the Output A softkey label for range appears on the Control Display in the dc voltage function auta 558 my auta lacked Range Operating Range Selects autorange auto or lock locked for the present range When auto the default setting is selected the calibrator automatically selects the range that provides the best output resolution When locked is selected the calibrator will not change ranges when you are editing the output The locked selection is usually made when you do not want range changes that may cause a small perturbation in the output e g when checking the linearity of a given multimeter range 4 22 Setting AC Voltage Output You may select an ac voltage output in volts or as a power output in dBm where dBm is 10 log P 001 dBm P is expressed in watts The output range is 1 mV to 1000 V 57 78 to 462 21 dBm When selecting dBm outputs the 5500A calculates dBm assuming a load impedance of 600 Q Therefore the dBm output may be used directly only when calibrating instruments with a 600 input impedance Based on this the formula is 20 log V 0 774597 dBm For example for a voltage output of 2 44949 the equivalent dBm power output is 20 log 2 44949 0 774597 20 log 3 162278 10 dBm Complete the following procedure to set an ac voltage output at the 5500A front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entr
293. essary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The DC Voltage Offset Accuracy test the accuracy of the dc offset function for an ac sinewave output on the NORMAL terminals Nominal ACV Nominal DC Frequency Hz Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V Value V Value uV or 96 VDC 10 mV OV 1 kHz 33 uV 10 mV 50 1 kHz 0 166 100 mV OV 1 kHz 330 uV 100 mV 500 mV 1 kHz 0 166 1V OV 1 kHz 3 3 mV 1V BV 1 kHz 0 166 3 3 V oV 1 kHz 33 mV 3 3 V 45V 1 kHz 0 173 7 25 5500A Operator Manual 7 30 AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset tests the accuracy of the ac output in the presence of a dc offset For this test be sure to ac couple the input to the meter Nominal Nominal Frequency Measured Value Deviation 90 Spec ACV Value V Hz VAC 96 Value V 50 mV 1 kHz 0 716 500 mV 1 kHz 0 101 5V 1 kHz 0 038 45 V 1 kHz 0 048 7 31 Non Operator Fuse Replacement In addition to the operator replaceable line fuse see Replacing the Line F
294. esting the IEBE 488 4 Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure 2 Testing the RS 232 Host Port sss Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure sss sese sese sees Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation via a Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation using Visual Basic Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port Changing between Remote and Local Operation NEEE E Local with Lockout State esee IRCMOLE C aran Remote with Lockout 5 RS 232 Interface Overview 1 8 TEEE 488 Interface Overview esee Usmpe Comtnands iei Ordner EEN IEE Types of Comrmniands ciere ee tee Device Dependent Commands eere Common Commands eese eene rennen Query 85 Dee d cerent deo esae Interface Messages IEEE 488 sese Compound
295. et to 0 the ISCB bit in the Status Byte never goes to 1 The contents of the ISCE registers are set to 0 at power up Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCH and ISCE The bits in the Instrument Status Instrument Status Change and Instrument Status Change Enable registers are assigned as shown in Figure 5 11 Remote Operation 5 Checking 5500A Status 12 11 SETTLED REMOTE UUTBFUL UUTDATA HIVOLT MAGCHG TMPCAL IBOOST VBOOST RPTBUSY SETTLED REMOTE UUTBFUL UUTDATA HIVOLT MAGCHG TMPCAL IBOOST VBOOST OPER Set to 1 when a calibration report is being printed to the serial port Set to 1 when the output has stabilized to within speclfication or the TC measurement has settled and is available Set to 1 when the 5500A is under remote control Set to 1 when data from the UUT port has filled up the UUT buffer Set to 1 when there ia data available from the UUT port Set to 1 when the 5500A is programmed to a voltage above 33 Volts Set to 1 when the output magnitude has changed as a result of another change e g RTD_TYPE This bit is always 0 in the ISR It changes to 1 only in the ISCRO and ISCR1 registers Set to 1 when the 5500A is using temporary non stored calibration data Set to 1 when an auxiliary amplifier is sourcing a current Set to 1 when an auxiliary amplifier is sourcing a voltage Set to 1 when the 5500A is in operate 0
296. eue then remove that error from the queue After obtaining the error code use the EXPLAIN command to view an explanation A zero value is returned when the error queue is empty To read the entire contents of the error queue repeat FAULT until the response is 0 Only system errors appear in the error queue Response lt value gt of the error code Example FAULT returns 539 Return the first error code in the error queue number 539 To view an explanation of the error enter the command EXPLAIN 539 FORMAT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Format command Use with extreme care Restore the contents of the nonvolatile memory device to factory defaults The memory holds calibration constants and setup parameters You lose all calibration data permanently The CALIBRATION switch on the rear panel of the 5500A Calibrator must be set in the ENABLE position or an execution error occurs except for FORMAT SETUP Parameter ALL replaces the whole contents with factory defaults CAL replaces all cal constants with factory defaults SETUP replaces setup parameters with factory defaults Example FORMAT SETUP Replace the setup parameters with the default setup values below The FORMAT ALL command is the same as FORMAT CAL and then FORMAT SETUP The FORMAT SETUP command also clears the PUD string see the PUD command
297. ew steps require specific voltages to be present on the inputs of the Thermometer By using the 10UV C type thermocouple selection of the calibrator you can specify the output voltage on the TC jacks 5 Press 0 and enter Ensure the softkey labeled OUTPUT indicates If not press the OUTPUT softkey until it does 6 Press the TYPE softkey until 10 2 is displayed This selection allows you to specify the voltage on the TC jack 7 Press the TC MENU softkey 4 63 5500A Operator Manual 4 64 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Press REF SRC softkey until external is displayed Press the REF softkey to enter an external reference value Press 0 to set the external reference to 0 C Press PREV MENU to go back one menu level Press oPR Allow the UUT reading to settle and then adjust the T1 offset adjustment R7 for a display reading of 25 2 C 0 1 C Change the calibrator output to 5380 7 C This places 53 807 mV on the tc jacks Allow the UUT reading to settle and adjust R21 for a display reading of 1370 0 C 0 4 C Press on the calibrator to remove voltage from the UUT Disconnect the UUT from the 5500A Power down the UUT by shorting the ON OFF switch grid With an elastomeric switch pad in both hands use the left one to short out the TP2 grid and use the right one to first turn on the instrument and
298. extra spaces or tabs between parameters as desired Extra spaces within a parameter are generally not allowed except for between a number and its associated multiplier or unit Chapter 6 contains examples for commands whose parameters or responses are not self explanatory Remote Operation 5 Using Commands 5 39 Terminators Table 5 9 summarizes the terminator characters for both the IEEE 488 and RS 232 remote interfaces Table 5 9 Terminator Characters Terminator ASCII Character Control Command Language Command Function Number Program Terminator Terminator Carriage Return CR 13 Chr 13 lt Cntl gt n Line Feed LF 10 Chr 10 lt Cnitl gt J Backspace BS 8 Chr 8 gt b Form Feed FF 12 Chr 12 Cntl L M Examples RS 232 Terminal Mode OUT 1 V 60 Hz Enter UUT SEND REMS n Enter UUT SEND 205REMS M Enter M means lt gt RS 232 Computer Mode Comml Output OUT 1 V 60 HZ Chr 10 typical to Visual Basic Comml Output UUT SEND REMSWn Chr 10 IEEE 488 Mode OUT 1 V 60 Hz command only UUT SEND REMS n 5 40 IEEE 488 Interface The 5500A Calibrator sends the ASCII character Line Feed with the EOI control line held high as the terminator for response messages The calibrator recognizes the following as terminators when encountered in incoming data e
299. ey The default is tied Setting AC Power Output Note Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the 5500A via the LO s softkey selection tied For optimum phase performance tie the LO terminals at the UUT At current levels gt 2 2 A tie the terminals at the UUT using heavy gauge wire lt 10 mQ resistance The calibrator produces an ac power output by sourcing an ac voltage on the NORMAL outputs and an ac current on the AUX outputs 4 25 5500A Operator Manual See Setting AC Voltage Output above for information on selecting an ac voltage output in dBm this procedure assumes an ac voltage output in volts Complete the following procedure to set an ac power output If you make an entry error press one or more times to clear the display then reenter the value Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Adapt the voltage and current connections to suit your application Set the UUT to measure ac power on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output maximum six numeric keys For example 123 456 Note At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above nominal you may notice a slight high pitched sound This is normal Pr
300. f the error code similar to but sometimes containing more specific information than the EXPLAIN command The explanation sent in response to this query can contain variables specific to a particular error event See Appendix F for a list of error codes and error messages A zero value is returned when the error queue is empty To read the entire contents of the error queue repeat ERR until the response 0 No Error is returned For terminal users the error queue return for ERR is always 0 No Error because error messages are returned instead of queued Response value error code value string text string explaining the error Example ERR returns 0 No Error Return 0 No Error when the error queue is empty 6 15 5500A Operator Manual ERR UNIT IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled UUT Error Unit Thresh Hold command Choose how UUT error is shown this in nonvolatile Parameter GT1000 UUT error is displayed in above 1000 ppm ppm below GT100 UUT error is displayed in above 100 ppm ppm below GT10 UUT error is displayed in above 10 ppm ppm below PPM UUT error is displayed in ppm always PCT UUT error is displayed in always ERR_UNIT IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled UUT Error Unit Thresh Hold query Returns presently selected values of ERR_UNIT as on
301. f you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value 1 2 Press to clear any output from the 5500A Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Also refer to Cable Connection Instructions for a procedure to null out stray capacitances due to the test cable connections Note Since this is a synthesized output be sure the terminal connections from the 5500A to the UUT are LO to LO and HI to Set the UUT to measure capacitance on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired capacitance output maximum five numeric keys For example 123 45 Press a multiplier key preceded with the key for the desired output For example press then for uf The other multiplier keys include for pf and K for nf Press 4 33 5500A Operator Manual 4 34 7 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your capacitance entry For example 123 45 uf below 8 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 9 Press to activate the calibrator output The softkey in the Control Display labeled COMP allows you to select one of three lead compensation settings COMP Compensation Applies 4 wire compensation 2 wire compensation or turns compensation off Compensation refers to methods of connectin
302. form The value can be adjusted from one to eight divisions The amount denoted by each division is displayed in the V div field Press the softkey under UP to increase the signal s height and press the softkey under DOWN to decrease it Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude The and keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an oscilloscope in a 1 2 5 step sequence For example if the voltage is 40 mV pressing increases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 50 mV Pressing decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 20 mV 5500A Operator Manual 8 29 Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration Procedure The following example describes how to use the VOLT menu to calibrate the oscilloscope s amplitude gain During calibration you will need to set different voltages and verify that the gain matches the graticule lines on the oscilloscope according to the specifications for your particular oscilloscope See your oscilloscope manual for the recommended calibration settings and appropriate gain values Before you start this procedure verify that you are running the SC600 Option in VOLT mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output SCOPE TRIG V DIV MODE 1 MQ DC AC off MENU volt Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the vertical gain 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope making sure th
303. function TC MENUS Thermocouple Menu Shows submenus for thermocouple outputs 4 36 Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 4 32 e UNITS Temperature Units Selects C or F as the temperature unit e REF SRC Reference Source Selects intrnl Internal or extrnl External temperature reference source Select intrnl when the selected thermocouple has alloy wires and you are using the isothermal block internal to the 5500A Calibrator Select extrnl when using an external isothermal block and when the selected thermocouple has copper wires Press the REF softkey to enter the value of the external temperature reference The best accuracy is obtained when you use extrnl and the external isothermal block is maintained at 0 C e REF Temperature Reference Displays the value of the temperature reference When the Reference Source is Internal the display shows the internal reference or NONE if the 5500A is in Standby When the Reference Source is External the display shows the value you entered for external reference TYPE Thermocouple Type Selects the thermocouple type emulated by the 5500A Calibrator The default is The 10 n V C setting is used as an accurate output voltage source for customer supplied linearizations e OUTPUT Temperature Output Device Selects the temperature device thermocouple tc or resistance temperature detector rtd Select tc e TYPE Thermocouple Type Selects the thermocouple type
304. g Voltage and Current 4 52 Sample Applications rennen 4 53 Calibrating an 80 Series Handheld Multimeter 4 54 CADIES 4 55 EARTH Gonn ctions oot MERERI ren 4 56 Testing Meter eie tiere torti isa prede ee I rie denis 4 57 Calibrating the Meter see 4 58 Testing a Model 41 Power Harmonics 4 59 Testing Watts VA VAR 4 60 Testing Harmonics Volts Performance sese ee eee ee 4 61 Testing Harmonics Amps Performance 4 62 Calibrating a Fluke 51 4 63 Testing the Thermometer essere 4 64 Calibrating the Thermometer sse Remote Operation Re II nnna Jal I troductiOn cs ote terere Dp rere S iii 5500A Operator Manual 5 2 5 4 5 5 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 49 5 50 5 51 5 52 Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote IEEE 488 Port Setup Procedure Testing the IEEE 488 Port Control Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Co
305. g the 5500A to the UUT to cancel out test lead resistance NOT capacitance Compensation is available for capacitances of 110 nf and above This softkey will not function below 110 nf See Four wire versus Two wire Connections earlier in this chapter for more information Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 4 31 Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple Note Make sure the thermocouple wire and plug are not affected by extraneous temperature sources For example do not place your fingers on the thermocouple plug or wire when simulating a temperature Thermocouples generate a small dc voltage at specific temperatures The simulated output therefore is a small dc voltage based on the selected temperature and type of thermocouple being simulated To toggle the temperature reference between the 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard ipts 68 and the 1990 International Temperature Standard its 90 see Using the Instrument Setup Menu Complete the following procedure to set a simulated thermocouple temperature output at the 5500 front panel TC connector If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Note You must use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of thermocouple For example if simulating
306. ge Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of current at the 5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals Range Nominal Measured Value A Deviation 90 Day Spec Value or mA 3 3 mA 0 mA 0 00005 mA 3 3 mA 0 19 mA 0 036 3 3 0 19 mA 0 036 3 3 1 9mA 0 013 3 3 1 9 mA 0 013 3 3 3 29 mA 0 012 3 3 3 29 mA 0 012 33 mA 0 mA 0 00025 mA 33 mA 19 mA 0 009 33 mA 19 0 009 33 32 9 0 009 33 32 9 0 009 330 0 mA 0 0033 mA 330 190 mA 0 010 330 190 mA 0 010 330 329 mA 0 009 330 329 mA 0 009 22 0 000044 2 2 219 0 025 2 2 2 19 0 025 11A 0A 0 00033A 11A 11A 0 041 11A 11A 0 041 7 9 5500A Operator Manual 7 10 Resistance Accuracy The Resistance Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of synthesized resistance at the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals For resistances of less than 110 KQ use the 4 wire COMP option For resistances of 110 KQ or higher the COMP option is automatically turned off Nominal Value 0 Measured Value Q Deviation 90 Day Spec m9 or 00 6 7 10 Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check Resistance Accuracy c
307. gger FLUKE 55004 CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX V O SENSE RTD AUX V ane 2 20V PK SCOPE 200V PK gl001f eps Figure 8 1 Oscilloscope Connection Channel and External Trigger 8 18 Starting the SC600 Option Press LED lit to select the SC600 Option The SCOPE menu shown below appears in the Control Display You can press any of the first four softkeys to go directly to the VOLT EDGE LEVSINE and MARKER calibration menus Press the last softkey to go to the OTHER menu also shown below allowing access to WAVEGEN VIDEO PULSE Impedance Capacitance measurement MEAS Z and Overload OVERLD menus Press to return to the SCOPE menu from the OTHER menu This chapter describes each of these menus in detail Select SCOPE mode VOLT EDGE LEVSINE MARKER OTHER Select SCOPE mode or PREV MENU WAVEGEN VIDEO PULSE MEAS A ww 8 13 5500A Operator Manual 8 19 The Output Signal The following description assumes that you have selected VOLT mode from the SCOPE menu The
308. hanges from 6 V rms to 6 V peak to peak This translates to 6 V peak to peak x 0 2886751 1 73205 V rms and the range switches to 0 33 to 3 29999 V The Output Display shows the range change because the sinewave voltage is displayed as 6 0000 the resolution for the 3 3 to 32 9999 V range while the trianglewave is displayed as 6 00000 the resolution for the 0 33 to 3 29999 V range You need to know the active range to enter the correct values for voltage offset because the maximum offsets are range specific For example the maximum peak signal for the 3 3 to 32 9999 V range is 55 V while the maximum peak signal for the 0 33 to 3 29999 V range is 8 V This means in the example above the 6 V rms sinewave could have offsets applied up to the maximum peak signal of 55 V because the active range is 3 3 to 32 9999 V while the 6 V peak to peak trianglewave could have offsets applied up to the maximum peak signal of 8 V because the active range is 0 93 to 9 29999 V See Specifications in Chapter 1 and Entering a DC Offset later in this chapter for more information about dc offset voltages Front Panel Operation 4 Auto Range Versus Locked Range 4 19 Auto Range Versus Locked Range A softkey is provided to toggle between the ranging method auto or locked This feature is available only for single output dc volts and current outputs 330 mv auta auta locked When auto is selected the default setting the cali
309. he Control Display Softkey labels identify the function of the softkey directly below them Several softkey labels together are called a menu The changing menus provide access to many different functions through the five softkeys plus the PREV MENU key See Figure 3 3 Softkey Menu Tree Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 at The STBY Standby key places the 5500A in the standby mode Standby mode is indicated by STBY in the lower left corner of the output display In standby mode the NORMAL and AUX output terminals are internally disconnected from the 55004 The 5500A normally starts up in the standby mode The 55004 automatically switches to standby if one of the following occurs The RESET key is pressed A voltage 2 33 V is selected when the previous output voltage was less than 33 V Output function is changed except when going between ac or dc voltage 33 V Output location is changed An overload condition is detected The OPR Operate key places the 5500A in the operate mode The operate mode is indicated by OPR in the lower left corner of the output display and the lit indicator on the key The EARTH Earth Ground key opens and closes an internal connection between the NORMAL LO terminal and earth ground An annunciator on the key indicates when this connection is made The power up default condition is earth disabled annunciator off The SCOPE Oscilloscope key enables or disables the ScopeCal
310. he cable disconnected at the oscilloscope but still connected at the Calibrator press to cancel the capacitance of the Calibrator Press again to CLEAR OFFSET and return to the capacitance reading Default Impedance Measurement range 50 ohm 8 46 Input Impedance Measurement With MEAS Z mode selected perform the following procedure to measure the input impedance of an oscilloscope 1 Use the MEASURE softkey to select res 50 Q or res 1 termination 2 Connect the SCOPE terminal on the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope 3 Press to initiate the measurement 8 32 5500A SC600 Option 8 Testing Overload Protection 8 47 Input Capacitance Measurement With MEAS Z mode selected perform the following procedure to measure the input capacitance of an oscilloscope 1 Set the oscilloscope for 1 MQ input impedance Note that input capacitance testing cannot be done with 50 Q input impedance Use the MEASURE softkey to select cap With the output cable connected to the Calibrator but not connected to the oscilloscope press the SET OFFSET softkey to cancel stray capacitances Connect the output cable to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope Press to initiate the measurement 8 48 Testing Overload Protection A Caution This test checks the power handling capability of the 50 input of your oscilloscope Before proceeding ensure that the power rating of your oscilloscope can handle the voltages
311. he command REMS to a UUT use UUT SEND REMS n and press Enter Note the use of n which indicates a Carriage Return CR as the end of line character Other characters include Line Feed t Tab Nb Backspace and Form Feed If your UUT commands require an end of line character select one or more of the above 5500A Operator Manual 5 14 The characters UUT_SEND lt uut command gt should have appeared as they were entered If they did not appear on the screen the RS 232 interface between the PC and 5500A Host port is not operating Review the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure and correct the problem If the UUT command does not execute refer to step 3 of the RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure procedure to verify the RS 232 UUT port parameters Also check the cable for UUT connection was a modem not null modem cable Be sure your command was entered correctly had the proper end of line character s if required When finished testing UUT commands select the Exit command from the File menu to close the Terminal accessory Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation using Visual Basic Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 UUT port operation via the RS 232 Host port using a Visual Basic test program This procedure assumes you have already completed Appendix E Creating a Visual Basic Test Program to create the program used for this test Complete the following procedure to test RS
312. he line power fuse is accessible on the rear panel The fuse rating label above the ac power input module shows the correct replacement fuse for each line voltage setting Table 7 1 lists the fuse part numbers for each line voltage setting To check or replace the fuse refer to Figure 7 1 and proceed as follows 1 Disconnect line power 2 The line power fuse and line voltage switch are located in a compartment on the right end of the ac input module To open the compartment and remove the fuse insert the blade of a standard screwdriver to the left of the tab located at the left side of the compartment cover Pry the tab out of the slot and the compartment cover will pop part way out Remove the compartment cover with your fingers The fuse comes out with the compartment cover and can be easily replaced Qv Ux o To reinstall the fuse push the compartment cover back into the compartment until the tab locks with the ac input module Table 7 1 Replacement Fuses Part Number Fuse Description Line Voltage Setting 851931 2 5 A 250 V Time Delay 100 V or 120 V 851936 1 25 A 250 V Time Delay 200 V or 240 V A To ensure safety use exact replacement only 7 3 5500A Operator Manual CHANGING LINE FUSE F7 01 eps Figure 7 1 Accessing the Fuse 7 3 Cleaning the Air Filter A A Warning To avoid risk of injury never operate or power the 5500A calibrator without the fan filter in place
313. her eight bits are always 0 and the lower eight bits represent various conditions of the 5500A Calibrator The ESR is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on and every time it is read Many of the remote commands require parameters Improper use of parameters causes command errors to occur When a command error occurs bit CME 5 in the Event Status Register ESR goes to 1 if enabled in ESE register and the error is logged in the error queue Event Status Enable ESE Register A mask register called the Event Status Enable register ESE allows the controller to enable or mask disable each bit in the ESR When a bit in the ESE 15 1 the corresponding bit in the ESR is enabled When any enabled bit in the ESR is 1 the ESB bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte also goes to 1 The ESR bit stays 1 until the controller reads the ESR or does a device clear a selected device clear or sends the reset or CLS command to the calibrator The ESE 15 cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE The bits in the Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable register ESE are assigned as shown in Figure 5 10 Remote Operation 5 Checking 5500A Status 5 50 Power on This bit is set to 1 if line power has been turned off and on since the last time the ESR was read Command error The 5500A s IEEE 488 interface encountered an incorrectly formed command The comman
314. hich lets you select the scale of the signal in volts per division This menu is described below in detail under The V DIV Menu Indicates you are in VOLT mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes 5500A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 27 The V DIV Menu 8 28 The V DIV menu shown below sets the number of volts denoted by each division on the oscilloscope This menu provides alternative methods for changing the output amplitude that may be more convenient for certain oscilloscope applications To access the V DIV menu press V DIV from the VOLT menu 20 00 mV div up down 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 n 22852222 0 5 1V 2V 5V 10V 20V 50V 100V 01 4 H Each item in the V DIV menu is described below volt edge levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld e V div Changes the number of volts per division in the Output Display so that the values selected correspond to the oscilloscope s input sensitivity VOLTS DIV The available settings shown in the figure above are provided in 1 2 5 step increments Press the softkey under UP to increase the volts per division Press the softkey under DOWN to decrease the volts per division DIV Specifies the number of divisions that establish the peak to peak value of the wave
315. hich type 6 5 5500A Operator Manual 6 6 LOCAL LOCKOUT REMOTE SPLSTR SPLSTR SRQSTR SRQSTR P lt cntl gt p C lt cntl gt c T lt cntl gt t OUT_IMP OUT_IMP SCOPE SCOPE TRIG TRIG FORMAT LIMIT LIMIT ONTIME PR_RPT RTD_TYPE_D RTD_TYPE_D SP_SET SP_SET SRC_PREF SRC_PREF TC_TYPE_D TC_TYPE_D TEMP_STD TEMP_STD RS 232 Host Port Commands Puts the 5500A into the local state Puts the 5500A into the lockout state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 LLO Local Lockout message Puts the 5500A into the remote state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 REN Remote Enable message Sets the serial remote mode Serial Poll response string Returns the string programmed for serial remote mode Serial Poll responses Sets the serial remote mode SRQ Service Request response up to 40 characters Returns the string programmed for Serial Mode SRQ response Control P character prints the serial poll string See SPLSTR for string format Control C character clears the device Control T character executes a group trigger Oscilloscope Commands Sets the output impedance of the SCOPE BNC Returns the output impedance of the SCOPE BNC Sets the calibrator output to an oscilloscope mode Returns the present oscilloscope mode Sets the frequency of the signal at the TRIG OUT BNC Returns the frequency of the signal at the TRIG OUT BNC Setup and Utility Commands U
316. hile saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5500A does not respond to remote commands Source preference is used when an output value is programmed to a value that can be sourced by both the 5500A Calibrator and the 5725A Amplifier Parameters P5500 5500A Calibrator is the source preference P5725 5725A Amplifier is the source preference Example SRC_PREF P5725 Set the source preference to the 5725A Amplifier 6 36 Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries SRC PREF IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Source Preference query Return the source preference from 5500A Calibrator or 5725A Amplifier when 5725A Amplifier is attached Responses P5500 5500A Calibrator is set as the source preference P5725 5725A Amplifier is set as the source preference Example SRC PREF returns P5725 Return P5725 when the source preference is the 5725A Amplifier SRE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Service Request Enable command Load a byte into the Service Request Enable SRE register See Service Request Enable Register SRE in Chapter 5 Since bit 6 is not used decimal value 64 the maximum entry is 255 64 191 Parameter value the decimal equivalent of the SRE byte 0
317. ibrator output for a reading of 35 00 mA on the DMM Verify that the error shown on the control display is within specification Repeat using 350 0 mA Verify the error is within specification Press the blue button on the DMM to switch to ac current measurement Set the calibrator output to 35 0 mA at 60 Hz Verify the error is within specification Repeat the previous step with the following calibrator settings AC Current Frequency 35 0 mA 1 0 kHz 350 0 mA 60 Hz 350 0 mA 1 0 kHz Press on the calibrator and switch the DMM function switch to pA Set the calibrator output to 350 at 0 Hz and press Verify the error is within specification Repeat the previous step using 3500 uA at 0 Hz Press on the calibrator and press the blue button on the DMM to switch to ac measurements Set the calibrator output to 350 0 uA at 60 Hz and press opr Verify the error is within specification Repeat the previous step with the following calibrator settings AC Current Frequency 350 0 uA 1 0 kHz 3500 0 1 0 kHz Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications 12 Test the High current function a Press on the calibrator b Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in Figure 4 17 FLUKE 55004 CALIBRATOR FLUKE 87 TFUE RMS MULTIMETER CID SCOPE 200V PK MAX NORMAL AUX Q SENSE RTD AUXV
318. ignals You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing WS MODE Indicates you are in EDGE mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes 8 19 5500A Operator Manual 8 32 Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure This sample procedure shows how to check the oscilloscope s pulse response Before you check your oscilloscope see your oscilloscope s manual for the recommended calibration settings Before you start this procedure verify that you are running the SC600 Option in EDGE mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output at SCOPE TDPULSE TRIG MODE terminal 50Q off Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the pulse response 1 Connect the Calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope Select 50 Q impedance or use a 50 Q termination directly at the oscilloscope input Verify that the key 15 lit indicating that the signal is connected 2 Alter the voltage setting for the signal so it matches the amplitude value recommended by your oscilloscope manufacturer for calibrating the edge response The default setting is 25 00 mV p p 1 0000 MHz For example on an HP 54522C oscilloscope start with a signal of 1 V 1 MHz Adjust the scale on your oscilloscope to achieve a good picture of the edge 4 Adjust the time base on your oscilloscope to the fastest position available 20 0 50 0 ns div 7 Pu
319. igure 5 6 Typical RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port Connections Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 UUT port operation via the IEEE 488 port using the Win32 Interactive Control utility 1 Complete the IEBE 488 Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5500A for GPIB operation 2 Complete Testing the IEEE 488 Port to prepare the Calibrator IEEE 488 port for testing Before the final step return to this procedure and continue to Step 3 below Goto Start then to the Programs menu 4 Select NI 488 2M software for your operating system From the NI488 2M software menu select Win32 interactive control A DOS window opens with a prompt as shown below 5 19 5500A Operator Manual 32 Interactive Control F gh National Instruments Corporat ion Lopy ant ALL rights re ved Type help for help to quit 6 At the prompt type the following line to activate the IEEE interface card lt ibdev 0 4 0 10 1 0 gt The second number in this line is the primary address of the calibrator If the address has been changed from the factory default change this line accordingly 7 The prompt reads uao From this prompt type lt ibwrt uut_sendb 82 69 77 83 11 13 gt 8 Press the ENTER or RETURN key This command will send REMS lt CR gt lt LF gt to the UUT serial port After the command is entered the Win32 Interactive Control shows the status of the command
320. ing the Calibrator to a UUT 4 9 JUT Port Controlling an Instrument UT FLUSH remote command T remote command T SEND remote command 6 45 T SET remote command 6 46 JU U do JU JUT_SET remote command 6 46 V DIV 8 17 8 70 JUT Connection Temperature Thermocouple VAL remote command Volt Function 8 16 8 69 Specifications 8 6 8 60 V DIV menu 8 17 8 70 Voltage 4 5 1 Selecting Line 2 4 Setting AC Output 4 19 Setting DC output Voltage Gain Calibration 8 16 8 18 8 69 8 71 VVAL remote command Limit Setting WAI remote command 6 47 Warming up the Calibrator 4 4 Watts Performance Text Screen Wave Generator 8 28 8 82 WAVE remote command WAVE remote command Waveform Types 4 40 Waveforms Harmonics 4 42 Setting Harmonics 4 42 Sinewave Squarewave Trianglewave Truncated Wavegen Menu 8 28 8 82 When to Use EARTH Where To Go From Here 1 6 2 remote command ZCOMP remote command 6 49 Zeroing the Calibrator
321. into 50 or 1 MQ Amplitude Range into 1 MO into 50 Q 1 8 mV to 55V p p 1 8 mV to 2 2V p p 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 10 Hz to 10 kHz 396 of p p output 100 uV Sequence Typical DC Offset Range Range 1 2 5 e g 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV 0 to 24096 of p p amplitude 1 10 Hz to 100 kHz Resolution 4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 1 The DC offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms t 25 ppm 15 mHz 8 63 5500A Operator Manual 8 64 8 83 Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function lower than 0 2 Hz 5 5 period or higher than 10 MHz Period 50 p p Time 51015 off 1 21V lt 2ns 0 5 to 0 1 s off 1 10 gt 1 lt 2ns 50 ms to 100 ns off 1 10 100 21V 2 ns 50 to 10 ns off 10 100 21V lt 2ns 5102 5 off 100 21V lt 2ns 1 Divider is internally limited to prevent trigger output from frequencies that are either 8 84 Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function Edge Signal Division Ratio Amplitude into Frequency 50 p p 1 kHz to 1 MHz off 1 21V Typical Rise Time lt 2ns 5500A SC300 Option 8 Oscilloscope Connections 8 85 Oscilloscope Connections Using the cable supplied with the Oscilloscope Calibration Option attach the SCOPE connector on the 5520A to on
322. ion information Zero the 5500A Calibrator before testing by completing Zeroing the Calibrator in Chapter 4 The performance tests have reserved columns for recording the Measured Value and Deviation 7 7 DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL The DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of dc voltage at the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals Range Nominal Value Measured Value Deviation 90 Day Spec uV or 96 330 mV 0 0000 mV 3 0 uV 330 mV 329 mV 0 005995 330 mV 329 mV 0 005995 3 3 V 0 000 mV 5 uV 3 3 V 3 29 V 0 0042 3 3 V 3 29 V 0 0042 33 V 0 00 mV 50 uV 33 V 32 9 V 0 0042 33 V 32 9 V 0 0042 330 V 50 V 0 0055 330 V 329 V 0 0047 330 V 50 V 0 0055 330 V 329 V 0 0047 1020 V 334 V 0 0049 1020 V 1020 V 0 0046 1020 V 334 V 0 0049 1020 V 1020 V 0 0046 7 7 5500A Operator Manual 7 8 Voltage Amplitude Accuracy AUX The DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of dc voltage at the 5500A Calibrator front panel AUX terminals in the presence of a lower voltage at the NORMAL terminals Nominal Value Nominal Value Measured Value Deviation 90 Day Spec NORMAL AUX AUX V or mV 3V 0 0 350 mV 3V 329 mV 0 1365 3V 329 mV 0 1365 3V 0 33 V 0 136195 3V 3 29 V 0 0407 3V 3 29 V 0 0407 7 8 Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check 7 9 DC Current Amplitude Accuracy The DC Volta
323. isplay appears on the Control Display showing the difference between the original reference output and the new output Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 G GO amp The 4 and K keys adjust the magnitude of changes by moving the highlighted digit The key allows you to move from voltage or current to frequency and back In practice for voltage and current outputs the knob and arrow keys are used to adjust output until the UUT reads correctly The error display then displays UUT deviation from the reference The POWER Primary Power switch turns the power on and off The switch is a latching push push type When the switch is latched power is applied TRIG OUT The TRIG OUT Trigger Out key sets the external trigger when in the Scope mode If the 5500A is not in the scope mode when the Trigger Out key is pressed the beeper will sound The DIV Divide key immediately changes the output to one tenth the reference value not necessarily the present output value if the value is within performance limits In the SCOPE mode the DIV key changes the output to the next lower range The MULT Multiply key immediately changes the output to ten times the reference value not necessarily the present output value if the value is within performance limits This key sets the 5500A to standby if this change is from below 33 V In the SCOPE mode the MULT key changes the output to the next higher range MEAS
324. istics Frequency Range Rise Time Leading Edge Aberrations Typical Duty Cycle 4 5 mV to 2 75 V 4 digits 10 around each sequence value indicated below 5 mV 10 mV 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V 1 kHz to 1 MHz 25 ppm of setting 15 mHz lt 400 ps within 10 ns 10 to 30 ns after 30 ns 45 to 55 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty teal 5 C 2 of output 200 uV lt 3 of output 2 mV lt 1 of output 2 mV lt 0 5 of output 2 mV 5500A Operator Manual 8 80 Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Range Characteristics into 50 Q 50 kHz Reference 50 kHz to 100 MHz 100 to 300 MHz 1 Amplitude Characteristics 5 mV to 5 5 V 1 lt 100 mV 3 digits gt 100 mV 4 digits Range p p Resolution Adjustment Range continuously adjustable 2 of output 3 5 of output 4 of output 200 uV 300 uV 300 uV 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 2 0 of output 100 uV Flatness relative to 50 kHz not applicable 1 5 of output 100 uV Short term Stability lt 1 2 Frequency Characteristics Resolution 10 kHz 3 1 Year Absolute 25 ppm 25 ppm 4 Uncertainty 15 mHz teal 5 C Distortion Characteristics 2nd Harmonic lt 35 dBc 3rd and Higher Harmonics lt 40 dBc 1 Extend
325. l cita ni la exclusi n o limitaci n de da os imprevistos o contingentes las limitaciones y exclusiones de esta garant a pueden no ser de aplicaci n a todos los compradores Si alguna disposici n de esta Garant a es considerada nula o no aplicable por un tribunal de justicia competente dicha consideraci n no afectar a la validez o aplicaci n de las dem s disposiciones Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B V P O Box 9090 P O Box 1186 Everett WA 98206 9090 5602 B D Eindhoven ESTADOS UNIDOS Holanda CAUTION This is an IEC safety Class 1 product Before using the ground wire in the line cord or rear panel binding post must be connected to an earth ground for safety Interference Information This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interference to radio and television reception It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
326. l appears on every tenth marker and 100 trigger signal appears at every 100th marker TRIG You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing 719 Indicates you are in MARKER mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes Default marker values are 1 000 ms SHAPE spike The and keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an oscilloscope in a 1 2 5 step sequence For example if the period is 1 000 ms pressing increases the period to the nearest cardinal point which is 2 000 ms Pressing decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 500 us Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This sample procedure uses the Time MARKER function to check the horizontal deflection time base of your oscilloscope See your oscilloscope s manual for the exact time base values recommended for calibration Before you begin this procedure verify that you are in MARKER mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu MODE marker Output at SCOPE SHAPE terminal 500 Spike Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the time base 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope Select 50 impedance or use an external 50 Q termination Make sure the oscilloscope is dc coupled 2 Apply a time marker value according to the recommended calibration settings in your oscilloscope
327. lable The MAV bit is set to 1 whenever data is available in the 5500A s IEEE 488 interface output buffer Error available An error has occurred and an error is available to be read from the error queue by using the ERR query One or more enabled ISCR bits are 1 F5 05 eps Figure 5 9 Serial Poll Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable SRE Service Request SRQ Line IEEE 488 Service Request SRQ is an IEEE 488 1 bus control line that the 5500A Calibrator asserts to notify the controller that it requires some type of service Many instruments can be on the bus but they all share a single SRQ line To determine which instrument set SRQ the Controller normally does a serial poll of each instrument The calibrator asserts SRQ whenever the RQS bit in its Serial Poll Status Byte is 1 This bit informs the controller that the calibrator was the source of the SRQ RS 232 Remote operations using the RS 232 interface emulate the IEEE 488 SRQ line by sending the SRQSTR string over the serial interface when the SRQ line is set See the SROSTR command description in Chapter 6 for more information The 5500A Calibrator clears SRQ and RQS whenever the controller host performs a serial poll sends CLS or whenever the MSS bit is cleared The MSS bit is cleared only when ESB and ISCB are 0 or they are disabled by their associated enable bits in the SRE register being set to 0 Service Request Enable Register SRE
328. lay shows the difference between the reference value the value you originally entered and the edit value the value shown in the Output Display displaying error difference in parts per million ppm This allows you to edit the output such that the UUT displays the expected value and thus give an indication of the UUT accuracy For example an edited difference of 00030 volts for an output of 10 00000 V represents 00030 10 00000 000030 or 30 parts per million The sign is negative 30 0 ppm because the output necessary to display 10 00000 at the UUT shows the UUT is reading below the output value When the reference is negative the error sign is relative to the magnitude For example if the reference is 10 00000 V and the output display is 10 00030 the error is 30 ppm Using Multiply and Divide The 5500A output value or reference value if you have edited the output can be multiplied by a factor of 10 by pressing the key Similarly the output value or reference value if you have edited the output can be divided a factor of 10 by pressing the key The output will be placed in STBY Standby if the multiplied value exceeds 33V Press the key if you wish to continue This feature is useful for UUTs with ranges organized in decades 4 50 Setting Output Limits An output limit feature is available to help prevent accidental damage to a UUT from overcurrent or overvoltage conditions This feature allows you to preset the maximu
329. lear all the errors 400 PRINT 6 ERR 410 INPUT 6 A AS 420 IF A 0 THEN GOTO 500 CHECK FOR ERRORS READ IN THE ERROR NO MORE ERRORS 430 PRINT Error 5 PRINT ERROR AND EXPLANATION 440 GOTO 400 500 END Writing an SRQ and Error Handler It is good practice to include fault error handling routines in your applications The following sample program lines show a method for halting program execution on occurrence of an SRQ Service Request on the bus checking to see if the calibrator is the source of the SRQ retrieving its fault messages and acting on the faults You should modify and extend this code as necessary for your application If you want to use SRQs first use the SRE ESE and ISCE commands to enable the desired event Refer to Checking 5500A Status for more information 10 INIT PORTO IFC the bus 20 CLEAR PORTO DCL the bus 30 INITIALIZE THE 5500A SRQ HANDLER 40 PRINT 6 SRE 8 Enable STB EAV error available 00 Install SRQ handler 50 ON SRQ GOTO 11 60 of the application goes here 100 Bus SRQ handler 110 CLEAR PORTO Make sure devices are not confused 120 IF SPL 6 AND 64 THEN GOSUB 1200 If STB ROS call SRO 130 EST OTHER DEVICES ROS BITS IF DESI
330. lel system throughput is faster than serial system throughput The controller in an IEEE 488 system is typically a MS DOS compatible personal computer PC equipped with one or more 488 ports You can write your own computer programs for system operation using the command set or you can purchase optional Fluke calibration software MET CAL or 5500 and property management software MET TRACK Typical 488 configurations are shown in Figure 5 1 The configuration showing the PC with two 488 ports is used with MET CAL which prefers UUTs on a separate IEEE 488 port You can also piggy back the connectors on a single IEEE 488 port RS 232 The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port connects the PC and 5500A Calibrator while the SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port acts as a pass through port passing commands from the PC to UUT via the 5500A Calibrator You can write your own computer programs using the command set or operate the PC as a terminal and enter individual commands or you can purchase optional Fluke MET CAL or 5500 CAL software for RS 232 system operations Typical RS 232 remote configurations are shown in Figure 5 2 After configuring the IEEE 488 or RS 232 port for remote operation you are ready to begin using the command set The operation of the command set is described under Using Commands in this chapter A summary of remote commands are listed in Chapter 6 Remote Commands Setting up the
331. lse aberrations gl007i eps 5 Verify that your oscilloscope exhibits the proper rise time and pulse aberration characteristics 6 Remove the input signal by pressing 8 20 5500A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 33 Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser You can use the calibrator to drive a tunnel diode pulser Fluke Part Number 606522 or Tektronix 067 0681 01 or equivalent allowing you to check for pulse edge rise times as fast as 125 ps The calibrator sources a maximum pulser drive signal of 100 V p p at 100 kHz The recommended and default output setting is 80 V p p at 100 kHz Perform the following procedure to use a tunnel diode pulser 1 Connect the calibrator tunnel diode pulser and oscilloscope as shown in Figure 8 2 2 With the SC600 Option in EDGE mode press the TDPULSE softkey to 3 Press opr 4 Rotate the control on the pulser box to the minimum setting necessary to trigger a reading FLUKE 5500A CALIBRATOR SCOPE AUX NORMAL A Q SENSE 200V RID AUX V Re op gl008f eps Figure 8 2 Tunnel Diode Pulser Connections
332. ly 15 20 000 Hz artifact standard An object that produces or embodies a physical quantity to be standardized for example a Fluke 732A dc Voltage Reference Standard base units Units in the SI system that are dimensionally independent AII other units are derived from base units The only base unit in electricity is the ampere A 1 5500A Operator Manual buffer 1 An area of digital memory for temporary storage of data 2 An amplifier stage before the final amplifier burden voltage The maximum sustainable voltage across the terminals of a load compliance voltage The maximum voltage a constant current source can supply control chart A chart devised to monitor one or more processes to detect the excessive deviation from a desired value of a component or process crest factor The ratio of the peak voltage to the rms voltage of a waveform with the dc component removed dac digital to analog converter A device or circuit that converts a digital waveform to an analog voltage dBm A reference power level of 1 mW expressed in decibels derived units Units in the SI system that are derived from base units Volts ohms and watts are derived from amperes and other base and derived units displacement power factor Refers to the displacement component of power factor the ratio of the active power of the fundamental wave in watts to the apparent power of the fundamental wave in volt amperes distortion
333. m positive and negative allowable voltage or current output Entry limits you set prevent any output greater than the limit from being activated by entry through the front panel keys or the output adjustment controls Positive limits for voltage and current set the limits for ac voltage and current Your limit selections are saved in the nonvolatile memory Voltage limits are expressed as rms values and any voltage offsets are ignored Front Panel Operation 4 Setting Output Limits 4 51 Setting Voltage and Current Limits To set voltage and current entry limits proceed as follows 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500 2 Press setur Press the softkey INSTMT SETUP to open the setup submenus 3 Press the softkey OUTPUT SETUP to open the output setup submenus 4 Press the softkey SET LIMITS to open the set limits menu below DISPLAY OR CHANGE ENTRY LIMITS CURRENT 5 To Limit Voltage applies to both dc and ac voltages Press a softkey under VOLTAGE to open the voltage limits menu below We LIM 100G O00 UPPER LOWER We LIP Dp LIMIT LIMIT a Press the Upper Limit or the Lower Limit softkey as desired and enter the new limit b Press then one or more times to return to a previous menu 6 To Limit Current applies to both dc and ac currents Press a softkey under CURRENT to open the current limits menu below T LIM 11 40 UPPER LOWER 1 LIMIT LIMIT a Press the Upper
334. mV 10 Hz 1 22 449 0 mV 10 kHz 1 22 500 0 mV 10 kHz 1 35 1 0 V 100 Hz 2 60 1 0 V 1 kHz 2 60 1 0 V 10 kHz 2 60 2 0 V 10 Hz 5 10 5500A Operator Manual Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 50 2 Load cont Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p Deviation mV 1 Year Spec mV 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 8 114 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into 50 2 Load Nominal Value dc Measured Value dc Deviation mV 1 Year Spec mV 0 0 mV 0 10 5 0 mV 0 11 5 0 mV 0 11 10 0 mV 0 12 10 0 mV 0 12 22 0 mV 0 15 22 0 mV 0 15 25 0 mV 0 16 25 0 mV 0 16 55 0 mV 0 24 55 0 mV 0 24 100 0 mV 0 35 100 0 mV 0 35 220 0 mV 0 65 220 0 mV 0 65 250 0 mV 0 72 250 0 mV 0 72 550 0 mV 1 47 550 0 mV 1 47 700 0 mV 1 85 700 0 mV 1 85 2 2 V 5 60 2 2V 5 60 8 88 5500A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 8 115 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 1 MQ Load Nominal Value dc 0 0 mV 5 0 mV 5 0 mV 22 0 mV 22 0 mV 25 0 mV 25 0 mV 45 0 mV 45 0 mV 50 0 mV 50 0 mV 220 0 mV 220 0 mV 250 0 mV 250 0 mV 450 0 mV 450 0 mV 500 0 mV
335. manual For example to enter 200 ns press 21010 then press ENTER 8 27 5500A Operator Manual Note You may enter the equivalent frequency instead of the time marker value For example instead of entering 200 ns you may enter 5 MHz 3 Set your oscilloscope s time base to show 10 time markers The time markers should align with the oscilloscope divisions as shown in the example below For an accurate reading align the signal s peaks with the horizontal center axis Peaks are aligned with center axis gl011i eps 4 Repeatthis procedure for all time marker values recommended for your oscilloscope Repeat for digital and analog mode as required Some oscilloscopes may need the magnification changed while calibrating in analog mode 5 Remove the signal by pressing 8 42 Testing the Trigger The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on different waveforms can be tested using the wave generator When the wave generator is used a square sine or triangle wave is transmitted and the wave s output impedance offset and voltage can be varied in order to test the triggering capability at different levels Note The wave generator should not be used for checking the accuracy of your oscilloscope 8 28 5500A SC600 Option 8 Testing the Trigger The wave generator is available through the WAVEGEN menu shown below To access this m
336. mation 5500A Operator Manual SETUP Front Panel Key A F3 03 eps Figure 3 3 SETUP Softkey Menu Tree Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 i INSTMT FUTILITY SETUP iFLNCTHS CAL SHOW SPECS A AA A to X W to G toB SHOW SPECS is an online summary of the programmed output specifications SELF i FORMAT i INSTMT i TEST i HV MEM i CONFIG 20 0 A 4 to AG to F toC If self test does not pass error codes are displayed See chapter 7 Maintenance SHOW SOFTWARE j SERIAL SHOW USER VERSIONS innnnnnni REPORT STRING toE to D SERIAL displays the serial number of the instrument When corresponding with the factory always include the serial number of the instrument USER REPORT STRING CONTENTS D SH lst CAL USER REPORT STRING CONTENTS refer to a string
337. mited to 0 C to 50 C These specifications also assume the 5500A Calibrator is zeroed every seven days or when the ambient temperature changes more than 5 C See Zeroing the Calibrator in Chapter 4 of the 5500A Operator Manual Also see additional specifications later in this chapter for information on extended specifications for ac voltage and current The dimensional outline for the 5500A Calibrator is shown in Figure A 43 2 17 muassaasasasaasaaaaaaoaoososososuytl 55004 CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX SCOPE A tn m S E 10 BOO 05 D00 Dow E 7 E DOF CBE fg 47 0 18 5 in ___________ 6 4 2 5 in For Cable Access om002f ewps Figure A 5500A Calibrator Dimensional Outline 1 1 9 5500A Operator Manual 1 15 General Specifications Warmup Time Twice the time since last warmed up to a maximum of 30 minutes Settling Time Less than 5 seconds for all functions and ranges except as noted Standard Interfaces IEEE 488 GPIB RS 232 5725 Amplifier Temperature Performance Operating 0 C to 50 C
338. mmands do not work unless the rear panel CALIBRATION switch is in the ENABLE position FORMAT ALL FORMAT CAL PUD Attempting to use any of these commands with the CALIBRATION switch in the NORMAL position logs an error into the error queue Or it returns the error message if in the RS 232 Terminal Mode Commands for RS 232 Only Commands that are used for the RS 232 interface only are identified in the command graphic by checking the IEEE 488 RS 232 check box 5 29 5500A Operator Manual The IEEE 488 and RS 232 interfaces both send commands to the 5500A Calibrator as data except for those IEEE 488 functions that must be implemented as a message as specified in the IEEE 488 standards For example the RS 232 interface uses the command REMOTE to place the 5500A Calibrator in the remote mode Although the IEEE 488 interface could also send a command REMOTE as data it does not because this is one of the functions that must be implemented per IEEE 488 Standards The relationship between these IEEE 488 messages and the equivalent RS 232 emulation is shown in Table Table 5 6 Commands for RS 232 Only GTL LOCAL command GTR REMOTE command LLO LOCKOUT command SRQ SROSTR command SDC DCL C lt Cntl gt C character clear the device GET T Cntl T character execute a group trigger SPE SPD P Cntl P character print the serial poll string
339. n 8 25 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 26 The VOLT Functions unire nr HE re EISE IS EROR ERN ridges 8 27 The V DIV Men ient t br e eie 8 28 Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude 8 29 Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration Procedure 8 30 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 31 The Edge ena ert 8 32 Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure 8 33 Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser 8 34 The Leveled Sine Wave Function eee 8 35 Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage 8 36 The MORE OPTIONS Menu sse 8 37 Sweeping Through a Frequency sese 8 38 Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure 8 39 Calibrating the Time Base of an 8 40 The Time Marker Function sese 8 41 Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 42 Testing the nnne 8 43 Testing Video 8 44 Verifying Pulse Capture sees eee eee loo po po po Q 8 10 8 11 O 8 11
340. n Chapter 4 under Testing RS 232 Host Operation using Visual Basic and Testing RS 232 UUT Operation using Visual Basic This procedure assumes you have access to the Custom Control Icons in your edition of Visual Basic and creates the least complicated program for RS 232 testing Complete the following procedure to create an RS 232 test program in Visual Basic 1 Open Microsoft Visual Basic from the Visual Basic group displaying the Form1 screen below FF 0b bmp 2 From the Toolbox double click the Command icon creating Command1 button on the Form1 screen Repeat creating a Command2 button Repeat again creating a Command3 button D 1 5500A Operator Manual 3 Separate the Command buttons and resize the form for ease of use below is typical Ff 0a bmp 4 From the Toolbox double click the Communications icon gt placing the icon on the Form1 screen This custom control icon provides complete serial communications capabilities for this program Position the icon anywhere on the Forml screen that is convenient 5 Double click on a clear area of the Form screen to open the Code window for Form1 Enter the code shown below If using COM2 on the PC change the command to Comm1 CommPort 2 Ifnotusing the factory default settings for the RS 232 ports then change the command Settings as required Sub Form Load Comml CommPort 1 if using COM2 enter 2 Comml Settings
341. n EDGE mode Parameters None Response 1 if ON 0 if OFF 8 52 Marker Function Commands TMWAVE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Selects the waveform for MARKER mode Parameters SINE Sine wave 2 ns to 15 ns SPIKE Triangular sawtooth pulse 15 ns to 5 s SQUARE Square wave 50 duty cycle 4 ns to 5 s SQ20PCT Square wave 20 duty cycle 85 ns to 5 s Example TMWAVE SPIKE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the MARKER mode waveform setting Parameters None Response lt character gt Returns SINE SPIKE SQUARE or SQ20PCT 8 53 Video Function Commands VIDEOFMT 488 RS 232 Sequential Selects the format for VIDEO mode Parameters NTSC PAL PALM for PAL M or SECAM Example VIDEOFMT SECAM 8 38 5500A SC600 Option 8 Remote Commands and Queries VIDEOFMT IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the VIDEO mode format Parameters None Response NTSC PAL PALM for PAL M or SECAM VIDEOMARK IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Programs the VIDEO mode line marker location Parameters Line marker number Example VIDEOMARK 10 VIDEOMARK IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the VIDEO mode line marker setting Parameters None Response character SINE SPIKE SQUARE or SQ20PCT 8 54 Function Commands OL TRIP IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the detected state of scope overload pr
342. nce Measurement Specifications Scope input selected 50 Q 1 MO Measurement Range 40 O to 60 Q 500 kQ to 1 5 MQ Uncertainty 0 1 0 1 8 15 Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications Table 8 13 Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications Scope input selected 1 Measurement Range 5 pF to 50 pF 1 Measurement made within 30 minutes of capacitance zero reference Scope option must be selected Uncertainty 5 of input 0 5 pF 1 for at least five minutes prior to any capacitance measurement including the zero process 8 16 Overload Measurement Specifications Table 8 14 Overload Measurement Specifications Source Typical On current Typical Off current Maximum Time Limit DC Voltage indication indication or AC 1 kHz svwev toma sotabie4 stoons 8 12 5500A SC600 Option 8 Oscilloscope Connections 8 17 Oscilloscope Connections Using the cable supplied with the SC600 Option connect the SCOPE output on the Calibrator to one of the channel connectors on your oscilloscope see Figure 8 1 To use the external trigger connect the TRIG OUT output on the Calibrator to the external trigger connection on your oscilloscope To use the external trigger and view its signal with the calibration signal connect the TRIG OUT output to another channel See your oscilloscope manual for details on connecting and viewing an external tri
343. nce between the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL and AUX terminals for ac power and ac dual voltage outputs The NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference The set range is 0 00 to 180 00 degrees with for a leading phase difference and for a lagging phase difference Parameter lt phase value DEG DEG for degree is optional Example PHASE 60 DEG Set the phase difference so the frequency output at the AUX terminals lags the frequency output at the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees PHASE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Phase Difference query Return the phase difference between the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL and AUX terminals for ac power and ac dual voltage outputs Response lt phase value Example PHASE returns 6 000 01 Return 60 when the frequency output at the AUX terminals is lagging the frequency output at the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees 6 29 5500A Operator Manual 6 30 POWER X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Calculate Power Output query Return the equivalent real power for ac and dc power outputs based on the voltage and current settings and power factor ac only If the output is not ac or dc power the return is 0 00 zero watts Response value in watts Example POWER returns 1 0000
344. ncy 8 95 8 122 Marker Generator Function Verification eee eee e 8 96 9 580 8 e 9 1 Introduction iocos e nier Et 9 2 Rack Mount SR eR HERR RR MERI M eR 9 4 9 3 488 Interface Cables sese eee 9 4 RS 232 Null Modem Cables sese 9 5 RS 232 Modem Cables imde eene rea ndn 9 SOSODAULE ADS siirre oaie QU uites Rabe dvi ces 9 7 5725 Amplifier Accessory eee Lindex viii List of Tables Table 2 1 Standard Equipment ccssccssscoessssiceesceesesoonsentesassenscessaetacessnesedeoeccseesonncesees 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke sss eee 3 1 Front Panel Features HT 3 2 Rear Panel 3 3 Factory Default Settings for the SETUP Menus sees sees ee eee 4 1 Factory Defaults for SETUP sess 4 2 Rito eb 4 3 Keys That Exit Error trikino nennen 4 4 Watts Performance Text Screen sese 4 5 Harmonics Performance for Volts Harmonics Screen see 4 6 Harmonics Performance for AMPS Harmonics Screen eee 4 7 Thermocouple Performance sese ee ee eee eee ee 5 2 5 232 TRT ETT TT 5 3 RS 232 Emulation of IEEE 488
345. nel GPIB Serial Message Command Local Remote MLA REN True REMOTE Local with Lockout LLO LOCKOUT Remote Local Go to Local softkey GTL or REN False LOCAL Remote with LLO LOCKOUT Lockout Local with Local REN False LOCAL Lockout Remote with MLA REN True REMOTE Lockout Remote with Local REN False LOCAL Lockout Local with Lockout GTL 5 21 RS 232 Interface Overview The two 5500A Calibrator RS 232 ports are designed in accordance with EIA Electronic Industries Association standard RS 232 C RS 232 is a serial binary data interchange operating from 300 to 9600 baud selectable and distances up to 50 feet The 5500A Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port is configured as DTE Data Terminal Equipment while the SERIAL 2 TO UUT is configured as DCE Data Communications Equipment See Appendix D for RS 232 cable and connector information For detailed information see the EIA standard RS 232 C A summary of RS 232 terms interface lines and mnemonics are shown in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 RS 232 Interface Wiring Mnemonic Description CTS Clear to Send DB 9 Type DB connector 9 pins DB 25 Type DB connector 25 pins DCD Data Carrier Detect DCE Data Communications Equipment DSR Data Set Ready DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTR Data Terminal Ready GND Ground RI Ring Indicator RLSD Received Line Signal Detector RTD Request to Send RX Receive Line
346. nic waveform front panel LO terminal condition and phase e HARMONIC MENUS Harmonic Frequency Menus Opens submenus for selecting harmonic outputs See Setting Harmonics later in this chapter for more information e WAVE Normal Waveform Selects the waveform for the voltage at the front panel NORMAL terminals See Waveform Types later in this chapter for more information e AUX WAVE Auxiliary Waveform Selects the waveform for the voltage at the front panel AUX terminals See Waveform Types later in this chapter for more information e 0 Low Potential Output Terminals front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the 5500A When the front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are tied at the UUT select open with the LO s softkey If the NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are not tied at the UUT select tied with the LO s softkey The default is tied e PHASE Phase Difference Selects the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs See Adjusting the Phase later in this chapter for more information 4 29 Setting Resistance Output Complete the following procedure to set a synthesized resistance output at the 55004 front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapt
347. nput Impedance Verification 5500A SC600 Option 8 Introduction 8 1 Introduction The SC600 Option provides functions that help you maintain your oscilloscope s accuracy by verifying and calibrating the following oscilloscope characteristics 8 2 Vertical deflection characteristics are calibrated and verified The VOLT function lets you compare the voltage gain to the graticule lines on the oscilloscope Pulse transient response is checked and calibrated verifying the accuracy of the oscilloscope s measurement of pulse transitions using the EDGE function Also the calibrator supports even faster pulse response checks using an external tunnel diode pulser Frequency response is checked by verifying the bandwidth using the Leveled Sine Wave LEVSINE function Vertical deflection is monitored until the 3 dB point is observed on the oscilloscope Horizontal time base deflection characteristics are calibrated and verified using the Time MARKER function This calibration procedure is similar to the one for verifying the vertical deflection characteristics except that it checks the horizontal axis The oscilloscope s ability to display capture and measure pulse width is checked using the PULSE function This function allows you to vary both the pulse width and the period The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on different waveforms is checked using the Wav
348. nstructions for unpacking and installing the 5500A selecting the line voltage replacing the fuse and connecting to line power Instructions for cable connections other than line power can be found in the following chapters e UUT Unit Under Test connections Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation JEEE 488 parallel interface connection Chapter 5 Remote Operation e RS 222C serial interface connection Chapter 5 Remote Operation Auxiliary amplifier connections Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Unpacking and Inspection The calibrator is shipped in a container designed to prevent damage during shipping Inspect the calibrator carefully for damage and immediately report any damage to the shipper Instructions for inspection and claims are included in the shipping container When you unpack the calibrator check for all the standard equipment listed in Table 2 1 and check the shipping order for any additional items ordered Refer to Chapter 9 Accessories for more information Report any shortage to the place of purchase or to the nearest Fluke Technical Service Center see Service Information in this section A performance test is provided in Chapter 7 Maintenance If reshipping the calibrator use the original container If it is not available you can order a new container from Fluke by indicating the calibrator s model and serial number Table 2 1 Standard Equipment 2 3 Replacing The
349. nt for your oscilloscope The reference sine wave in this procedure has an amplitude of 6 divisions so that the 3 dB point can be found when the amplitude drops to 4 2 divisions 5500A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope Before you start this example procedure verify that you are running the SC600 Option in LEVSINE mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output SCOPE terminal 500 MODE levsine Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the frequency response 1 Reconnect the signal by pressing the key on the Calibrator Select 50 Q impedance or use a 50 Q external termination directly at the oscilloscope input Adjust the sine wave settings in the Output Display according to the calibration recommendations in your oscilloscope manual For example for the HP 54522C oscilloscope start at 600 mV 1 MHz To enter 600 mV press 6 0 0 Fm V then press enter Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary The sine wave should appear at exactly six divisions peak to peak as shown below If necessary make small adjustments to the voltage amplitude until the wave reaches exactly six divisions To fine tune the voltage press to bring a cursor into the Output Display move the cursor with the 4 key and turn the rotary knob to adjust the value See Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob earlier in this cha
350. nt from 0 01 uA to 11 0 A with output from 10 Hz to 10 kHz DC current from 0 to 11 0 A Resistance values from a short circuit to 330 Capacitance values from 330 pF to 1100 UF Simulated output for three types of Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs Simulated output for nine types of thermocouples Features of the 5500A Calibrator include the following e Automatic meter error calculation and keys that change the output value to pre determined cardinal values for various functions e Programmable entry limits that prevent invalid amounts from being entered 5 4 SSR N 55 4 S S 555 x 4 2 gt UM khon F1 01 eps Figure 1 1 5500A Multi Product Calibrator 5500A Operator Manual 1 4 e Simultaneous output of voltage and current up to 11 kW e Simultaneous output of two voltages e Extended bandwidth mode outputs multiple waveforms down to 0 01 Hz and sine waves to 2 MHz e Variable phase signal output e Standard IEEE 488 GPIB interface complying with ANSI IEEE Standards 488 1 1987 and 488 2 1987 EIA Standard RS 232 C serial data interface for printing displaying or transferring internally stored calibration constants and for remote control of the 5500A e Pass through RS 232 C serial data interface for communicating with the Unit Under Test UUT e Extensive aut
351. nt is observed on the oscilloscope Horizontal deflection characteristics are verified by calibrating the time base using the Time Marker function This calibration procedure is similar to the one for verifying the vertical deflection characteristics except that it checks the horizontal axis The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on different waveforms is checked using the Wave Generator function The menus that implement these functions also include parameters for altering the way the output signal responds to voltage frequency and time settings giving you control of the signal during calibration and providing more methods for observing the signal s characteristics 8 59 5500A Operator Manual 8 77 Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications These specifications apply only to the Oscilloscope Calibration Option General specifications that apply to the 5520A Calibrator can be found in Chapter 1 The specifications are valid providing the 5520A is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1 and has completed a warm up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off up to a maximum of 30 minutes 8 78 Volt Function Specifications Volt Function Signal Square Wave Signal into 50 Q into 1 MQ into 500 into 1 Amplitude Characteristics Range 0Vto 2 21 0Vtoct33V 1 8 mV to 1 8 mV to 2 2 V p p 105 V p p 1 Resolution 100 V 4 digi
352. nt mode of operation Returns OFF if the oscilloscope is TRIG off Parameter Response Table 8 15 SCOPE Command Parameters cont Description Example Oscilloscope VIDEO mode Programs 100 output 1V p p line marker 10 format NTSC FUNC returns VIDEO Examples SCOPE VIDEO OUT 90 Video 90 output SCOPE VIDEO OUT 70 Video 70 output inverse video Oscilloscope PULSE mode Programs 100 ns pulse width 1 000 us period 2 5 V range FUNC returns PULSE Example SCOPE PULSE OUT 50 ns 500 ns RANGE TP8DB Pulse 50 ns pulse width 500 ns period 1 5 V range Oscilloscope Impedance Capacitance measurement MEAS Z mode Programs 50 Q range FUNC returns MEASZ Example SCOPE MEASZ RANGE TZCAP MEAS Z mode capacitance range Oscilloscope Overload mode Programs 5 V dc range FUNC returns OVERLD Example SCOPE OVERLD OUT 7 V RANGE TOLAC Overload 7 V output ac range None character Returns OFF VOLT EDGE LEVSINE MARKER WAVEGEN VIDEO PULSE MEASZ or OVERLD IEEE 488 RS 232 Overlapped Programs the oscilloscope s trigger output BNC Parameters Example OFF Turns the trigger output off Turns the trigger output on Frequency is the same as the signal at SCOPE output DIV10 Turns the trigger output on Frequency is 1 10 of the signal at SCOPE output DIV100 Turns the trigger o
353. nt panel key Parameter None Example STBY Disconnect the selected output from the 5500A Calibrator front panel terminals TC MEAS IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Measure command Select the measure thermocouple mode Parameters CEL Celsius optional FAR Fahrenheit optional Example TC_MEAS CEL Measure the thermocouple temperature that is attached to the 5500A Calibrator TC terminals in Celsius TC OFFSET X 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Temperature Measurement Offset command Add a temperature offset to thermocouple measurements 500 C This command does not apply to thermocouple sourcing Parameters lt value gt CEL offset in Celsius optional lt value gt FAR offset in Fahrenheit optional Example TC_OFFSET 10 CEL Add a temperature offset of 10 C to the thermocouple measurements Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries TC_OFFSET X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Temperature Measurement Offset query Return the temperature offset used for thermocouple measurements 500 C Responses value CEL offset in Celsius optional value FAR
354. nterface 1313 DDE R Service only 1314 EXE R Parameter too long 1315 CME R Invalid device trigger 1316 EXE R Device trigger recursion 1317 R Serial buffer full 1318 EXE R Bad number 1319 EXE R Service command failed E 4 Er EH BH DH PH BH DN pH DH 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1328 1329 1330 CM 1331 DD 1500 DD 1501 DD 1502 DD 1503 DD 1504 DD 1600 DD 1601 DD 1800 DD 1801 DD 65535 DDE FRS FRS FRS SER ZG W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 Appendices binary number d binary block Ba Ba EX Ba Ba Ba To Ba OP Go Sh He Ou In OP EE Un Un d character d decimal number ponent magnitude too large d hexadecimal block d hexadecimal number d octal number o many characters d string ER not allowed while error pending moliance voltage exceeded unt amp over or underload at sink too hot tput current lim exceeded put V or A limit exceeded M transition error measurement failure known boost command BX not responding known error d d is unknown error number E 5 5500A Operator Manual E 6 ESE remote command DN remo
355. ntrol RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure Testing the RS 232 Host Port Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation using Visual Basic Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port Changing between Remote and Local Op Local Stat 2 Local with Lockout State Remote 5 2 2 1 Remote with Lockout State RS 232 Interface Overview IEEE 488 Interface Overview Using Commands sess Types of Commands Device Dependent Commandis Common Commands Query Commandis Interface Messages IEEE 488 Compound Commands Coupled Commands Overlapped Commands Sequential Commandis eration Commands that Require the Calibration Switch to be Enabled Commands for RS 232
356. ntrol the 5725A from the 5500A front panel or by remote commands Refer to Using an Auxiliary Amplifier in Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation for details Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 The IEEE 488 connector is a standard parallel interface for operating the 5500A in remote control as a Talker Listener on the IEEE 488 bus Refer to Chapter 5 Remote Operation for bus connection and remote programming instructions AN Warning To avoid shock hazard connect the factory supplied three conductor line power cord to a properly grounded power outlet Do not use a two conductor adapter or extension cord this will break the protective ground connection Use the rear panel ground terminal for a protective grounding wire if there is any question as to instrument earth grounding The CHASSIS GROUND binding post is internally grounded to the chassis If the 5500A is the location of the ground reference point in a system this binding post can be used for connecting other instruments to earth ground Refer to Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT in Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation for details The AC Power Input Module provides a grounded three prong connector that accepts the line power cord a switch mechanism to select the operating line voltage and a line power fuse See Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation for information on selecting the operating line voltage and fuse rating and replacement infor
357. o Wire Connections 2 122222 Cable Connection Instructions Rms Versus Peak to Peak Waveforms Auto Range Versus Locked Ranges sees Setting the Output aisi ete lee eet Setting DC Voltage Setting AC Voltage Setting DC Current Output essere Setting AC Current Output esee Setting DC Power nene Setting AC Power Setting a Dual DC Voltage Setting a Dual AC Voltage Output seen Setting Resistance Output essere Setting Capacitance Output essere Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple Setting Temperature Simulation RTD eese Measuring Thermocouple 2 Wavelorin tecto rong ege onam 4 1 55004 Operator Manual 4 36 TriangleWaye aioe ee 4 37 Nhupua zi m 4 38 lrumncated Sinewave Eee r a E ie 4 39 Setting Harmonics edere ee erret ie dera anh 4 40 Adjustns the Phase iiber rege eade dine deuce 4 41 Entering a Phase T heiratete 4 42 Entering a Power Factor
358. o an input quantity shield A grounded covering device designed to protect a circuit or cable from electromagnetic interference SI System of Units The accepted International System of Units See also units base units and derived units specifications A precise statement of the set of requirements satisfied by a measurement system or device stability A measure of the freedom from drift in value over time and over changes in other variables such as temperature Note that stability is not the same as uncertainty standard A device that is used as an exact value for reference and comparison standard cell A primary cell that serves as a standard of voltage The term standard cell often refers to a Weston normal cell which is a wet cell with a mercury anode a cadmium mercury amalgam cathode and a cadmium sulfate solution as the electrolyte systematic errors Errors in repeated measurement results that remain constant or vary in a predictable way temperature coefficient A factor per C deviation from a nominal value or range that the uncertainty of an instrument increases This specification is necessary to account for the thermal coefficients in a calibrator s analog circuitry test uncertainty ratio The numerical ratio of the uncertainty of the measurement system or device being calibrated to the uncertainty of the measurement system or device used as the calibrator Also called test accuracy ra
359. of characters entered by the user for reporting purposes Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays F3 04a eps 3 13 5500A Operator Manual SOFTWARE Hain 1 10 Inauard 1 3 REVISIONS Encoder 1 2 5725 Actual revision numbers replace 1 0 for each of the above The 5725 report is for the 5725A Amplifier CPU version or if no 5725A is connected Fn rmat HV Memory ALL i CAL i SETUP A A A Format NV non volatile Memory should be used with caution Changes are non reversible The softkeys function only when the rear panel CALIBRATION switch is set to ENABLE except for the softkey SETUP which is not dependent on the CALIBRATION switch position All sets all calibration and setup constants to factory setting CAL set only calibration constants to factory settings SETUP resets instrument setup to factory default settings see Table 3 3 ERR UMITITMP STO OUTPUT DISPLAY REMOTE 0 15 idiptz amp e8i SETUP SETUP i SETUP 7 lipp 14 10 105 to to H 2l ppm ipts 68 only only TMP STD temperature degree standard refers to its 90 1990 International Temperature Standard factory default and ipts 68 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard j HOST GPIB HOST UUT H i apib SETUP SETUP i SETUP apib toO to K to zerial HOST selects the IEEE 488 gpib factory default parallel port or RS 232 serial port You cannot operat
360. off pulse _ 2 5V off volt 1 0V 1 edge 250 10 levsine 100 mV 100 marker 25 mV wavegen 10 mV video pulse meas 7 overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the PULSE menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press srev AMPL Indicates the output level You can select 2 5 V 1 0 V 250 mV 100 mV 25 mV or 10 mV e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to cycle through the trigger settings The available trigger settings are off 1 trigger signal appears on each marker 10 trigger signal appears on every tenth marker and 100 trigger signal appears at every 100th marker You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing 7219 Indicates you are in PULSE mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes Default Pulse settings are 100 0 ns width and 1 000 ms period To change these values you have several options Usually you will enter values for both pulse width and period Do this by entering the pulse width value with units first followed immediately by the period value and units followed by enter For example you could enter a
361. offset in Fahrenheit optional Example TC OFFSET returns 1 000E 01 CEL Return 10 Celsius when a temperature offset of 10 C has been added to the thermocouple measurements TC 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Open Detection command Activate or deactivate the open thermocouple detection circuit in thermocouple measurement mode Once set the 5500A Calibrator retains the open thermocouple detection circuit setting until power off or reset Parameters ON turn on thermocouple detection circuit default OFF turn off thermocouple detection circuit Example TC_OTCD ON Activate the open thermocouple detection circuit If an open thermocouple is detected this condition is displayed on the front panel TC_OTCD X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Open Detection query Return the status of the open thermocouple detection circuit in thermocouple measurement mode Responses ON thermocouple detection circuit is on OFF thermocouple detection circuit is off Example TC_OTCD returns ON Return ON when the open thermocouple detection circuit is activated TC REF IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Reference command
362. ograms 0 V 0 Hz output at the NORMAL terminals standby Oscilloscope ac and dc VOLT mode Programs 20 mV peak to peak 1 kHz output at the SCOPE BNC output impedance 1 MQ standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns SACV for ac or SDCV for dc Example SCOPE VOLT OUT 4 V 1 kHz ac voltage 4 V peak to peak 1 kHz Oscilloscope EDGE mode Programs 25 mV peak to peak 1 MHz output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns EDGE Example SCOPE EDGE OUT 0 5 V 5 kHz Edge 0 5 V peak to peak 5 kHz Oscilloscope LEVSINE mode Programs 30 mV peak to peak 50 kHz output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns LEVSINE Example SCOPE LEVSINE OUT 1 V 50 kHz Leveled sine wave 1 V peak to peak 50 kHz Oscilloscope MARKER mode Programs the period to 1 ms output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns MARKER Example SCOPE MARKER OUT 2 MS Marker period of 2 ms Oscilloscope WAVEGEN mode Programs 20 mV peak to peak square wave 1 kHz no offset output impedance 1 MQ standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns WAVEGEN Example SCOPE WAVEGEN OUT 1 V 1 kHz Wave Generator 1 V peak to peak 1 kHz 8 35 5500A Operator Manual 8 36 Parameter VIDEO PULSE MEASZ OVERLD SCOPE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the oscilloscope s curre
363. ollowing procedure to test RS 232 Host port operation using the Windows Terminal accessory or equal 1 Complete the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5500A for RS 232 Host port operation Note the RS 232 Host port parameters that you selected in this procedure 2 Connect the selected COM port on the PC to the 5500A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port using a standard null modem RS 232 cable See Appendix D for information on RS 232 cables and connectors 3 Open Windows to the Program Manager screen on your PC Remote Operation 5 Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control 4 Open Terminal from the Accessory group of Program Manager below If a terminal configuration file already exists e g host t xm select the desired file using the Open command from the File menu and go to Step 7 Otherwise go to Step 5 Terminal Untitled BES File Edit Settings Phone Transfers Help F5 0f bmp 5 Select the Communications command from the Setting menu Enter the RS 232 parameters that match those selected at the 5500A Calibrator for the Host port If using the 5500A factory defaults the Communications dialog box for COMI will appear as shown below Select COM as required Click OK 300 800 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Data Bits Stop Bits 05 61 01s Parity Flow Control Connector None Xon Xoff None COM1 Odd Hard
364. omatic internal self testing and diagnostics of analog and digital functions How to Contact Fluke To contact Fluke call one of the following telephone numbers USA 1 888 99 FLUKE 1 888 993 5853 Canada 1 800 36 FLUKE 1 800 363 5853 Europe 31 402 675 200 Japan 81 3 3434 0181 Singapore 65 738 5655 Anywhere in the world 1 425 446 5500 Or visit Fluke s Web site at www fluke com To register your product visit register fluke com Operation Overview The 5500A Calibrator may be operated at the front panel in the local mode or remotely using RS 232 or IEEE 488 ports For remote operations several software options available to integrate 5500A operation into a wide variety of calibration requirements Local Operation Typical local operations include front panel connections to the Unit Under Test UUT and then manual keystroke entries at the front panel to place the calibrator in the desired output mode The front panel layout facilitates hand movements from left to right and multiply and divide keys make it easy to step up or down at the press of a single key You can also review 5500A Calibrator specifications at the push of a button available July 1995 The backlit liquid crystal display is easy to read from many different viewing angles and lighting conditions and the large easy to read keys are color coded and provide tactile feedback when they are pressed Remote Operation RS 232 There are two r
365. ommand has more than one parameter the parameters must be separated by commas For example OUT 1V 2A Numeric parameters may have up 15 significant digits and their exponents can be in the range 1 0E 20 Including too many or too few parameters causes a command error Null parameters cause an error e g the adjacent commas in OUT 1V 2A Expressions for example 4 2 13 are not allowed as parameters Binary Block Data can be in one of two forms Indefinite Length and Definite Length format both IEEE 488 2 standards Indefinite Length The Definite Length format accepts data bytes after the 0 until the ASCII Line Feed character is received with an EOI signal for RS 232 just a line feed or carriage return will terminate the block Definite Length The Definite Length format specifies the number of characters that will follow in the digits field These characters must be 0 to 9 ASCII 48 to 57 decimal The value of the number in the digits field defines the number of user data bytes that will follow in the user data field For examples see the SEND and PUD command descriptions in Chapter 6 Extra Space or Tab Characters In the command descriptions in Chapter 6 parameters are shown separated by spaces One space after a command is required unless no parameters are required All other spaces are optional Spaces are inserted for clarity in the manual and may be left in or omitted as desired You can insert
366. on 96 1 Year Spec V p p V p p nz AUX V rms NORMAL AUX 3V 300 mV 10 Hz 1 350 3V 300 mV 1 kHz 0 800 3V 300 mV 5 kHz 6 100 3V 300 mV 10 kHz 6 100 3V 3V 10 Hz 1 350 3V 3V 1 kHz 0 800 3V 3V 5 kHz 6 100 3V 3V 10 kHz 6 100 7 23 5500A Operator Manual 7 27 AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL tests the accuracy of the harmonics from the NORMAL terminals For this test set the 5500A output to sinewave Nominal Nominal Frequency Harmonic Frequency Measured Deviation 90 Day Value V Value Hz NORMAL Hz Value V Spec NORMAL AUX NORMAL NORMAL AUX 300 mV 20 Hz 50th 1 kHz 0 243 300 mV 100 Hz 50th 5 kHz 0 243 300 mV 200 Hz 50th 10 kHz 0 243 300 mV 20 Hz 50th 1 kHz 0 05396 300 mV 100 Hz 50th 5 kHz 0 053 300 200 Hz 50th 10 kHz 0 053 3V 3V 20 Hz 50th 1 kHz 0 024 3V 3V 100 Hz 50th 5 kHz 0 024 3V 3V 200 Hz 50th 10 kHz 0 024 30 V 3V 20 Hz 50
367. on mark in the Output Display indicates the amplitude values are not accurate enough to use for checking the oscilloscope s accuracy The wave generator is available through the Wavegen menu shown below To access this menu press the softkey under MODE until wavegen appears a WAVE SCOPE square 2 5 5 5 ger G zquare 1 Wavegen zine S80 volt tri edge levzine marker gl035i eps Each option in the Wavegen menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press st8y WAVE Scrolls through the three types of waveforms that are available You can select a square sine or triangle wave as the output e SCOPE Z Toggles the calibrator s output impedance setting between 50 Q and 1 e OFFSET Displays the offset of the generated wave To change the offset key in the new value and press enter Using the rotary knob does not change the offset it changes the actual voltage output When you change the offset you must remain within certain limits to avoid clipping the peaks The limit depends on the wave s peak to peak value Specifically the maximum peak excursion equals the offset plus half of the wave s peak to peak value See Wave Generator Specifications at the beginning of this chapter MODE Indicates you
368. on query Return instrument model number serial number and firmware revision levels for the main encoder inguard and 5725A Amplifier CPUs lt manufacturer gt lt model gt lt serial number gt lt main firmware gt lt encoder firmware gt lt inguard firmware gt lt 5725A CPU gt if not attached Example IDN returns FLUKE 5500A 5248000 1 2 1 0 1 0 Response Return Fluke manufacturer model 5500A serial number 5248000 main firmware version 1 2 encoder firmware 1 0 inguard firmware 1 0 and 5725A not attached INCR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Increment command Increment or decrement the output as selected using the ED ASE command or defaults to the primary output and enters error mode the same as using the 5500A Calibrator output adjustment knob in local operation Parameters lt value value increment value optional unit matching edit field decrement value INCR 00001 mV Example Load the error mode and increment the selected edit field by 00001 mV ISCE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status Change Enable command Load two bytes into the two 16 bit ISCE mask registers ISCE1 and ISCEO See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chap
369. ont Nominal Value Q Measured Value 0 Deviation 90 Day Spec m9 or 0 050 1 This test can be performed using the HP 3458A in the 10 MQ range and the 742A 10M in parallel with the 5500A output Using exactly 10 MQ the nominal value is 9 66667 MQ 7 11 Resistance DC Offset Measurement Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The Resistance DC Offset Measurement test checks the dc offset of the amplifiers used in the Synthesized resistance Prior to performing this test make sure you zero the 5500A Calibrator following the Zeroing the Calibrator procedure in Chapter 4 Set the output to 100 Q COMP OFF and measure the NORMAL terminals with a dc meter see Table 7 2 Range Nominal Value Measured Value V Deviation 8 Hour Spec 1000 0 000 0 010 5500A Operator Manual 7 12 7 12 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy test verifies the accuracy of ac voltage at the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals Nominal Value V Frequency Hz Measured Value Deviation 90 Day Spec V 30 mV 9 5 Hz 5 550 30 mV 10 Hz 0 327 30 mV 45 Hz 0 177 30 mV 1 kHz 0 177
370. ontroller Address sends MTA automatically whenever it directs a device dependent or common query to a specific instrument REN Remote Transfer remote local control of the 5500A See Table 5 1 Enable RFD Ready For Sets the handshake signal line NRFD low Data SDC Selected Does the same thing as DCL but only if the 5500A is currently Device Clear addressed as a listener SPD Serial Poll Cancels the effect of a Serial Poll Enable Disable SPE Serial Poll After the 5500A receives this message it sends the Status Byte the Enable next it is addressed as a listener no matter what the command is UNL Unlisten Unaddresses a specific device on the bus as a listener The controller sends UNL automatically after the device has successfully received a device dependent or common command UNT Untalk Unaddresses a specific device on the bus as a listener The 5 5 27 5500A Operator Manual 5 28 Table 5 5 IEEE 488 Interface Messages Send Mnemonic Name Function END End A message that occurs when the 5500A asserts the EOI control line The 5500A asserts EOI while it transmits the ASCII character LF for its termination sequence or terminator DAC Data Accepted Set the handshake signal line NDAC low DAV Data Valid Asserts the handshake signal line DAV RFD Ready for Data Sets the handshake line NRFD low SRQ Service A control line that any device on the bus can assert to indicate that Request it require
371. oost amplifier is in use The 5725A Amplifier front panel indicators identify which amplifier is operating e Ifthe 5725A Current Amplifier indicator is on while the 55004 annunciator is off 5500A current is being directed to the 5725A terminals During this condition both the 5725A voltage boost and current boost amplifiers are disabled e When sourcing current the output softkey choice AUX 5500A or BOOST 5725A takes precedence over the Source Preference softkey and the front panel key Exception When the selected current cannot be sourced by the 5500A e g 10 A 15 kHz the output automatically switches to BOOST and displays error 540 in the Control Display Current OUTPUT moved to 57254 e The Source Preference softkey in the SETUP menu chooses the 5500A Calibrator or 5725A Amplifier when either can source the selected output The key is a temporary Source Preference selection Toggling on sets the Source Preference to the 5725A Toggling off sets the Source Preference to the 5500A Pressing reestablishes the default Source Preference stored in the non volatile memory Anycurrent or voltage combination that is outside the capabilities of the 55004 Calibrator but within the capabilities of the 5725A Amplifier will automatically activate the 5725A Amplifier output Examples e Selecting a 5725A Amplifier boost current between 1 5 2 19999 Enter the desired current Select boost with the OUTPUT softkey Verify source pr
372. or 120 Ohm Nickel RTD Before using RTD TYPE select RTD using the TSENS TYPE command After using RTD TYPE select the output temperature using the OUT command Changes in temperature sensors changes the output to 0 C Once set the 5500A retains the RTD type until power off or reset Parameters PT385 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT3926 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 003926 ohms ohm C NI120 120 ohm RTD empirical curve Example RTD TYPE PT3926 Set the RTD type to a 100 ohm type using the pt3926 curve 00 003926 ohms ohm C The resistance of 100 ohms refers to the ice point characteristic the resistance of the RTD at 0 C 32 F 6 33 5500A Operator Manual 6 34 X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Resistance Temperature Detector Type query Return the Resistance Temperature Detector RTD type used for RTD temperature simulations Responses PT385 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT3926 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 003926 ohms ohm C NI120 120 ohm RTD empirical Curve Example RTD TYPE returns PT3926 Return PT3926 when a 100 ohm RTD with curve a 0 003926 ohms ohm C is set as the RTD type TYPE D 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled
373. or 80 Series calibration Thermal emf errors that the Low Thermal cables are designed to reduce are not significant when calibrating a 3 1 2 digit meter The cables from the 5500A LEADS set 109949 appropriate for the Fluke 80 Series The cables support the following measurements e AC and dc voltages All resistances AC and dc currents up to 20 A EARTH Connection Because the 80 Series DMMs are battery operated their inputs have no connection to earth ground Therefore enabling the calibrator s EARTH connection is appropriate Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications 4 56 Testing the Meter You can use the error mode feature of the calibrator to test the meter To verify that all ranges of all functions are within specifications proceed as follows 1 Turn on the calibrator and allow it to warm up 2 Verify that the EARTH indicator is on if not press as necessary AA Warning Ensure that the calibrator is in standby mode before making any connection between the calibrator and tester Dangerous voltages may be present on the leads and connectors 3 Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in Figure 4 15 F LLIJKES 55004 CALIBRATOR FLUKE 87 0 Si AUX V NORMAL AUX score vas ENSE MAX 14 15 Figure 4 15 Cable Connections for Testing 80 Series General Functions 4 Test
374. or non sine Value outside locked range Must specify an output unit Can t do two freqs at once Can t source 3 values at once Temp must be degrees C or F Can t do that now Can t turn on the boost Can t turn off the boost Limit too small or large No changes except RESET now 5725A went away while in use Cannot edit to or from 0 Hz Bad state image not loaded TC offset limited to 500 C Can t go to STBY in Meas TC Can t set an offset now Can t lock this range Can t set phase or PF now Can t set wave now Can t set harmonic now Can t change duty cycle now Can t change compensation now Current OUTPUT moved to 5725A TC ref must be valid TC temp Can t turn EARTH on now STA couldn t update OTD Can t enter W with non sine EE d Ho 0 3 5500A Operator Manual 545 DDE Can t edit now 546 DDE Can t set trigger to that now 547 DDE Can t set output imp now 548 DDE FR Compensation is now OFF 549 DDE Period must be gt 0 550 DDE A report is already printing 551 DDE 5 option not installed 600 DDE FR D Outguard watchdog timeout 601 DDE Power up RAM test failed 602 DDE FR Power up
375. or output to 3 500 V at 100 Hz 7 The DMM should display 3 500 0 002 If necessary adjust R34 to obtain the proper display 8 Change the calibrator output to 10 KHz 9 The DMM should display 3 500 0 004 If necessary adjust C2 to obtain the proper display 10 Change the calibrator output to 35 00 V at 10 KHz 11 The DMM should display 35 00 0 04 If necessary adjust C3 to obtain the proper display Testing a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer The Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer hereafter referred to as the Tester requires two voltages at varying phase relationships to test the functionality of the Power and Harmonics features The procedure for testing these two functions of the Tester are included here to demonstrate the operation of the dual voltage function of the Fluke 5500 These procedures are included here example The Model 41 Service Manual contains the complete authoritative testing and calibration procedures Testing Watts VA VAR Performance Perform the following procedure to test the Watts VA and VAR functions of the Tester Refer to Table 4 4 A A Warning Ensure that the calibrator is in standby mode before making any connection between the calibrator and Tester Dangerous voltages may be present on the leads and connectors Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications Table 4 4 Watts Performance Text Screen
376. otection Parameters None Response Returns the number of seconds before protection was tripped Returns 0 if protection has not been tripped or if OVERLD mode not active TLIMIT IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Sets the OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal The Calibrator automatically returns to STANDBY if the UUT protection trips within this interval or at the end of this interval if the protection has not tripped Parameters 1 to 60 seconds Example TLIMIT 30 TLIMIT IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the programmed OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal Response Integer Time limit in seconds 8 39 5500A Operator Manual 8 40 TLIMIT_D IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Sets the default OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal Parameters 1 to 60 seconds Example TLIMIT_D 15 TLIMIT_D 8 55 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the default overload time limit Response Integer Default time limit in seconds Impedance Capacitance Function Commands ZERO MEAS TRG IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Sets the measurement offset to the capacitance value Parameters boolean ON or OFF IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Triggers and returns a new impedance measurement value when used with the SC600 option in MEAS Z mode See Chapter 6 for TRG use in all cases except MEAS Z mode with the SC600 option Responses me
377. out respect to where on the target the tight pattern falls predictability A measure of how accurately the output value of a device can be assumed after a known time following calibration If a device is highly stable it is also predictable If a device is not highly stable but its value changes at the same rate every time after calibration its output has a higher degree of predictability than a device that exhibits random change primary standard A standard defined and maintained by some authority and used to calibrate all other secondary standards process metrology Tracking the accuracy drift of calibration and other equipment by applying statistical analysis to correction factors obtained during calibration random error Any error which varies in an unpredictable manner in absolute value and in sign when measurements of the same value of a quantity are made under effectively identical conditions range The stated upper end of a measurement device s span Usually however a measurement device can measure quantities for a specified percentage overrange The absolute span including overrange capability is called scale In the 5500A however range and scale are identical range calibration An optional calibration procedure available to enhance the 5500A specifications by nulling the output to an external standard reference amplifier DC voltage references developed for the 5500A These are 6 9 V devices consisting of a zener
378. output Press the WAVE MENUS softkey and ensure the phase angle is 10 00 degrees Press the HARMONIC MENU softkey and ensure the HARMONIC selection is set to 1 and the FUNDMTL selection is set to normal Press 7 Verify that the harmonic amplitude and phase angle readings displayed by the Tester are within the minimum and maximum limits listed in Table 4 6 Table 4 6 Harmonics Performance for Amps Harmonics screen 5500A AUX Output Fluke Tester Performance Limits Harmonic Amplitude Phase Amplitude Harmonic Phase cursor mV deg No MIN MAX MN MAX 20 0 1 10 1 191 209 8 12 20 0 3 20 3 19 1 209 14 26 20 0 30 19 1 209 21 39 20 0 13 40 13 191 209 29 51 20 0 21 50 21 187 213 35 65 20 0 31 60 31 18 1 21 9 40 80 4 62 Calibrating a Fluke 51 Thermometer The Fluke 51 Thermometer measures temperature using a type J or K thermocouple The calibrator simulates both thermocouples simplifying testing and calibration The following demonstrates how the calibrator is used to calibrate this thermometer Note These procedures are included here as an example The Model 51 Service Manual contains the authoritative testing and calibration procedures 5500A Operator Manual 4 63 Testing the Thermometer The following test should be conducted only after the thermometer has had time to stabilize to an ambient temperature of 23 C 5 C 73 F 9
379. outputs are noted with P for primary output front panel NORMAL terminals and S for secondary output front panel AUX terminals Response lt primary output secondary output Examples DC330MV 0 dc volts 330 mV range DC33MA A 0 dc current 33 mA range AC3 3V 0 ac volts 3 3 V range AC330MA A 0 ac current 330 mA range R1100HM 0 ohms 110 Q range C1 1UF 0 capacitance 1 1 range TCSRC 0 temperature thermocouple source RTD 330 0 temperature RTD 330 Q range DC3 P DC2 2A AS dc power 3 3 V 2 2 A ranges AC330V P ACI1A AS ac power 330 V 11 A ranges DC330MV P DC3 3V 5 dual dc volts 330 mV 3 3 V ranges AC330V P AC3 3V S dual ac volts 330 V 3 3 V ranges Return the symbolic name of the single or first output and return the symbolic name of the second output 0 if there is no second output RANGELCK 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Range Lock command Locks in the present range or selects auto ranging for voltage and current single outputs The range automatically unlocks if the output function changes for example from dc volts to de current When RANGELCK is on this is equivalent to the softkey range lock showing locked When RANGELCK is off this is equivalent to the softkey range lock showing auto Parameter ON Locks the dc volts or dc current range OFF Unlocks the dc volts or dc cur
380. ovide additional specifications for the 5500A Calibrator ac voltage and ac current functions These specifications are valid after allowing a warm up period of 30 minutes or twice the time the 5500A has been turned off All extended range specifications are based on performing the internal zero cal function at weekly intervals or when the ambient temperature changes by more than 5 C See Chapter 4 Front Panel Operations in the 5500A Operator Manual 1 30 Frequency Specifications Frequency 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty Range Resolution teal 5 Jitter PPM mHz 0 01 119 99 Hz 0 01 Hz 1 25 ppm 15 mHz above 10 kHz 1 31 Harmonics 2 to 50 Specifications Fundamental Voltages Voltages Amplitude 10 03 of output as the G510500Hz 33mVio1020V 33mAto11A 100 mV to3 3V eauivelent single output 100 mV to 3 3 put twice the floor adder 1 to 5 kHz 3 3 to 1020 V 33 mA to 2 19999 A 100 mV to 3 3 V Phase uncertainty for harmonic outputs is 1 degree or the phase uncertainty shown in Phase Specifications for the particular output whichever is greater For example the phase uncertainty of a 400 Hz fundamental output and 10 kHz harmonic output is 10 degrees from Phase Specifications Another example the phase uncertainty of a 60 Hz fundamental output and a 400 Hz harmonic output is 1 degree 1 The maximum frequency of the harmonic output is 10 kHz For example if the fundamental ou
381. p 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 07 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 099 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Frequency 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz Measured Value V p p Deviation V p p na 1 Year Spec V p p na na na IR SEEN 0 00406 na 0 0029 0 00406 0 00406 0 00406 na 0 0016 0 0016 0 0021 8 49 55004 Operator Manual 8 50 Table 8 24 Leveled Sinewave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Value V p p 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 399 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 Frequency 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 400 MHz 480 MHz 570 MHz 580MHz 590 MHz 600MHz 50 kHz 30 MHz 70 MHz 120 MHz 290 MHz 360 MHz Se0MHz 40
382. p bit xon xoff parity Thermocouple Power K none 9600 baud wait 30 sec Up Default Type EOL end of line CRLF Source Preference 5500 EOF end of file 012 000 Current Limits 11A Remote I F mm Voltage Limits 1000 V Remote commands see Chapter 6 SROSTR 02 02 04 04 PUD string cleared Output Display and Control Display respectively There are 8 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MEAS TC Front Panel Key F3 05 eps Figure 3 5 MEAS TC Softkey Menu Tree 3 22 Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees Dterminali TC file as 2120 mv i Menus TYPE selects the thermocouple type that you are measuring OFFSET enters a temperature offset TC Menus selects more setup parameters Meas TC terminal is the actual input voltage from the thermocouple being measured TCO UNITS PREF SRC B i intrnl 10u nC TYPE K nn intrnl arf F extrni TYPE selects the thermocouple type that you are measuring factory default is K REF is the actual temperature of the reference source REF SRC is the reference temperature the internal 5500A Calibrator reference intrnl or an external reference extrnl factory default is intrnl UNITS selects C or F OpenTCD selects the open thermocouple detector feature default on A L em Ka TI 5 H T c
383. perator Manual life cycle cost The consideration of all elements contributing to the cost of an instrument throughout its useful life This includes initial purchase cost service and maintenance cost and the cost of support equipment linearity The relationship between two quantities when a change is the first quantity is directly proportional to a change in the second quantity linearity error Linearity error occurs when the response curve of a meter is not exactly a straight line This type of error is measured by fixing two points on the response curve drawing a line through the points then measuring how far the curve deviates from the straight line at various points in the response curve MAP Measurement Assurance Program A program for measurement process A MAP provides information to demonstrate that the total uncertainty of the measurements data including both random error and systematic components of error relative to national or other designated standards is quantified and sufficiently small to meet requirements MTBF Mean Time Between Failures The time interval in operating hours that can be expected between failure of equipment MTBF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived through extrapolation MTTF Mean Time To Fail The time interval in operating hours that can be expected until the first failure of equipment MTTF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived
384. press m Press The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 123 456 mA below 123 456 m 4 22 Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 8 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output maximum five numeric keys Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press the kilo multiplier key Then press the key For example 1 1234 KHz below 123 456 mA 1 1234 kHz 9 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 10 Press to activate the calibrator output Several softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the ac current function depending on the 5500A configuration OUTPUT and WAVE Output at 5500A oe AUR terminals aux square 1 boos t tri zquar trunca e OUTPUT Output Location Selects the current output terminals between the 5500A Calibrator aux and 5725A Amplifier boost If a 5725A Amplifier is not connected the OUTPUT softkey label will not appear in the display WAVE Waveform Allows you to select one of four different types of waveforms sinewave trianglewave squarewave and truncated sinewave See Waveform Types later in this chapter for more information Whenever a non sinusoidal waveform is selected the Output Display will convert the RMS reading to peak to peak 4 23
385. program first needs to initialize the interface and the 5500A Calibrator Refer to following sample program 10 INIT PORT 0 REMOTE 6 PU HE 5500A INTO THE REMOTE STATE 20 PRINT 6 RST OUT 10V OPER RESE THE 5500A PROGRAM IT TO OUTPUT 10 VOLTS DC If you wish to use SRQs first use the SRE ESE and 5 commands to enable the desired event Refer to Checking 5500A Status 5 43 5500A Operator Manual 5 44 5 60 You retrieve instrument parameters with a query a programming command that ends with a question mark 200 PRINT 06 FUNC RETRIEVE OUTPUT FUNCTION 210 INPU INE 06 A 220 PRINT Function is 5 230 PRINT 6 ONTIME RETRIEVE ON TIME 240 INPU INE 6 5 250 PRINT The instrument has been on for AS hours This program generates the following sample output Function is DCV The instrument has been on for 0 days 02 23 58 hours Check for programming errors as in the following sample programs Check the Error Available EAV bit in the serial poll register using a serial poll 300 A SPL 6 CHECK FOR ERRORS 310 IF A AND 8 THEN PRINT There was an error 320 PRINT 6 CLS CLEAR ERRORS Retrieve errors and explanations as follows Since errors are accumulated in a queue you must read the entire queue to retrieve and c
386. pter 910091 Increase the frequency to 400 MHz 500 MHz instruments 500 MHz 600 MHz instruments To enter 400 MHz press 4 0 0 M Hz then press ENTER Continue to increase the frequency slowly until the waveform decreases to 4 2 divisions as shown below To increase the frequency slowly fine tune it using the rotary knob To do this press to place a cursor in the Output Display Press again to place it in the frequency field and use the 4 and gt keys to move it to the digit you want to change Then change the value by turning the rotary knob Continue making small increments in the frequency until the signal drops to 4 2 divisions At 4 2 divisions the signal is at the frequency that corresponds to the 3 dB point 8 25 5500A Operator Manual 8 26 gl010i eps 6 Remove the input signal by pressing 7 Repeat this procedure for the remaining channels on your oscilloscope 8 39 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 8 40 The horizontal deflection time base of an oscilloscope is calibrated using a method similar to the vertical gain calibration A time marker signal is generated from the Calibrator and the signal s peaks are matched to the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope The Time Marker Function The Time MARKER function which is available through the MARKER menu lets you calibrat
387. put a new reference as selected Table 4 3 Keys That Exit Error Mode 4 47 Keys Action ENTER Returns to the previous reference value ENTER Establishes new reference A new keypad entry Establishes a new reference ENTER REF Establishes the present output as a new reference n Sets the calibrator to ten times the reference value and establishes a new reference 01 Sets the calibrator to one tenth the reference value establishes a new reference RESET Returns to the power up state Editing the Output Setting When you initially source an output from the Calibrator you enter a specific value For example 10 00000 volts To edit the output value to suit your application turn the front panel Edit Field knob clockwise to increase the value or counter clockwise to decrease the value The Edit Field controls will not operate if you are in any setup function Press the key one or more times to exit a setup function 4 49 5500A Operator Manual 4 50 4 48 4 49 To select higher order digit use an Edit Field cursor key 4 or The output digit in edit is always underlined see below The momentary display of the letter u in the Output Display when editing during OPR Operate indicates unsettled that is the Calibrator output is settling with a new value Displaying the Output Error When you edit the output value the Control Disp
388. puts the duty cycle must be 50 00 default The offset selection is entered using the softkey OFFSET which appears when the ac voltage output is less than 33 V sinewaves 66 V peak to peak squarewaves or 93 V peak to peak trianglewaves and truncated sinewaves The softkey OFFSET will not appear and offsets may not be entered when the output is a voltage sinewave measured in dBm The maximum offset value allowed depends on the maximum offset and maximum peak signal for each range For example a squarewave output of 10 V peak to peak is within the range 6 6 to 65 9999 V peak to peak a range that allows a maximum peak signal of 55 V For this example the squarewave peak value is 5 V thus allowing a maximum offset of 50 V for a maximum peak signal of 55 V Check the specifications in Chapter 1 for offset limits If you are using an offset voltage and you cause the output to move into a range where offset is not allowed for example above 33 V for a sinewave output the calibrator will go into the standby mode and the offset function will be disabled Complete the following procedure to enter a dc voltage offset If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value This procedure assumes you have already sourced a single ac voltage output not exceeding 33 V sinewaves 65 V peak to peak squarewaves or 93 V peak to peak trianglewaves and truncated sinewaves thus displaying the softkey OFFSET below OFFS
389. que en opini n de Fluke haya sido objeto de una mala utilizaci n alteraci n negligencia o por accidente o manejo o manipulaci n an malos Fluke garantiza que el software operar sustancialmente de acuerdo con sus especificaciones funcionales durante 90 d as y que ha sido grabado correctamente en medios no defectuosos Fluke no garantiza que el software carezca de errores ni opere sin interrupci n Los revendedores autorizados por Fluke conceder n esta garant a a productos nuevos y sin utilizar suministrados a clientes usuarios finales exclusivamente pero no tienen autoridad para conceder una garant a diferente o mayor por cuenta de Fluke Puede utilizar el servicio de garant a si el producto ha si do comprado en una oficina de ventas Fluke autorizada o si el Comprador ha pagado el importe de aplicaci n internacional Fluke se reserva el derecho de facturar al Comprador los costes de importaci n debidos a la reparaci n o sustituci n de piezas cuando el producto comprado en un pa s es enviado para su reparaci n a otro pa s La obligaci n de Fluke en concepto de garant a se limita a criterio de Fluke al reembolso del importe de la compra a la reparaci n gratis o a la sustituci n de un producto defectuoso que sea devuelto a un centro de servicio Fluke autorizado dentro del per odo de garant a Para obtener servicio en garant a p ngase en contacto con el Servicio Oficial Fluke autorizado m s pr ximo o env e
390. r See Event Status Register ESR in Chapter 5 Response value decimal equivalent of the ESR byte 0 to 255 Example ESR returns 189 Return decimal 189 binary 10111101 when bits 7 PON 5 4 EXE 3 DDE 2 QYE and 0 OPC are enabled Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries EXPLAIN X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Explain Error query Explain an error code This command returns a string that explains the error code furnished as the parameter The error code same as the parameter is originally obtained by sending the FAULT query See the ERR command which returns both the error code and the explanation string See Appendix F for a list of error codes and error messages Parameter lt value gt if the error code an integer Response lt string gt that explains the error code with the parameter if there is one shown as a percent sign followed by d integer parameter f floating point parameter or s string parameter Example EXPLAIN 539 returns Can t change compensation now Return the explanation of error 539 Can t change compensation now FAULT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Fault query Return the first error code contained in the 5500A Calibrator error qu
391. r clock 19 57 45 days hours ONTIME returns 5 DAYS Return the time since the 5500A Calibrator was last powered up 5 days 19 hours 57 minutes and 45 seconds 6 25 5500A Operator Manual OPC X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Operations Complete command Set bit 0 OPC of the Event Status Register to 1 when all pending device operations are complete Also see the ESR command None Parameter Example Set bit 0 of the Event Status Register to 1 when all pending device operations are done OPC X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Operations Complete query Return a 1 after all pending operations are complete This command causes program execution to pause until operations are complete See WAT 6 26 Response Example 1 all operations are complete OPC returns 1 Return 1 when all pending operations are complete OPER X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Operate command Activate the 5500A Calibrator output if it is in standby This is the same as pressing the 5500A Calibrator front panel key If there are errors in the error queue the OPER command is inhibited for outputs 33V and over Also see the
392. racter string indefinite length lt character string gt character string Example PUD 0CAL LAB NUMBER 1 Store the string CAL LAB NUMBER 1 in the protected user data area using the indefinite length format Example PUD 216CAL LAB NUMBER 1 Store the string CAL LAB NUMBER 1 in the protected user data area using the definite length format where 2 means two digits follow which represent the number of text characters CAL LAB NUMBER 1 including 16 Example PUD CAL LAB NUMBER 1 Store the string CAL LAB NUMBER 1 in the protected user data area using the character string format Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries PUD X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the contents of the PUD Protected User Data memory in definite length format Response 2 lt characters Example PUD returns 216CAL LAB NUMBER 1 Return 2 then 16 then 16 characters of text including spaces stored in the nonvolatile memory RANGE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Range query Return the present output ranges Both the primary output and secondary outputs are returned If there is no secondary output O is returned Dual
393. rating under 5500A control to extend the Volts x Hertz and voltage compliance of the calibrator The amplifier adds the following capabilities with no compromise in accuracy Frequency Increase to 100 kHz at 750 V 30 kHz at 1020 V AC Voltage Load limit extended to 70 mA for frequencies above 5 kHz and to 50 mA for frequencies less than 5 kHz Capacitive drive increases to 1020 pF subject to the maximum output current for volts ac AC Current 11 A load limit extended to 10 kHz with a 3 volt drive compliance A separate set of binding posts on the front panel of the 5725A supplies extended capability Since most meters have a separate input terminal for the high current ranges this eliminates the need to change cables during a procedure 1 5500A Operator Manual F1 03 eps Figure 1 3 5725A Amplifier 1 8 Introduction and Specifications Specifications 1 14 Specifications The following paragraphs detail specifications for the 5500A Calibrator The specifications are valid after allowing a warm up period of 30 minutes or twice the time the 5500A has been turned off For example if the 5500A has been turned off for 5 minutes the warm up period is 10 minutes All specifications apply for the temperature and time period indicated For temperatures outside of tcal 5 C tcal is the ambient temperature when the 5500A was calibrated the temperature coefficient is less than 0 1 times the 90 day specifications per C li
394. rator Manual B 4 Appendix RS 232 IEEE 488 Cables and Connectors IEEE 488 Connector The IEEE 488 connector on the rear panel mates with an IEEE 488 standard cable The pin assignments of rear panel IEEE 488 connector are shown in Figure C 1 IEEE 488 connection cables are available from Fluke as shown in Table 1 See Chapter 9 Accessories for ordering information Table C 1 IEEE 488 Connection Cables IEEE 488 Connection Cable Fluke Part Number 0 5 m 1 64 feet 2295 05 2295 20 1 3 28 feet PM2295 10 2 m 6 56 feet SHIELD SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 DIO2 LOGIC GND GND GND DIO8 0106 10 8 6 Fe 01 eps Figure C 1 IEEE 488 Connector Pinout connection side C 1 5500A Operator Manual Serial Connectors The two 9 pin serial connectors on the rear panel of the 5500A Calibrator are used to interface with a computer or controller and an instrument serial port The pin assignments of the rear panel serial connectors in conformance to 574 standard and are shown in Figures C 1 Host and C 2 UUT Serial connection cables are available from Fluke are shown in Table C 2 See Chapter 9 Accessories for ordering information Table C 2 Serial Port Connection Cables Connection Cable Fluke Part Number 5500A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST PC COM port DB 9 PM8914 001 5500A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST PC COM port DB 25 RS40 5500
395. rauszahlung von Fracht und Versicherungskosten FOB Bestimmungsort an das n chstgelegene und von Fluke autorisierte Servicezentrum Fluke bernimmt keinerlei Haftung f r eventuelle Transportsch den Im AnschluB an die Reparatur wird das Produkt unter Vorauszahlung von Frachtkosten FOB Bestimmungsort an den Erwerber zur ckgesandt Wenn Fluke jedoch feststellt der Defekt auf unsachgem e Handhabung Ver nderungen am Ger t einen Unfall oder auf anormale Betriebsbedingungen oder unsachgem e Handhabung zur ckzuf hren ist wird Fluke dem Erwerber einen Voranschlag der Reparaturkosten zukommen lassen und erst die Zustimmung des Erwerbers einholen bevor die Arbeiten in Angriff genommen werden Nach der Reparatur wird das Produkt unter Vorauszahlung der Frachtkosten an den Erwerber zur ckgeschickt und werden dem Erwerber die Reparaturkosten und die Versandkosten FOB Versandort in Rechnung gestellt DIE VORSTEHENDEN GARANTIEBESTIMMUNGEN SIND DAS EINZIGE UND ALLEINIGE RECHT AUF SCHADENERSATZ DES ERWERBERS UND GELTEN AUSSCHLIESSLICH UND AN STELLE VON ALLEN ANDEREN VERTRAGLICHEN ODER GESETZLICHEN GEWAHRLEISTUNGSPFLICHTEN EINSCHLIESSLICH JEDOCH NICHT DARAUF BESCHRANKT DER GESETZLICHEN GEWAHRLEISTUNG DER MARKTFAHIGKEIT DER GEBRAUCHSEIGNUNG UND DER ZWECKDIENLICHKEIT F R EINEN BESTIMMTEN EINSATZ FLUKE BERNIMMT KEINE HAFTUNG F R SPEZIELLE UNMITTELBARE MITTELBARE BEGLEIT ODER FOLGESCHADEN ODER ABER VERLUSTE EINSCHLIESSLICH DES VERL
396. re within specifications d Press on the DMM to enter the 40 nanosiemen range used for conductance tests of high resistances e Set the calibrator output to 100 MQ Verify the error is within specification 9 Test the capacitance function as follows use the REL feature of the 80 Series to subtract cable capacitance a Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to Q gt and press the blue button b Set the calibrator output to 1 0 uF with compensation off Press Verify the error is within specification c Repeat the previous step using 0 470 uF 0 047 and 4 70 nF Verify the errors are within specifications 10 Test the Diode Test function as follows a Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to b Set the calibrator to 3 0V dc and press opr Verify the error is within specification 11 Test the ac and dc current function a Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to m A b Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in Figure 4 16 FLUKE 55004 CALIBRATOR FLUKE 87 TFUE RMS MULTIMETER NORMAL AUX SCOfE A n SENSE RTD AUX VY 14 16 Figure 4 16 Cable Connections for Testing 80 Series Current Function 4 55 5500A Operator Manual 4 56 Set the calibrator to 35 0 mA and press opr Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the cal
397. rent range for autoranging Example RANGELCK OFF Set the range lock off to allow autoranging for dc volts or dc current 6 31 5500A Operator Manual 6 32 RANGELCK X IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Range Lock query Return whether or not the preset dc volts dc current single output range is locked Response range is locked and autoranging is not allowed OFF range is not locked and autoranging is allowed Example RANGELCK returns OFF Return OFF when the range for dc volts or dc current is not locked autoranging enabled REFOUT X IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Reference Output query Return the present value of the reference when editing the output error mode If not editing the output using the INCR command the return is 0 0E 00 The reference value is set with the OUT NEWREF MULT commands To determine which quantity is being edited use the EDIT and OUT commands Response X reference value Example REFOUT returns 0 00 Return 0 when the output is not being edited Example REFOUT returns 2 500000 01 Return 250 when the output is being edited and the reference is for example 250 mV REMOTE IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled
398. ries EDIT X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Edit command Set the edit field to the primary secondary or frequency field Parameters PRI edit the value in single output functions and the primary output value in dual output functions SEC edit the secondary value in dual output functions FREQ edit the frequency value in single ac output functions OFF edit is off which is the same as using the NEWREF command Example EDIT FREQ Load FREQ into the edit field to edit frequency EDIT 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Edit query Return the edit field setting Responses PRI value in single output functions and the primary output value in dual output functions is in edit SEC secondary value in dual output functions is in edit FREQ frequency value in single ac output functions is in edit OFF no value is in edit Example EDIT returns OFF Return OFF when no value is in edit ERR 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Error query Return the first error code contained in the 5500A Calibrator error queue then removes that error code from the queue Following the error code is an explanation o
399. rmination Make sure the oscilloscope is dc coupled Apply a time marker value according to the recommended calibration settings in your oscilloscope manual For example to enter 200 ns press 21010 then press ENTER Note You may enter the equivalent frequency instead of the time marker value For example instead of entering 200 ns you may enter 5 MHz Set your oscilloscope s time base to show 10 time markers The time markers should align with the oscilloscope divisions as shown in the example below For an accurate reading align the signal s peaks with the horizontal center axis Peaks aligned with center axis gl011i eps Repeat this procedure for all time marker values recommended for your oscilloscope Repeat for digital and analog modes required Some oscilloscopes may need the magnification changed while calibrating in analog mode Remove the signal by pressing srev 5500A Operator Manual 8 109 Testing the Trigger The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on different waveforms can be tested using the wave generator When the wave generator is used a square sine or triangle wave is transmitted and the wave s output impedance offset and voltage can be varied in order to test the triggering capability at different levels Note The wave generator should not be used for checking the accuracy of your oscilloscope The questi
400. root mean square The value assigned to an ac voltage or current that results in the same power dissipation in a resistance as a current or voltage of the same value rms sensor A device that converts ac voltage to dc voltage with great accuracy RMS sensors operate by measuring the heat generated by a voltage through a known resistance 1 power therefore they sense true rms voltage resistance temperature detector RTD A resistance device that provides a proportional resistance output for a temperature of the device Most RTDs are characterized by their resistance at 0 C called the ice point The most common ice point is 100 Q at 0 C The curve of resistance vs temperature can be one of several pt385 0 00385 ohms ohm C and pt3926 0 003926 ohms ohm C are examples scale The absolute span of the reading range of a measurement device including overrange capability Appendices A Glossary scale error Same as gain error Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter s response curve is not exactly 1 A meter with only scale error no offset or linearity error will read OV with OV applied but something other than 10V with 10V applied secondary standard A standard maintained by comparison against a primary standard sensitivity The degree of response of a measuring device to the change in input quantity or a figure of merit that expresses the ability of a measurement system or device to respond t
401. rruptions until they detect the command s completion For more information see Overlapped Commands in Chapter 5 Coupled Commands X Coupled SCOPE and OUT IMP are coupled commands because they can be coupled combined with other commands to form a compound command sequence Care must be taken to ensure that commands are not coupled in a way that may cause them to disable each other since this may result in a fault For more information see Coupled Commands in Chapter 5 8 83 5500A Operator Manual 8 84 SCOPE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Programs the 5500A SC oscilloscope calibration hardware if installed The instrument settings are determined by this command s parameter Once in SCOPE mode use the OUT command to program new output OPER STBY OPC OPC all operate as described in Chapter 6 The state of the oscilloscope s output while in SCOPE mode is reflected by the bit in the ISR that is assigned to SETTLED The FUNC query returns SDCV SACV LEVSINE MARKER EDGE and WAVEGEN for the corresponding oscilloscope modes Parameters Example OFF Turns the oscilloscope hardware off Programs 0 V 0 Hz output at the NORMAL terminals standby VOLT O
402. rs on the Control Display as shown below Sweeping From previous d HALT MODE to disp las eid Frequency SWEEP levs ine 4 You can let the signal sweep through the entire range or you can halt the sweep if you need to record the frequency at a certain point To interrupt the sweep press the softkey under HALT SWEEP The current frequency will appear on the Output Display and the MORE OPTIONS menu will reappear on the Control Display Note When you interrupt the frequency sweep by pressing HALT SWEEP the FREQ CHANGE method switches back to jump 5 Repeat the procedure if necessary For example if you did a fast sweep you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slow sweep over a subset of your previous frequency range 8 77 5500A Operator Manual 8 105 Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This sample procedure which verifies the frequency response on your oscilloscope is usually performed after the pulse response is verified This procedure checks the bandwidth by finding the frequency at the 3 dB point for your oscilloscope The reference sine wave in this procedure has an amplitude of 6 divisions so that the 3 dB point can be found when the amplitude drops to 4 2 divisions Before you start this example procedure verify that you are running the oscilloscope option in Levsine mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output SCOPE
403. rt Setup Procedure Using Host Port 5 10 5 15 UUT Port Setup Procedure RS 232 Host Port Commands 6 6 RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure RS 232 Host Port Testing the RS 232 Interface Overview RS 232 Modem Cables 9 4 RS 232 Null Modem Cables 9 4 RS 232 Remote Control Connections 5 6 RS 232 UUT Port Commands RS 232 UUT Port Operation using Visual Basic RS 232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure 5 15 RS 232 UUT Port testing via IEEE 488 Port RS 232 UUT Port testing via RS 232 Host Port RST remote command 6 33 RTD Setting Temperature Simulation RTD_TYPE remote command 6 33 RTD_TYPE remote command RTD D remote command 16 34 RTD TYPE D remote command 6 34 S Sample Applications 4 52 SCOPE key 3 5 Selecting an External Amplifier 4 5 Sequential Commands Serial Poll Status Byte Service Information 2 6 Service Request SRQ Line 5 37 SERVICE REQUEST Enable Register 5 5 37 Setting a Dual AC Voltage Output Setting a Dual DC Voltage Output Setting AC Current Output Setting AC Power Output 4 25 Setting AC Voltage Output Setting Capacitance Output Setting DC Current Output 4 21 Setting DC Power Output 4 24 Setting DC Voltage Output Setting Output Limits Setting Resistance Output Setting Temperature Simulation RTD 4 37
404. rtainty for power output in Watts or VARs is based on the root sum square rss of the individual uncertainties in percent for the selected voltage current and power factor parameters Watts uncertainty Upower y UP voltage current U PFadder VARs uncertainty U current U vARsadder Because there are an infinite number of combinations you should calculate the actual ac power uncertainty for your selected parameters The method of calculation is best shown in the following examples using 90 day specifications Example 1 Output 100 V 1 A 60 Hz Power Factor 1 0 0 Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 0 04 6 6 mV totaling 100 V x 0004 40 mV added to 6 6 mV 46 6 mV Expressed in percent 46 6 mV 100 V x 100 0 047 see AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0 08 300 pA totaling 1 A x 0008 800 uA added to 300 uA 1 1 mA Expressed in percent 1 1 mA 1 A x 100 0 11 see AC Current Sine Waves Specifications PF Adder Watts Adder for PF 1 0 at 60 Hz is 0 see Phase Specifications Total Watts Output Uncertainty Upower 0 0472 0 11 0 0 1296 Example 2 Output 100 V 1 A 400 Hz Power Factor 0 5 60 Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is 0 04 6 6 mV totaling 100 V x 0004 40 mV added to 6 6 mV 46 6 mV Expressed in percent 46 6 mV 100 V x 100
405. ry settings 1000 V 11 A See the FORMAT command IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled The magnitude of the limit has the following effect on different waveforms sinewave non sinewave with dc offset magnitude of limit magnitude of limit rms magnitude of limit x 3 peak to peak magnitude of limit x 2 4 absolute peak volts only Parameters positive value negative value LIMIT Example 100V 100V Limit the voltage output to 100 V dc 100 V ac rms 300 V peak to peak 240 V peak Example LIMIT 1A 1A Limit the current output to 1 A dc 1 A ac rms 3 A peak to peak IEEE 488 RS 232 LIMIT X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Limit query Returns the programmed output magnitude limits for voltage and current Response positive value voltage negative value voltage positive value current negative value current Example LIMIT returns 1000 0000 1000 0000 11 0000 11 0000 Return the present value of the voltage and current limits reset values shown 6 23 5500A Operator Manual 6 24 LOCAL IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Local command Puts the 5500A Calibrator into the local state
406. s Sequential command Parameter None Response String Up to 40 characters RST IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Reset Instrument command Reset the 5500A Calibrator to the power up state RST holds off execution of subsequent commands until the reset operation is complete This command is the same as pressing the front panel key A reset action evokes the following commands and values Command Value Command Value STBY No output POST AUX OUT ov OHZ EARTH OPEN DC_OFFSET OV LOWS TIED DUTY RTD_TYPE lt RTD_TYPE_D value gt HARMONIC 1 PRI TC_OTCD ON PHASE ODEG TC REF INT RANGELCK OFF TC_TYPE TC TYPE D value WAVE NONE NONE OFFSET 0 CEL ZCOMP OFF TSENS TYPE TG SCOPE OFF OUT IMP ZIM TRIG OFF Changes made to the setup menus that are not saved in memory are discarded on reset Response None Example RST Place the 5500A Calibrator in a reset condition evoking the commands and values shown above TYPE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Resistance Temperature Detector Type command Set the Resistance Temperature Detector RTD sensor type pt385 curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C default pt3926 curve amp 0 003926 ohms ohm C 11120 empirical Curve f
407. s 8 1 2 digit DMM HP 3458A w Opt 02 DC volts Resistance Mercury Thermometer ASTM 56C Internal temperature reference 100 mVDC source Fluke 5500A 5700A 54408 51008 Source for thermocouple measurements characterize WI the DMM if necessary Phase Meter Clarke Hess 6000 Phase LCR Meter PM6304C 563 with PM9540 BAN test Capacitance lead set Counter Timer Fluke PM6680 456 Frequency AC Measurement Fluke 5790A ACV and ACI w shunts Standard Shunt Fluke Y5020 10A DC Resistance Standard Fluke 742A 1 300 mA DC Resistance Standard Fluke 7424 10 30 mA DC Resistance Standard Fluke 742A 100 3 mA DC Resistance Standard Fluke 742A 10M Resistance at 320 MOhms Current Shunt Adapter Fluke 792A 7004 Assures compatibility w A40 shunts AC Shunts Fluke A40 10m 30m 300m 3A amp A40A ACI 10 Interconnect cable for A40A Fluke A45 4004 Cable adapter for A40A Precision metal film resistors 1k Ohm 1 100 ppm C or better Current shunt for lt 330 Determine value w the DMM Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check 7 6 Performance Tests For the following performance tests refer to Chapter 4 Front Panel Operations for procedures on operating the 5500A from the front panel or to Chapter 5 Remote Operations for procedures on operating the 5500A from a terminal or computer Also refer to Chapter 4 for connect
408. s 5 43 5 60 Writing an SRQ and Error Handler sss 5 44 5 61 Verifying a Meter on the IEEE 488 Bus 5 45 5 62 Verifying a Meter RS 232 UUT Serial 5 45 5 63 Using OPC and 4224 2 1 140 5 45 5 64 Taking a Thermocouple Measurement sse 5 46 5 65 Using the RS 232 UUT Port to Control an instrument 5 46 5 66 Input Buffer Operation eee eee 5 41 Remote 5 lt 6 1 Introduction odere iet rre 6 2 Command Summary by Function sese eee eee 6 3 Summary of Commands and Queries ys m c 7 1 Jel 7 2 Replacing the Line 7 3 Cleaning the Air Filter iiec tete etienne ei 7 4 General Cleaning iiec e Dod eee ed obe 7 5 Performing a Calibration Check sese eee 7 6 Performance Tests tete tenere ditio into d e nte edi 7 7 DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy 7 8 DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy 7 9 DC Current Amplitude 7 10 Resistance Accuracy ee 7 11 Resi
409. s at the beginning Example CAL_START MAIN CAL_START MAIN DVG3_3 Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries CAL STATE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration State query Return state of calibration Response running a calibration step REF waiting for a CAL NEXT with reference measurement value INS instruction available waiting for a CAL NEXT NOT not in a calibration procedure or at end of one CAL STEP X 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Step query Return name of step currently running Response chart The step name Example IDAC RATIO running IDAC ratio calibration NOT not running a calibration procedure now CAL STORE X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Calibration Store command Store new calibration constants CAL switch must be ENABLED Parameter optional int Date to be stored with the constants Other than requiring that it be a single integer between 2 147 483 648 the 5500 attaches no significance to the date stored It is printed in any calibration reports and may be fetched using CAL DATE Example CAL STORE 081294 could mean August 12 1994 CAL STORE X IEEE 488 X
410. s attention Refer to Checking 5500A Status for details STB Status Byte The status byte is what the 5500A sends when it responds to a serial poll interface message SPE 5 29 Compound Commands A compound command is two or more commands in a single command line For example the following two commands could be entered individually OUT 1 60 Hz OPER where the 5500A Calibrator sources 1 V ac at 60 Hz and then goes into operate or they could be combined into a compound command OUT 1 V 60 HZ OPER using a semi colon as a separator Care must be taken when a compound command includes any of the coupled commands See Coupled Commands Coupled Commands A coupled command refers to two or more commands that appear in a compound command see Compound Commands that perform actions that could interfere with each other causing a fault Commands in a compound command are separated by using the character Compound commands using only coupled commands are not order dependent In Chapter 6 the command graphic shows a check mark for X Coupled commands The five coupled commands are CUR POST HARMONIC WAV DC OFFSET OUT LH An example of coupled command interference is the command OUT 1 RANGELCK ON followed by the command OUT 10 V RANGELCK OFF which can t be executed because RANGELCK ON in the first command locks the dc volts range preventing the command
411. s own level of contrast The factory defaults are 1 and 0 F3 04e eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 5500A Operator Manual RTO SOURCE PEEFRHC S pt38m s500 Ae A A L Jdin 5500 toT U Tdin 5725 luv i B C E niiz I cule Select your temperature output defaults the RTD type factory default pt385 TC Thermocouple type factory default K When an 5725A Amplifier is connected you may select either the 5500A Calibrator or 5725A amplifier for sourcing when each can supply the output DISPLAY OF CHANGE ENTRE LIMITS T VOLTAGE i i CURRENT AS A to V to U The values set here become the new limits and can be changed only with new entries or returned to factory defaults using SETUP see menu F I LIM 11 0000 UFFER LOWER U I LII ii 80000 LIMIT LIMIT A 126 The current values set here become the new current limits and be changed only with new entries or returned to factory defaults 11 000 and 11 000 using SETUP see menu F F3 04f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 We LIH Lozo UPPER LOWER Y LIN i2 cdo i LIMIT i LIMIT 1020 0000 to 1828 m 38 The voltage values set here become the new
412. s through mode is used to pass commands from the PC to a UUT but via the 5500A Calibrator This configuration is used when the UUT has an RS 232 port Commands are sent to the UUT by using the UUT_SEND command returns use the UUT_RECV query and UUT_F LUSH clears the UUT receive buffer in the 5500A Calibrator Types of Commands The commands for the 5500A Calibrator can be grouped into one or more categories depending on how they function Each category is described below Device Dependent Commands Device dependent commands are unique to the 5500A Calibrator An example of a device dependent command is OUT 100 V 1 A 60 HZ instructing the 5500A Calibrator to source 100 watts of ac power 5 25 5500A Operator Manual 5 26 2 20 su 5 28 Common Commands Common commands are defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard and are common to most bus devices Common commands always begin with an character Common commands are available whether you are using the IEEE 488 or RS 232 interface for remote control An example of a common command is IDN instructing the 5500A Calibrator to return the instrument identification string Query Commands Query commands request information which is returned as the command executes or placed in a buffer until requested An example of a query which always ends with a question mark is RANGE returning the 5500A Calibrator primary and secondary outputs Interfa
413. s to lead the voltage output on the NORMAL terminals by 82 93 degrees Cosine of 82 93 degrees is 0 123 nominal DPF X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Displacement Power Factor query Return the displacement power factor cosine of the phase angle between the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL and AUX terminals for sinewave outputs Responses value LEAD value LAG Example DPF returns 5 00E 01 LEAD Return a leading power factor of 5 when the current output on the 5500A Calibrator AUX terminals leads the voltage output on the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees Cosine of 60 degrees is 0 5 The return is 0 if power factor does not apply to the output 6 13 5500A Operator Manual DUTY X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Duty Cycle command Set the duty cycle of the squarewave output The duty cycle is the percentage of time the waveform is in the positive part of its cycle 1 00 to 99 00 percent Duty cycle applies only to single output squarewaves Parameter value of duty cycle with optional PCT percent unit Example DUTY 12 34 PCT Set the squarewave duty cycle to 12 34 DUTY X 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Duty Cycle query Return
414. scilloscope Select 50 O impedance or use 50 Q termination directly at the oscilloscope input Verify that the key is lit indicating that the signal is connected Alter the voltage setting for the signal so it matches the amplitude value recommended by your oscilloscope manufacturer for calibrating the edge response The default setting is 25 mV 1 MHz For example on a Fluke PM3392A oscilloscope start with a signal of 1 V 1 MHz Adjust the scale on your oscilloscope to achieve a good picture of the edge For example on a Fluke PM3392A oscilloscope with a 1 V 1 MHz signal use 200 mV div Adjust the time base on your oscilloscope to the fastest position available 20 0 or 50 0 ns div 7 Pulse aberrations gl007i eps 5 Verify that your oscilloscope exhibits the proper rise time and pulse aberration characteristics 6 Remove the input signal by pressing 8 73 5500A Operator Manual 8 74 8 101 8 102 The Leveled Sine Wave Function The Leveled Sine Wave Levsine function uses a leveled sine wave whose amplitude remains relatively constant over a range of frequencies to check the oscilloscope s bandwidth When you check your oscilloscope you change the wave s frequency until the amplitude displayed on the oscilloscope drops 3046 which is the amplitude that corresponds to the 3 dB point To access the Levsine menu press the softkey under MODE until levsine appe
415. scilloscope s ac and dc voltage mode Programs 20 mV peak to peak 1 KHz output at the SCOPE BNC output impedance 1 MO standby if from OFF or previously in standby EDGE Oscilloscope Edge mode Programs 25 mV peak to peak 1 MHz output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby LEVSIN Oscilloscope leveled sine mode Programs 30 mV peak to peak 50 kHz output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby MARKER Oscilloscope Marker mode Programs the period to 1 ms output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby WAVEGEN Oscilloscope Wavegen mode Programs 20 mV peak to peak square wave 1 kHz no offset output impedance 1 standby if from OFF or previously in standby SCOPE VOLT OUT 2V 0 Hz dc voltage 2 V SCOPE VOLT OUT 4V 1 kHz ac voltage 4 V peak to peak 1 KHz SCOPE EDGE OUT 0 5V 5 kHz Edge 0 5 V peak to peak 5 kHz SCOPE LEVSINE OUT 1V 20 kHz Leveled sine wave 2 V peak to peak 20 kHz SCOPE MARKER OUT 2 MS Marker period of 2 ms SCOPE WAVEGEN OUT 1V 1 kHz Wave Generator 1 V peak to peak 1 kHz 5500A SC300 Option 8 Summary of Commands and Queries SCOPE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the oscilloscope s current mode of operation Returns OFF if the oscilloscope is off Parameter None
416. se with extreme care Restores the contents of the nonvolatile memory device to factory defaults Sets the maximum permissible output magnitudes negative and positive Returns the programmed output magnitude limits for voltage and current Returns the time since the 5500A was powered up last Prints the Stored Active or CAL Constant CAL Report through either the HOST or UUT Serial Port Set the default Resistance Temperature Detector RTD sensor type Returns the default Resistance Temperature Detector RTD sensor type Sets the RS 232 C serial port settings and saves them in nonvolatile memory The settings apply only to HOST port Returns the HOST serial port settings contained in nonvolatile memory Sets the source preference when a 5725A Amplifier is attached Returns the source preference setting Sets the default thermocouple sensor type Returns the thermocouple type used for thermocouple temperature simulations Sets the temperature degree standard ipts 68 or its 90 Returns the temperature degree standard ipts 68 or its 90 Remote Commands 6 Command Summary by Function ERR EXPLAIN FAULT ISCE ISCE ISCEO ISCEO ISCE1 ISCE1 ISCR ISCRO ISCR1 ISR TC MEAS TC OFFSET TC OFFSET TC OTCD TC OTCD VAL VVAL UUT FLUSH UUT RECV UUT SEND UUT SET UUT SET Status Commands Returns the first error code contained in the 55004 error queue then removes tha
417. ses Example T X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped TPIS 68 ITS_90 EMP_STD returns ITS 90 Coupled Return ITS 90 when the temperature degree standard is the 1990 International Temperature Standard Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries TRG X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Trigger Thermocouple Measurement command Trigger a thermocouple temperature measurement and return the value of the measurement Also change the operating mode to thermocouple measurement if this is not already the operating mode This command is equivalent to sending TC MEAS WAI VAL Responses measurement value CEL value is in Celsius measurement value FAR value is 1n Fahrenheit 0 00E 00 OVER value is over or under capability 0 00E 00 OPENTC open thermocouple 0 00 00 NONE wrong mode or no measurement Example TRG returns 2 500E 01 CEL Trigger a thermocouple measurement and return 25 00 Celsius when the thermocouple temperature measurement is 25 C TSENS TYPE X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Temperature Sensor Type command Set the temperature sensor type to thermocouple TC or Resistance Temperature Detector RT
418. sine wave and acquiring a frequency reading at the 3 dB point when the amplitude drops approximately 30 The Edge Function The EDGE function is used for calibrating the pulse response for your oscilloscope To reach the EDGE menu press the softkey under MODE until edge appears Output at SCOPE TDPULSE TRIG MODE terminal 50Q off off volt on 1 edge levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu Each option in the EDGE menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 50 Indicates the location and impedance of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press disconnect the signal press stev You cannot change the output impedance in EDGE mode TD PULSE Press once to turn the Tunnel Diode Pulser drive signal on again to turn the Pulser drive off This signal sources up to 100 V p p to drive a Tunnel Diode Pulser Fluke Part Number 606522 Tektronix 067 0681 01 or equivalent e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to toggle the trigger off and on When on the reading will show 1 which indicates that the external trigger is at the same frequency as the edge output The external trigger can be useful for many oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on low amplitude s
419. sing the SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port SERIAL 2 SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port TO UUT port Pa Unit Under Test RS 232 Remote Operation using the SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT ports 1 6 F1 02 eps Figure 1 2 RS 232 Remote Connections Remote Operation IEEE 488 The 5500A rear panel IEEE 488 port is a fully programmable parallel interface bus meeting standard IEEE 488 1 and supplemental standard IEEE 488 2 Under the remote control of an instrument controller the 5500A Calibrator operates exclusively as a talker listener You can write your own programs using the IEEE 488 command set or run the optional Windows based MET CAL software See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the commands available for IEEE 488 operation 5500A Operator Manual 1 6 1 7 Where To Go from Here To locate specific information concerning the installation and operation of the 5500A calibrator refer to the following list e Unpacking and setup Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation e Installation and rack mounting Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation and the rack mount kit instruction sheet e AC line power and interface cabling Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation e Controls indicators and displays Chapter 3 Features e Front panel operation Chapter 4 Front Panel Opera
420. softkey selection tied The calibrator produces a dual ac voltage output by sourcing one ac voltage on the NORMAL outputs and a second on the AUX terminals See Setting AC Voltage Output above for information on selecting an ac voltage output in dBm Complete the following procedure to set a dual ac voltage output If you make an entry error press one or more times to clear the display then reenter the value Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation Press to clear any output from the 5500A Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure dual ac voltage on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at the NORMAL terminals maximum six numeric keys For example 123 456 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage entry For example 123 456 mV below 123 456 mV Note The AUX output is limited to 3 3 V rms for sinewaves 6 6 peak to peak for squarewaves 9 3 V peak to peak for triangle and truncated sinewaves 10 11 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at the AUX terminals maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press
421. st compliance voltage is limited to 3 0 V The actual voltage compliance Vc is a function of current output lo and is given by the formula 0 535 10 3 18 The highest compliance voltage is limited to 3 0 V The actual voltage compliance Vc is a function of current output lo and is given by the formula Vc 7 0 176 10 3 19 The highest compliance voltage is limited to 2 8 V Maximum Distortion and Noise Range Frequency 10 Hz to 100 kHz Bandwidth output uA 10 to 20 Hz 0 15 1 0 20 to 45 Hz 0 1 1 0 0 02 to 0 32999 mA 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 05 1 0 1 to 5 kHz 0 5 1 0 5 to 10 kHz 1 0 1 0 10 to 20 Hz 0 15 1 5 20 to 45 Hz 0 06 1 5 0 33 to 3 2999 mA 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 02 1 5 1 to 5 kHz 0 5 1 5 5 to 10 kHz 1 2 1 5 10 to 20 Hz 0 15 5 20 to 45 Hz 0 05 5 3 3 to 32 999 mA 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 07 5 1 to 5 kHz 0 3 5 5 to 10 kHz 0 7 5 10 to 20 Hz 0 15 50 20 to 45 Hz 0 05 50 33 to 329 99 mA 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 07 50 1 to 5 kHz 0 2 50 5 to 10 kHz 0 4 50 10 to 45 Hz 0 2 500 0 33 to 2 19999 A 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 1 500 1 to 5 kHz 1 4 500 45 to 65 Hz 0 2 3mA 2 210 11A 65 to 500 Hz 0 1 3 mA 500 Hz to 1 kHz 0 4 3mA 5725A Amplifier 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 05 1 mA 1 5t0 11A 1 to 5 kHz 0 12 1mA 5 to 10 kHz 0 5 1 mA Introduction and Specifications General Specifications 1 21 Capacitance Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 NETUS of outpu
422. stance DC Offset 22 7 12 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL 7 13 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy 7 14 AC Current Amplitude Accuracy ss see eee 7 15 Capacitance 7 16 Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy 2 7 17 Thermocouple Sourcing 2 2 7 18 Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy sse 7 19 DC Power Amplitude Accuracy 7 20 DC Power Amplitude Accuracy 7 21 AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Voltage 7 22 AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Current 7 23 AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Power 7 24 Phase and Frequency Accuracy sese eee 7 25 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewave NORMAL 7 26 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewave AUX 7 27 AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL 7 28 AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy AUX 7 29 DC Voltage Offset Accuracy y 5500A Operator Manual 7 30 AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset eee 7 31 Non Operator Fuse Oscilloscope Calibration Options
423. strument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewave NORMAL tests the amplitude accuracy at the NORMAL terminals For this test use the Fluke 5790A an rms responding meter For squarewaves the measured value in rms should be exactly 1 2 the nominal value in peak to peak Nominal Value V p p 30 mV 15 mV rms 30 mV 30 mV 30 mV 300 mV 150 mV rms 300 mV 300 mV 300 mV 3 V 1 5V rms 3V 3V 3V 30 V 15 V rms 30 V 30 V 30 V Frequency Hz 10 Hz 1 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 10 Hz 1 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 10 Hz 1 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 10 Hz 1 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz Measured Value V rms Deviation 96 1 Year Spec Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check 7 26 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewave AUX Note This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewave AUX tests the amplitude accuracy at the AUX terminals For this test use the Fluke 5790A and an rms responding meter For squarewaves the measured value in rms should be exactly half the nominal peak to peak value Cs 22 Frequency good Deviati
424. t 300 nV 296 of output 4 of output 100 uV 100 nV 1 5 of output 100 uV lt 1 1 10 kHz 2 5 ppm lt 33 dBc lt 38 dBc 1 Within one hour after reference amplitude setting provided temperature varies no more than 5 C 5500A SC600 Option SC600 Option Specifications 8 8 6 Time Marker Specifications Table 8 4 Time Marker Specifications Time Maker into 50 Q 5sto50ms 20 ms to 100 ns 50 ns to 20 ns 10 ns 5 ns to 2 ns 1 Year Absolute 25 t 1000 2 5 ppm 2 5 ppm t 2 5 ppm 2 5 ppm Uncertainty at Cardinal ppm 1 Points tcal 5 C 3 Wave Shape spike or spike square spike or square or sine square 20 pulse square sine Typical Output Level gt 1Vp p 2 gt 1Vp p 2 gt 1Vp p 2 gt 1Vp p 2 gt 1 V p p Typical Jitter rms lt 10 ppm lt 1 ppm lt 1 ppm lt 1 ppm lt 1 ppm Sequence cardinal points 5 2 1 from 5 s to 2 ns e g 500 ms 200 ms 100 ms Adjustment Range At least 10 around each cardinal point Amplitude Resolution 4 digits ppm 1 t is the time in seconds Examples At 5 s the uncertainty is 5 025 ppm At 50 ms the uncertainty is 75 2 Typical rise time of square wave and 20 pulse 20 duty cycle pulse is lt 1 5 ns 3 Away from the cardinal points add 50 ppm to uncertainty 8 7 Amplitude Range Wave Generator Characteristics Wave
425. t nF Range Resolution be mays Allowed UE or 1 rror 0 33 to 0 4999 nF 0 1 pF 50 to 1000 Hz 10 kHz 0 5 to 1 0999 nF 0 1 pF 50 to 1000 Hz 10 kHz 1 1 to 3 2999 nF 0 1 pF 50 to 1000 Hz 10 kHz 3 310 10999 nF 5010100092 THR 11 to 32 999 nF 5010100092 __10 kHz 33 to 109 99 nF 10 pF 50 to 1000 Hz 10 kHz 110 to 329 99 nF 10 pF 50 to 1000 Hz 10 kHz 330 to 1 1 mF 100 nF 50 to 100 Hz 150 Hz Specifications apply to both dc charge discharge capacitance meters and ac RCL meters Frequency The output is continuously variable from 330 pF to 1 1 mF For all ranges the maximum charge and discharge current is 150 mA pk or 30 mA rms peak voltage is 4 V except the 330 uF to 1 1 mF range is limited to 1 V The maximum lead resistance for no additional error in 2 wire COMP mode is 10 O 1 5500A Operator Manual 1 22 Temperature Calibration Thermocouple Specifications Absolute Uncertainty Absolute Uncertainty Source Measure Tc Source Measure Range tcal 5 i Range C 2 tcal 5 Type n C P Type C 8 90 days 90 days o HEEHEME D B a The 10 uV C linear output mode has the same uncertainty as the 300 mV dc range Applies to both simulated thermocouple output and thermocouple measurement 1 Temperature standard ITS 90 or IPTS 68 is selectable 2 Resolution is 0 01 C 3 Does not include thermocouple error 1 20 Introduction and Specifications
426. t error code from the queue Explains an error code This command returns a string that explains the error code furnished as the parameter Returns the first error code contained in the 55004 error queue then removes that error from the queue Loads two bytes into both the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register and the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register Returns the OR of the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register and the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register Loads two bytes into the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register Returns the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register Loads two bytes into the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register Returns the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register Returns the OR of the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register and the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register and clears both registers Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 1 Change Register Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 0 Change Register Returns the contents of the Instrument Status Register Thermocouple TC Measurement Commands Changes the operating mode to thermocouple MEASUREMENT Sets a temperature offset for the thermocouple measurement mode Returns the temperature offset when in the thermocouple measurement mode Returns whether or not
427. t 5725 6 Press the key one or more times to return to a previous menu When asked press softkey STORE CHANGES or DISCARD CHANGES as desired 7 Enter the desired output value as described under Setting the Output Note You can have the 5725A source a dc current below 1 5 A to take advantage of the amplifier s higher compliance voltage To do so press the RANGE softkey to lock onto the 11 A range when the 5500A is set for over 2 2 A or set the lower current and press to turn on the amplifier 8 Activate and deactivate the 5725A Amplifier by pressing the key See Selecting an External Amplifier earlier in this chapter When boost is selected the boost key annunciator is on If BOOST is not your default source preference when you press the key the boost will be deactivated 4 46 Editing and Error Output Settings All 5500A Calibrator outputs can be edited using the front panel Edit Field knob and associated 4 K and 25 keys In addition multiply and divide keys edit the output by decades The difference between the original output reference and edited output is displayed as an error between the two settings This allows you to edit a value to achieve a correct reading at the UUT and thereby calculate an error in or ppm parts per million if it is less than 1000 ppm Table 4 3 lists the actions that cause the calibrator to exit the error mode and return to the original reference output or to out
428. t Display and save the new value as the reference value Note If you attempt to use the rotary knob to adjust a value to an amount that is invalid for the function you are using or is outside the value s range limit the value will not change and the Calibrator will beep 8 23 Using and The and keys cause the current value of the signal to jump to a pre determined cardinal value whose amount is determined by the current function These keys are described in more detail under the descriptions for each function 8 24 Resetting the SC600 Option You can reset all parameters in the Calibrator to their default settings at any time during front panel operations by pressing the key on the front panel After resetting the Calibrator press to return to the SC600 Option the SCOPE menu appears Press to reconnect the signal output 8 15 5500A Operator Manual 8 25 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope The oscilloscope voltage vertical gain is calibrated by applying a dc or low frequency square wave signal and adjusting its gain to meet the height specified for different voltage levels as designated by the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope The signal is applied from the Calibrator in VOLT mode The specific voltages that you should use for calibration and the graticule line divisions that need to be matched vary for different oscilloscopes and are specified in your oscilloscope s service manual 8
429. t command Apply a DC offset to an AC output voltage maximum six digits This command applies only to single AC voltage outputs If the selected offset is too large for the active ac voltage range an error message is returned Parameter lt value gt signed offset amplitude Example DC OFFSET 123 45 MV Load a dc offset of 123 45 mV to the ac output signal DC OFFSET X 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled DC Voltage Offset query Return the value of the DC offset voltage Response value signed offset amplitude Example DC OFFSET returns 1 44 03 Return 1 44 mV as the value of the applied dc offset If 0 00000E 00 is returned the dc offset is zero DPF IEEE 488 xX RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Displacement Power Factor command Set the displacement power factor phase angle between the 5500A Calibrator front panel terminals NORMAL and AUX for sinewaves output only The NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference The phase offset is expressed as the cosine of the phase offset 0 000 to 1 000 and a LEAD default or LAG term which determines whether the AUX output leads or lags the NORMAL output Parameters lt value gt LEAD lt value gt LAG Example DPF 123 LEAD Set the current output on the 5500A Calibrator AUX terminal
430. t corner of the keys are accessed through the key For example to enter 200 us press 2 0 j 0 m T anr 8 gl002i eps If you make an error press to clear the Control Display and return to the menu 2 Press to activate the value and move it to the Output Display Other settings in the display will remain unaltered unless you key in an entry and specify the units for that setting 5500A SC600 Option 8 Starting the SC600 Option 8 22 Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob To adjust values in the Output Display using the rotary knob 1 Turn the rotary knob A cursor appears in the Output Display under the lowest digit and begins changing that digit If you wish to place the cursor in the field without changing the digit press ing HHE gl003i eps 2 To move the cursor between the voltage and frequency fields press 225 100 C F gl004i eps 3 Usethe 4 K keys to move the cursor to the digit you want to change Turn the rotary knob to change the value When you use the rotary knob in either VOLT mode or MARKER mode the Control Display shows the new value s percentage change from the reference value This is useful for determining the percentage of error on the oscilloscope You can set the reference value to the new value by pressing 110 00 MHz gl005i eps 5 Press to remove the cursor from the Outpu
431. t off 214 DDE FR D 5725A 400V did not shut off 215 DDE FR D 5725A V heatsink too hot 216 DDE FRS 5725A V heatsink too hot 217 DDE FR D 5725A 400V supply too small 218 DDE FR D 5725A 400V supply too large 219 DDE FR D 5725A 400V supply too large 220 DDE FR D 5725A 400V supply too small 221 DDE FR D 5725A 400V supply overI 222 DDE FRS Output tripped to standby 223 DDE FR D 5725A 400V supply overl 224 DDE FRS Output tripped to standby 225 DDE FR D 5725A fan not working 226 DDE FR D 5725A CLAMPS fault 227 DDE FRS Output tripped to standby 228 DDE FR D 5725A software TRAP 229 DDE FR D 5725A cable was off 230 DDE FR D 5725A RESET 231 DDE FR D 5725A guard crossing timeout 232 DDE FR D 5725A illegal command 233 DDE FR D 5725A non maskable interrupt 234 DDE FR D 5725A HVCLEAR tripped 235 DDE FRS Output tripped to standby 300 DDE Invalid procedure number 301 DDE No such step in procedure 302 DDE Can t change that while busy 303 DDE Can t begin resume cal there 304 DDE Wrong unit for reference 305 DDE Entered value out of bounds 306 DDE Not waiting for a reference 307 DDE Continue command ignored 308 DDE FR Cal constant outside limits 309 DDE FR Cal try to null failed 310 DDE FR D Sequence failed during cal SI DDE FR D A D measurement failed 312 DDE FR Invalid cal step parameter 3153 DDE Cal switch must be ENABLED 314 DDE FR Divide by zero
432. tance capacitance or RTD output 6 49 5500A Operator Manual 6 50 7 1 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 7 7 8 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 Chapter 7 Maintenance Contents T T Replacing the Line Cleaning the Air Filter 54er eere eee E lp ire General Cleaning i re eam ped Performing a Calibration Check esee Pertormance R x e oie eii d ey DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL DC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy 0 DC Current Amplitude Accuracy eee Resistance Accuracy Resistance DC Offset Measurement 2 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy AC Current Amplitude Capacitance 2 Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy Thermocouple Sourcing Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy eee DC Power Amplitude Accuracy DC Power Amplitude Accuracy AUX
433. te command 5 45 OPC remote command OPC 5 45 OPC remote command OPT remote command PUD remote command 6 30 PUD remote command 16 31 RST remote command SRE remote command STB remote command TEMP STD remote command TRG remote command TST remote command WAI 5 45 W AI remote command CLS remote command ESE remote command ESR remote command SRE remote command 5 5500A Operator Manual 1 6 5500A Operator Reference Guide 1 7 5500A Remote Programming Reference Guide 1 7 5500A Service Manual 1 7 5500A LEADS 9 4 5725A Amplifier 1 7 Selecting the 4 5 Using the 57254 Amplifier Accessory 9 4 5725 Amplifier Output Index A AC Current Amplitude Accuracy 7 15 AC Current Output 4 22 AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Current AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Power AC Power Amplitude Accuracy High Voltage AC POWER INPUT Se comm AC POWER INPUT Module location of AC Power Output 4 25 AC Voltage Dual Output Setting 4 30 AC Voltage Accuracy with a DC Offset 7 27 AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy AUX AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewaves AUX AC Voltage Amplitude Accuracy Squarewaves NORMAL AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy AUX AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy NORMAL 7 25 AC Voltage Output Setting of AC
434. ter 5 for more information Parameter value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example SCE 4108 Load decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 to enable bits 12 SETTLED 3 IBOOST and 2 VBOOST This is equivalent to sending the commands I SCEO 4108 and ISCE1 4108 see below Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries ISCE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status Change Enable query Return the two bytes from the two 16 bit ISCE mask registers ISCE1 and ISCEO See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Response lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example SCE returns 4108 Return decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 if bits 12 SETTLED 3 IBOOST and 2 VBOOST are set to 1 ISCEO X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable command Load the two bytes into the 16 bit ISCEO register See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Parameter lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example SCEO 4108 Load decimal 4108 binary 0001000000001100 to enable bits 12 SETTLED 3 IBOOST and 2 VBOOST
435. ters and the user report string In the case of calibration constants factory defaults are the same for all Calibrators They are not the calibration constants obtained when the 5500A was calibrated by the factory before shipment The softkeys are e ALL Replaces the entire contents of the EEPROM with factory defaults This would be used by service personnel after replacing the EEPROM for example It is not required in normal use e CAL Replaces all calibration constants with factory defaults but leaves all the setup parameters unchanged This is also not required in normal use e SETUP Replaces the setup parameters with factory defaults Table 4 1 but leaves the state of calibration unchanged You do not have to break the calibration sticker for this operation Note that remote commands can change the setup parameters See these commands in Chapter 6 SROSTR SPLSTR PUD SP SET UUT SET TEMP STD SRC PREF RTD TYPE D TYPE D LIMIT Front Panel Operation 4 Resetting the Calibrator Table 4 1 Factory Defaults for SETUP Features Temperature Standard its 90 Display Contrast level 7 7 Host Connection gpib IEEE 488 Display Brightness level 1 0 GPIB Port Address 4 RTD Power Up pt385 Default Type Serial Ports 8 bits 1 stop bit xon xoff parity Thermocouple Power K none 9600 baud wait 30 sec Up Default Type EOL end of lin
436. th 1 kHz 0 034 30 V 3V 100 Hz 50th 5 kHz 0 034 30 V 3V 200 Hz 50th 10 kHz 0 034 300 V 3V 50 Hz 20th 1 kHz 0 044 300 V 3V 100 Hz 50th 5 kHz 0 070 300 V 3V 200 Hz 50th 10 kHz 0 070 1000 V 3V 50 Hz 20th 1 kHz 0 056 1000 V 3V 100 Hz 50th 5 kHz 0 170 800 V 3V 200 Hz 50th 10 kHz 0 275 Optional 3V 200 Hz 50th 10 kHz 0 250 1000 V 7 24 Maintenance Performing a Calibration Check 7 28 AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy AUX This verification test is optional It is not necessary to guarantee the full Note calibration of the instrument However it may be useful when troubleshooting an instrument when other functions and or parameters are incorrect The AC Voltage Harmonic Amplitude Accuracy AUX tests the accuracy of the 50th harmonic from the AUX terminals For this test set the 5500A output to sinewave Yrs Qe eie R Pane Deviation _ 90 Spec NORMAL AUX AUX NORMAL AUX 100 mV 329 mV 1 kHz 20 Hz 0 305 100 mV 329 mV 5 kHz 100 Hz 0 424 100 mV 329 mV 10 kHz 200 Hz 0 574 100 mV 3 29 V 1 kHz 20 Hz 0 097 100 mV 3 29 V 5 kHz 100 Hz 0 235 100 mV 3 29 V 10 kHz 200 Hz 0 385 7 29 DC Voltage Offset Accuracy Note This verification test is optional It is not nec
437. thal voltages Do not make connections to the output terminals when any voltage is present Placing the instrument in standby may not be enough to avoid shock hazard since the operate key could be pressed accidentally Press the reset key and verify that the 5500A Calibrator is in standby before making connections to the output terminals This chapter presents instructions for operating the 5500 Calibrator from the front panel For a description of front panel controls displays and terminals see Chapter 3 Features 4 2 Turning on the Calibrator AA Warning To avoid electric shock make sure the 5500A Calibrator is safely grounded as described in Chapter 2 Caution Before turning the 5500A Calibrator on make sure that the line voltage selection is set properly Refer to Selecting Line Voltage in Chapter 2 to check the line voltage setting When the 5500A Calibrator is powered the initial display is Starting Up see below and it completes a self test routine If a self test fails the Control Display identifies an error code For a description of error codes see Chapter 7 Maintenance Starting up 330 auta auta lacked For a discussion of the softkey selection shown above auto locked see Auto Range Versus Locked Range later in this chapter 4 3 5500A Operator Manual 4 4 4 3 4 4 Warming up the Calibrator When you turn on the 5500A allow a warm
438. the appropriate figure from Table 4 2 For capacitance outputs null out stray capacitance by connecting the test leads to the UUT routing them but not connecting to the 5500A Calibrator on a non conductive surface Null out the reading on the UUT using rel offset or null whichever method applies and then connect the test leads to the 5500A Calibrator Table 4 2 UUT Connections 5500A Output Figure Reference Resistance 4 1 Resistance four wire compensated 4 2 Resistance two wire compensated 4 3 Resistance compensation off Capacitance 4 4 Capacitance four wire compensated 4 5 Capacitance two wire compensated 4 6 Capacitance compensation off DC Voltage 4 7 DC Voltage AC Voltage AC Voltage 4 7 DC Voltage AC Voltage DC Current 4 8 DC Current AC Current AC Current 4 8 DC Current AC Current Temperature 4 9 Temperature Resistance Temperature Detector RTD 4 10 Temperature Thermocouple Note See the discussion under Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections above 5500A Operator Manual FLOKE 25004 CALIBRATOR SENSE Q 4 WIRE Figure 4 1 UUT Connection Resistance Four Wire Compensation f4 01 eps FLUKE 25004 CALIBRATOR NORMAL Vn Figure 4 2 UUT Connection Resistance Two Wire Compensation 4 12 AUX A N SENSE SCOPE 200V MAX 4 02 5 Front Panel Operation 4 Connecting the C
439. the open thermocouple detection circuit is set Activates or deactivates the open thermocouple detection circuit in thermocouple measurement mode Returns the last thermocouple TC measurement value Return the last value of the Thermocouple measurement in volts RS 232 UUT Port Commands Flush the UUT receive buffer Return data from the UUT serial port Sends a string to the UUT serial port Sets the UUT serial port settings and saves them in nonvolatile memory Returns the UUT serial port settings contained in nonvolatile memory 6 7 5500A Operator Manual 6 3 Summary of Commands and Queries The following is an alphabetical list of all 5500A Calibrator commands and queries including common commands and device dependent commands Each command title includes a graphic that indicates remote interface applicability IEEE 488 and RS 232 and command group Sequential Overlapped and Coupled IEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232 Applicability X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Each command and query has a check box indicating applicability to IEEE 488 general purpose interface bus or GPIB and RS 232 remote operations For sorting purposes this list ignores the character that precedes the common commands Sequential Commands X Sequential Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands For more information see Sequential Commands in Chapter 5
440. the selected voltage output and the allowable maximum peak signal For example a 10 V p p square wave output has a peak value of 5 V allowing a maximum offset up to 50 V to not exceed the 55 V maximum peak signal The maximum offset values shown above are for the minimum outputs in each range For frequencies 0 01 to 10 Hz and 500 kHz to 2 MHz the offset uncertainty is 5 of output 1 of the offset range 1 35 AC Voltage Square Wave Characteristics Rise Time Settling Time Overshoot 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz Duty Cycle Range Duty Cycle Uncertainty Typical Typical Typical 0 8 of period 140 ns for 10 us to 1 96 1 96 to 99 96 3 3 V p p frequencies gt 10 kHz 0 8 of of final value 0 01 Hz to 100 kHz period 2 us for frequencies 10 kHz 1 For duty cycles of 10 00 to 90 00 1 36 AC Voltage Triangle Wave Characteristics typical Linearity to 1 kHz 0 3 of p p value from 10 to 90 point 1 96 of p p value with amplitude gt 50 of range 1 37 AC Current Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 Maximum Range Frequency of output of range Current Resolution Output All current ranges lt 330 mA 0 01 to 10 Hz 2 digits each range Po 10 Hz to 10 kHz See AC Current Sine Wave Specifications 1 29 5500A Operator Manual 1 38 AC Current Non Sinewave Specifications 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty 5 C
441. thermocouple condition or there is no measurement return 00 Responses measurement value in volts valid measurement 0 00 overload open TC no measurement Example VVAL returns 1 1047E 03 1 1047 mV equivalent to 50 C with type thermocouple and TC reference 23 0 C WAI 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Wait to Continue command Prevent further remote commands from being executed until all previous remote commands have been executed For example if you send an OUT command you can cause the 5500A Calibrator to wait until the output has settled before continuing on to the next command if you follow OUT with a WAI command The WAI command is useful with any overlapped command preventing the 5500A Calibrator from processing other commands until the overlapped command is processed Example WAI Process all existing commands before continuing 6 47 5500A Operator Manual 6 48 WAVE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped X Coupled Waveform command Set the waveforms for ac outputs If the 5500A Calibrator is sourcing one output one parameter is required If the 5500A Calibrator is sourcing two outputs two parameters are required or one parameter to set the waveform to both outputs Waveform choices are SIN
442. through extrapolation MTTR Mean Time to Repair The average time in hours required to repair failed equipment metrology The science of and the field of knowledge concerned with measurement minimum use specifications A compilation of specifications that satisfies the calibration requirements of a measurement system or device The minimum use specifications are usually determined by maintaining a specified test uncertainty ratio between the calibration equipment and the unit under test The 5500A Service Manual contains a table of minimum use specifications for performing full verification noise A signal containing no useful information that is superimposed on a desired or expected signal normal mode noise An undesired signal that appears between the terminals of a device Appendices A Glossary offset error Same as zero error The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is applied is its offset or zero error parameters Independent variables in a measurement process such as temperature humidity test lead resistance etc power factor The ratio of actual power used in a circuit expressed in watts to the power which is apparently being drawn from the source expressed in volt amperes precision The precision of a measurement process is the coherence or the closeness to the one result of all measurement results High precision for example would result in a tight pattern of arrow hits on a target with
443. tie pourraient ne pas s appliquer chaque acheteur Si une disposition quelconque de cette garantie est jug e non valide ou inapplicable par un tribunal comp tent une telle d cision n affectera en rien la validit ou le caract re ex cutoire de toute autre disposition Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B V P O Box 9090 P O Box 1186 Everett WA 98206 9090 5602 B D Eindhoven USA Pays Bas BEFRISTETE GARANTIEBESTIMMUNGEN amp HAFTUNGSBESCHRANKUNG Fur jedes Produkt das Fluke herstellt leistet Fluke eine Garantie f r einwandfreie MaterialqualitGt und fehlerfreie Ausf hrung unter normalen Betriebs und Wartungsbedingungen Der Garantiezeitraum gilt f r ein Jahr und beginnt mit dem Lieferdatum Die Garantiebestimmungen f r Ersatzteile Instandsetzungs und Wartungsarbeiten gelten f r einen Zeitraum von 90 Tagen Diese Garantie wird ausschlieBlich dem Ersterwerber bzw dem Endverbraucher der das betreffende Produkt von einer von Fluke autorisierten Weiterverkaufsstelle erworben hat geleistet und erstreckt sich nicht auf Sicherungen Einwegbatterien oder irgendwelche andere Produkte die nach dem Ermessen von Fluke unsachgemaB verwendet ver ndert vernachlassigt durch Unf lle besch digt oder abnormalen Betriebsbedingungen oder einer unsachgemaBen Handhabung ausgesetzt wurden Fluke garantiert f r einen Zeitraum von 90 Tagen da die Software im wesentlichen in bereinstimmung mit den einschl gigen Funktionsbeschreibungen funktioniert
444. tio thermal emf The voltage generated when two dissimilar metals joined together are heated 5500A Operator Manual thermocouple Two dissimilar metals that when welded together develop a small voltage dependent on the relative temperature between the hotter and colder junction traceability The ability to relate individual measurement results to national standards or nationally accepted measurement systems through an unbroken chain of comparisons i e a calibration audit trail Measurements measurement systems or devices have traceability to the designated standards if and only if scientifically rigorous evidence is produced in a continuing basis to show that the measurement process is producing measurement results for which the total measurement uncertainty relative to national or other designated standards is qualified transfer error The sum of all new errors induced during the process of comparing one quantity against another transfer standard Any working standard used to compare a measurement process system or device at one location or level with another measurement process system or device at another location or level transport standard A transfer standard that is rugged enough to allow shipment by common carrier to another location true power The actual power real power used to produce heat or work Compare to apparent power true value Also called legal value the accepted consensus 1
445. tion e Cabling to a UUT Unit Under Test Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation e Using the auxiliary amplifier Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation e Remote operation IEEE 488 or serial Chapter 5 Remote Operation e Calibrating an Oscilloscope Chapter 8 Oscilloscope Calibration Option e Accessories to the 5500A Calibrator Chapter 9 Accessories e Instrument specifications Chapter 1 Introduction and Specifications Instruction Manuals The 5500A Manual Set provides complete information for opearators and service or maintenance technicians The set includes s 5500A Getting Started Manual PN 945159 e 55004 Operator Reference Guide PN 945097 e 55004A Remote Programming Reference Guide PN 105783 e 55004 Operator Manual Provided on CD ROM or printed copy available for purchase PN 1628802 through the Fluke Service Department 5500A Service Manual PN 105798 The two reference guides and the Getting Started manual are shipped with the unit Order additional copies of the manuals or reference guides separately using the part number provided For ordering instructions refer to the Fluke Catalog or ask a Fluke sales representative see Service Information in Chapter 2 The Operator and Service Manuals are both provided on the CD ROM 5500A Operator Manual This 55004 Operator Manual provides complete information for installing the 55004 Calibrator and operating it from the front panel keys and
446. tion For resistance output compensation is allowed when the resistance is less than 110 kO For capacitance output compensation is allowed when the capacitance is equal to or greater than 110 nF For all other resistances and capacitances the compensation is NONE and attempts to use other parameters results in the error message Can t change compensation now For RTD temperature simulation compensation is allowed for all temperatures Parameter Example NONE W W R E2 R ZCO E4 MP WI Turns off impedance compensation circuitry Turns on the 2 wire impedance compensation circuitry Turns on the 4 wire impedance compensation circuitry RE2 Set 2 wire impedance compensation for the 5500A Calibration UUT connection Resistance if the ohms value is less than 110 KQ capacitance if the farads value is 110 nF or more or RTD temperature simulation any value Remote Commands 6 Summary of Commands and Queries ZCOMP IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Impedance Compensation query Return status of 2 wire or 4 wire impedance compensation Responses NONE impedance compensation is turns off WIRE2 2 wire impedance compensation is on WIRE4 4 wire impedance compensation is off Example ZCOMP returns NONE Return NONE when no impedance compensation is applied to the resis
447. tion 4 Adjusting the Phase 25 9987 I OUT Hove 1123 4 ALS HARMONIC jv WAVE WAVE LO s PHASE HENIS sine sine open HARMONIC FUNDMTL normal i te normal iH ALIX 3 Press the softkey FUNDMTL to select the 5500A Calibrator front panel terminals for the fundamental output either NORMAL or AUX If sourcing an output on the 5725A Amplifier the choices are NORMAL or BOOST where boost is the 5725A Amplifier terminals The harmonic appears on the 5500A AUX terminals 4 Press the softkey HARMNIC to enter the desired harmonic 1 to 50 with a maximum frequency output of 10 kHz For example entering the 7th harmonic below When the control display shows the desired value press Harmonic 1 Hew harmonic 5 Press one or more times to return to previous menus 4 40 Adjusting the Phase When in the dual ac voltage and ac power output modes you can set the calibrator to source two signals with adjustable phase difference All phase adjustments shift the AUX waveform in relation to the NORMAL waveform Phase shift adjustments are entered into the calibrator either as degrees 0 to 180 00 or as a power factor PF leading or positive phase shift will cause the AUX waveform to lead the NORMAL waveform a lagging or negative phase shift will cause the AUX waveform to lag the NORMAL waveform 4 43 5500A Operator Manual 4 41 4 44 The softkey PHASE is available after pressing th
448. tor rear panel CALIBRATION switch does not have to be enabled for this procedure 1 Turn on the Calibrator and allow a warm up period of at least 30 minutes 2 Press the key 3 Install a copper short circuit in the front panel TC connector total instrument zero only 4 7 5500A Operator Manual 4 8 Press the key opening the setup menu below CAL SHO IHSTMT FUTILITY SPEC M SETUP iFLHCTHS Press the CAL softkey opening the calibration information menu below CaL MEE DATES IREPORTS Press the CAL softkey opening the calibration activity menu below SIFY OHMS FRE ACT CAL ZERO backup Press the ZERO softkey to totally zero the 5500A Calibrator press the OHMS ZERO softkey to zero only the ohms function After the zeroing routine is complete several minutes press the key to reset the calibrator 4 12 Using the Operate and Standby Modes When the OPERATE annunciator is lit and OPR is displayed the output value and function shown on the Output Display is active at the selected terminals When STBY is displayed in the Output Display all calibrator outputs are open circuited except for the front panel thermocouple TC terminals To enable the operate mode press To place the calibrator in standby press srev If the calibrator is operating and any of the following events occur the calibrator automatically goes into the standby mode The key is pressed
449. tput is 5 kHz the maximum selection is the 274 harmonic 10 kHz All harmonic frequencies 274 to 50 are available for fundamental outputs between 10 and 200 Hz Example of determining Amplitude Uncertainty in a Dual Output Harmonic Mode What are the amplitude uncertainties for the following dual outputs NORMAL Fundamental Output 100 V 100 HZ er eme From AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications the single output specification for 100 V 100 Hz is 0 015 2 mV For the dual output in this example the specification is 0 015 4 mV as the 0 015 96 is the same and the floor is twice the value 2 x 2 mV AUX 50 Harmonic Output 100 mV 5 5 hs From AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications the auxiliary output specification for 100 mV 5 kHz is 0 15 450 mV For the dual output in this example the specification is 0 15 96 900 mV as the 0 15 96 is the same and the floor is twice the value 2 x 450 mV 1 26 Introduction and Specifications 1 Additional Specifications 1 32 AC Voltage Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty R F ee Maximum Voltage Resoluti ange requency of output of range aximum Voltage Resolution Output Normal Channel Single Output Mode 1 0to33mv 0 10t033mV 33 mV 0 25 e g 25 0 25 34 to 330 mV 0 01 to 10 Hz 50 05 Three digits 04033 _ 4 04033 _ 3 3 V
450. ts or 10 uV whichever is greater 2100 V 5 digits Adjustment Range Continuous 1 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty 0 25 of output 100 uV 2 3 5 C Sequence 1 2 5 e g 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV Square Wave Frequency Characteristics Range 10 Hz to 10 kHz 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 25 ppm of setting 15 mHz 5 C within 20 us from leading edge lt 2 of output 100 uV 1 square wave signal into 1 is a positive square wave from 1 8 mV to 55 V p p From 95 V to 105 V its output is a square wave like signal that alternates between the negative peak and the positive peak with the centerline at 10 V Signals between 55 V and 95 V p p are not available 2 uncertainty for 50 Q loads does not include the input impedance uncertainty of the oscilloscope Square wave signals below 4 5 mV have an uncertainty of 0 25 of output 200 uV 3 Signals from 95 to 105 V p p have an uncertainty of 0 5 of output in the frequency range 100 Hz to 1 kHz Typical uncertainty is 1 5 of output for 95 to 105 V p p signals in the frequency range 10 Hz Typical Aberration to 100 Hz and 0 5 of output in the frequency range 1 kHz to 10 kHz 8 60 5500A SC300 Option 8 Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications 8 79 Edge Function Specifications Edge Characteristics into 50 Amplitude Range p p Resolution Adjustment Range Sequence Other Edge Character
451. uction Manuals sse sese eee eee eee 1 9 55004 Operator Manual sees eee 1 10 5500A Operator Reference 1 11 5500A Remote Programming Reference 4 1 12 5500A Service Manual sees ee ereer ereenn 1 13 725A Amplifier ie 1 14 SpecifiCAtIOnS irn tinens EET eren oe eene neni 1 15 General eene 1 16 DC Voltage Specifications sese eee eee 1 17 DC Current Specifications essen 1 18 Resistance Specifications 0 0000 0 1 19 AC Voltage Sine Wave 1 20 AC Current Sine Wave Specifications 1 21 Capacitance Specifications sese 1 22 Temperature Calibration Thermocouple Specifications 1 23 Temperature Calibration RTD 1 24 DC Power Specification Summary eee 1 25 AC Power 45 Hz to 65 Hz Specification Summary PF 1 1 26 Power and Dual Output Limit 1 27 Phase Specifications esses eee 1 28 Calculating Power Uncertainty eee 5500A Operator Manual 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 37 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 Preparing for Operation 2 1
452. unction is accessed through the Volt menu which appears when you start the SCOPE option or when you press the softkey under MODE to scroll through the oscilloscope calibration menus 002 2 Score SI MDL MODE SCOPE i 21 output 1 volt DC output 53s edge levzine marker gl024i eps Each menu item is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press DC AC Toggles between a dc and ac signal Pressing the softkey from the ac signal produces the dc equivalent output e SCOPE Z Toggles the calibrator s output impedance setting between 1 and 50 e V DIV MENU Opens the voltage scaling menu which lets you select the scale of the signal in volts per division This menu is described below in detail under The V DIV Menu Indicates you are in Volt mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes 8 69 5500A Operator Manual 8 70 8 95 The V DIV Menu The V DIV menu shown below sets the number of volts denoted by each division on the oscilloscope This menu provides alternative methods for changing the output amplitude that may be more convenient for certain oscilloscope applications To access
453. up period of at least 30 minutes for the internal components to stabilize This ensures that the calibrator meets or exceeds the specifications listed in Chapter 1 If you turn the 5500A Calibrator off after warm up and then on again allow a warm up period of at least twice the length of time it was turned off maximum of 30 minutes For example if the calibrator is turned off for 10 minutes and then on again allow a warm up period of at least 20 minutes Using the Softkeys The five keys just to the right of the Previous Menu key are called softkeys Softkey key functions are based on the label that appears directly above the key in the Control Display Pressing a softkey either changes a value or causes a submenu with new selections to appear on the Control Display Softkey menus are arranged in varying levels as described in Softkey Menu Tree in Chapter 3 You can move backwards to previous menu selections by repeatedly pressing Although pressing will also return you to the top level menu it will also reset all volatile settings and return the 5500A Calibrator to dc in the standby mode Use the key as your main navigating tool for moving around the menu levels Using the Setup Menu Press the front panel key for access to various operations and changeable parameters Some parameters are volatile meaning they will be lost during reset or when power is turned off The following descriptions will indicate which parameters are
454. urrent ac Current ac Resistance Capacitance Temperature Celsius Temperature Fahrenheit Update frequency Power dc or update power ac Power ac in dBm update Power ac Power ac in dBm Dual volts dc or update dual ac Dual volts ac in dBm update Dual volts ac in volts Dual volts ac in dBm For single output changes amplitude keeping unit and frequency the same OUT 15 2 V volts 15 2 V 9 same frequency OUT 20 DBM volts 20 dBm same frequency OUT 10 V 60 Hz volts ac 10 V 60 Hz OUT 10 DBM 50 HZ volts ac 10 dBm 50 Hz OUT 1 2 MA current 1 2 mA same frequency OUT 1 A 400 HZ current ac 1 A 400 Hz OUT 1 KOH ohms 1 OUT 1 UF capacitance OUT 100 CEL temperature 100 C OUT 32 FAR temperature 32 F OUT 60 HZ frequency update 60 Hz 6 27 5500A Operator Manual 6 28 OUT 10 V 1A power 10 watts same frequency OUT 15 DBM 5 A power 7 5 watts same frequency OUT 1 1 A 60 HZ power ac 1 watts 60 Hz OUT 5 DBM 1 50 HZ power 5 watts 50 Hz OUT 1 V 2 V dual volts 1 V 2 V 8 same freq OUT 8 DBM 12 DBM dual volts ac 8 12 dBm same freq OUT 10 MV 20 MV 60 HZ dual volts 01 V 02 V 60 Hz OUT 6 DBM 8 DBM 50 HZ dual volts 6 amp 8 dBm 50 Hz Each example shows a value and unit e g 15 2 V If a value is entered without a unit the value of the existing output is changed wh
455. use there are additional fuses mounted on printed circuit assemblies PCAs internal to the 5500A Calibrator The internal fuses are summarized in Table 7 3 and are not operator replaceable For instructions on replacing a PCA fuse refer to the 5500 Service Manual PN 105798 Table 7 3 Non Operator Fuse Replacement Locations Printed Circuit 7 26 Fuse Description Assembly Reference Quantity Part Number A To ensure safety use exact replacement only 0 125 A 250 V Slow A5 Synth Z Board A5F2 A5F3 2 832261 Blow 0 5 A 250 V Slow Blow A12 Filter Board A12F1 A12F2 2 831990 2 A 250 V Slow Blow A3 Mother Board A3F1 to 10 10 806331 Chapter 8 Oscilloscope Calibration Options Option 5500A SC600 see page 8 3 e Option 5500A SC300 see page 8 57 8 1 5500A Operator Manual 8 2 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 8 21 8 22 8 23 8 24 8 25 8 26 8 27 8 28 8 29 8 30 8 31 8 32 8 33 8 34 8 35 5500A SC600 Option Contents Page INtrOdUCHOM SC600 Option 1 Volt Specifications cones te tesi Edge uec Leveled Sine Wave Time Marker Specifications
456. utput on Frequency is 1 100 of the signal at SCOPE output TRIG DIV10 5500A SC600 Option 8 Remote Commands and Queries TRIG IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the output setting of the oscilloscope s trigger Parameters None Response character Returns OFF DIV1 DIV10 or DIV100 OUT IMP IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance Parameters 250 Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance to 50 Q ZIM Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance to 1 MQ Example OUT_IMP 250 OUT_IMP IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the impedance setting of the oscilloscope s output Parameters None RANGE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Programs the instrument range in PULSE MEAS Z OVERLD modes Parameters Pulse TPODB TP8DB TP20DB TP28DB TP40DB TP48DB Range 25 1 0 V 250 mV 100 mV 25 10 Impedance TZ500HM TZ1MOHM TZCAP Measure Range res 50 Q res IMQ cap Overload TOLDC TOLAC Range DC AC Example RANGE TP20DB 8 37 5500A Operator Manual 8 51 Edge Function Commands TDPULSE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Turn tunnel diode pulse drive on off in EDGE mode Parameters ON or non zero or OFF or zero Example TDPULSE ON Returns the tunnel diode pulse drive setting i
457. uyer for importation costs of repair replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country Fluke s warranty obligation is limited at Fluke s option to refund of the purchase price free of charge repair or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period To obtain warranty service contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center or send the product with a description of the difficulty postage and insurance prepaid FOB Destination to the nearest Fluke authorized service center Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit Following warranty repair the product will be returned to Buyer transportation prepaid FOB Destination If Fluke determines that the failure was caused by misuse alteration accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work Following repair the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges FOB Shipping Point THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA
458. vb rs232 exe by selecting the Make EXE File command from the File menu Save the program files by selecting the Save Program command from the File menu 12 Select the Exit command from the File menu to exit Visual Basic 13 In Program Manager select New from the File menu Check Program Group then click OK In the Description box enter RS 232 Test then click OK This creates and opens the RS 232 Test group 14 With the RS 232 Test group still open select New from the File menu Check Program Item then click OK In the Description box enter Test Ports Use Browse to locate your vb rs232 exe file then click OK to enter this file in the Command Line box Click OK This creates the Test Ports icon below RS 232 Test BE Ff Oc bmp D 3 5500A Operator Manual D 4 Appendix Error Message Error Messages The following is a list of the 5500A Calibrator error messages The error message format is shown in Table E 1 Table E 1 Error Message Format Error Number Message Class Description 0 to 65535 QYE Query Error caused F Error is displayed on the front full input buffer unterminated panel as it occurs action or interrupted action DDE Device Specific Error R Error is queued to the caused by the 5500A due to remote interface as it occurs some condition for example overrange EXE Execution Error caused S Error causes instrument to by an element outside of or go to Standby in
459. ware COH2 l O Even C3 None Mark Space Parity Check 0 Carrier Detect F5 0g bmp 6 Verify the 5500A Calibrator is powered and in the reset condition If in doubt press the key on the 5500A Calibrator front panel 7 Onthe Terminal screen type the command REMOTE and press Enter Observe the 5500A Calibrator Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL below REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local 2 2 5 5 9141 5 13 5500A Operator Manual 5 9 The characters REMOTE should have appeared on the terminal screen as they were entered If they did not appear on the screen but the Control Display changed to REMOTE CONTROL then refer to step 4 of the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure and change the REMOTE I F setting from comp to term If nonsense characters appeared on the screen then you have a mismatch is RS 232 parameters Refer to step 4 of the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure procedure for the correct RS 232 settings and then repeat this procedure starting at Step 5 If no characters appeared on the screen then refer to step 3 of the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure procedure to verify serial was selected for the Host port Check that you used the correct RS 232 cable It must be in a null modem configuration where the RX and TX lines are reversed see Appendix D Also verify you have connected to the correct COM port on the PC Type the command LOCAL an
460. y Thermocouple Measuring Accuracy Thermocouple Performance Thermocouple Sourcing Accuracy Time Marker Oscilloscope Calibration 8 27 8 81 OR OR Temperature Simulation Time Marker Calibration Time Marker Function Specifications 8 9 Trianglewave TRIG OUT key 3 7 Trigger Specifications 8 11 8 64 Trigger Tests for Oscilloscope 8 28 8 82 Truncated Sinewave 4 42 Truncated Waveform Truncated 4 42 TSENS TYPE remote command 6 43 TSENS TYPE remote command 6 43 Turning on the Calibrator Types of Commands U 2 3 INDEX 7 5500A Operator Manual INDEX 8 c sing Commands 5 25 sing Multiply and Divide sing the 5725A Amplifier sing the Format EEPROM Menu 4 6 sing the Instrument Setup Menu 4 5 sing the Operate and Standby Modes 4 8 sing the Setup Menu 4 4 sing the Softkeys 4 4 tility Functions Menu 4 6 Connection Capacitance Compensation Off JUT Connection Capacitance Four Wire Compensation 4 13 JUT Connection Capacitance Two Wire Compensation 4 14 Connection DC Voltage AC Voltage 4 15 JUT Connection Resistance Compensation Off 4 13 JUT Connection Resistance Four Wire Compensation 4 12 JUT Connection Resistance Two Wire Compensation 4 12 Connection Temperature RTD 4 15 JUT Connections 4 11 Connect
461. y Response Calibration Frequency Response Calibration Frequency specifications 1 26 Index continued Frequency Sweep for Oscilloscope Calibration 8 24 Front Panel Features 3 3 Front Panel Operation Chapter 44 3 FUNC remote command 6 18 R Fuse Accessing 2 5 Function Generator Fuse Non Operator Replacement 7 27 Fuse Replacement 2 3 Fuse Replacing the 7 3 General Cleaning 7 6 Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator H HARMONIC remote command HARMONIC remote command Harmonics Setting Waveform Harmonics Performance for Amps Harmonics screen Harmonics Performance for Volts Harmonics Screen 1 IDN remote command 488 Bus Setup Procedure 5 7 interface testing the 5 8 Using for Remote Control 5 4 IEEE 488 Interface Cable 9 4 IEEE 488 Interface Messages IEEE 488 Interface Overview IEEE 488 Port Testing 5 8 IEEE 488 Remote Control Connections 5 5 Incoming Character Processing 5 33 INCR remote command Input Buffer Operation Inspection 2 3 Instruction Manuals 1 6 Instrument Setup 4 5 Instrument Status Change Enable Register ISCE 5 40 Change Register ISCR Instrument Status Register Interface Messages Accepted by 5500A Table 5 27 That the 5500A sends Interface Messages IEEE 488 Introduction and Specifications Chapter 1 1 3 ISCE INDEX 3 5500A Operator Manual INDEX 4
462. y error press CE to clear the display then reenter the value output Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation 1 Press to clear any output from the 5500A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 3 Set the UUT to measure ac voltage on the desired range Output in volts Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output maximum six numeric keys For example 2 44949 Output in dBm Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired power output maximum six numeric keys For example 10 0000 For a power output less than 1 mW negative dBm values press to append the numeric entry with the negative symbol 4 19 5500A Operator Manual Note At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above nominal you may notice a slight high pitched sound This is normal Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m 6 Output in volts Press y Output in dBm Press surr y 7 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 2 44949 V below 2 44949 8 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output maximum five numeric keys Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press the kilo multiplier key K Then press the key For example 1 1234 kHz below 9
463. y setting and the reference value of 50 kHz This option is useful for reverting to the reference to check the output after you make adjustments at another frequency MODE Indicates you are in LEVSINE mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other calibration modes Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage The following three options are available for controlling the sine wave settings SET TO LAST F toggles between the last frequency used and the reference frequency of 50 kHz letting you check the output at the reference after you make adjustments at a different frequency MORE OPTIONS lets you use an automatic frequency sweep and lock the voltage range if necessary The following section provides details on this menu The 2 and keys step frequencies up or down in amounts that let you quickly access new set of frequencies For example if the value is 250 kHz changes it to 300 kHz and changes it to 200 kHz For voltage values and step through cardinal point values in a 1 2 3 6 sequence 5500A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 36 The MORE OPTIONS Menu When you select MORE OPTIONS you open options that give you more control over the frequency and voltage To access the MORE OPTIONS menu press the softkey under MORE OPTIONS in the LEVSINE menu FREQ CHG RATE Range MODE jump 1 MHz auto levsine jump 1 MHz
464. ypical Aberration within 4 us from 50 of Table 8 1 Volt Specifications dc Signal 50 Load 1 Load 0 V to 6 6 V 0 V to 130 V Range 1 mV to 24 999 mV 25 mV to 109 99 mV 110 mV to 2 1999 V 2 2 V to 10 999 V 11 V to 130 V 0 25 of 0 05 of 1 mV to 6 6 V output output 40 40 teristics leading trailing edge 1 Selectable positive or negative Volt Function Square Wave Signal 1 50 Q Load 1 MO Load 1 mV to Resolution 1 UV 10 uV 100 uV 1 mV 10 mV Continuously adjustable 0 25 of 0 1 of output 40 output HV 40 uV 2 1 2 5 e g 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV 10 Hz to 10 kHz 2 5 ppm of setting lt 0 5 of output 100 uV zero referenced square wave 2 For square wave frequencies above 1 kHz 0 25 of output 40 uV 130 V p p 5500A SC600 Option 8 SC600 Option Specifications 8 4 Edge Specifications Table 8 2 Edge Specifications Edge Characteristics into 500 Load 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 Rise Time lt 300 ps 0 ps 100 ps Amplitude Range p p 5 0 mV to 2 5 V 296 of output 200 uV Resolution 4 digits Adjustment Range 10 around each sequence value indicated below Sequence Values 5 mV 10 mV 25 mV 50 mV 60 mV 80 mV 100 mV 200 mV 250 mV 300 mV 500 mV 600 mV 1V 2 5V Frequency Range 1 kHz to 2 MHz 1 2 5 ppm of setting Typical Jitter edge to
465. zsmroima mows ome 6 oo 6 1 TTT 33 095 w oo sso 006 so 100 morsu nezno ors so f o so f mo f meos 110 to 330 2 5 to 0 06 Continuously variable from 0 to 330 Applies for COMP OFF to the 5500A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals and 2 wire and 4 wire compensation The floor adder is improved to 0 006 0 to 10 99 Q range and 0 010 Q 11 to 329 999 Q if the 5500A Calibrator is zeroed ohms zero or instrument zero within 8 hours and temperature is 1 C of zeroing ambient temperature Allowable Current 4 Do not exceed the largest current for each range For currents lower than shown the floor adder increases by Floor new Floor old x Imin lactual For example a 100 uA stimulus measuring 100 has a floor uncertainty of 0 01 Q x 1 mA 100 LA 0 1 Q 1 This is for the largest resistance for each range The maximum voltage for other values is Imax highest value of Allowable Current above multiplied by Rout 2 Maximum lead resistance for no additional error in 2 wire COMP 1 5500A Operator Manual 1 19 AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C Range Frequency of output uV Resolution 90 days ors 1 90 o oz 002 eo oos 60 020z 006 so oo so Canzo 0z 600 ooa so i313299v to20K 2600 0 08

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

details details details synonym details wow details on the financial market details of this pc details meaning details damage meter mythic+ details wow addon details of the big beautiful bill details addon details icon details salon details magazine details html details cleaning details flowers login details in spanish translation details barbershop details curseforge details on the financial market today details damage meter details summary html details download details des finanzmarkts details tag html

Related Contents

Bedienungsanleitung Industrie (150  Apostila - IFSC - Universidade de São Paulo    92-031 Legend Interior Squeak and Rattles  cartel - Benemérito Cuerpo de Bomberos de Costa Rica  Phantom Tech HCPH0200000 User's Manual  Trilogy 202  PT-26 Plasma Arc Cutting Torch - ESAB Welding & Cutting Products  IBM 6569 Personal Computer User Manual  Hardware Reference  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file